brain-hackers_pepepper-mirror/linux-brain
1
0
Fork 0
mirror of https://github.com/brain-hackers/linux-brain.git synced 2024-06-09 23:36:23 +09:00
Code Issues Projects Releases Wiki Activity

Merge branch 'x86/boot' into x86/mm, to pick up interacting changes

Browse Source 
The SME patches we are about to apply add some E820 logic, so merge in
pending E820 code changes first, to have a single code base.

Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
This commit is contained in:
Ingo Molnar 2017-07-18 11:36:53 +02:00
commit 1ed7d32763
9032 changed files with 770315 additions and 181749 deletions
Show Stats Download Patch File Download Diff File Expand all files Collapse all files

8
Documentation/00-INDEX
View File

@ -24,8 +24,6 @@ DMA-ISA-LPC.txt
- How to do DMA with ISA (and LPC) devices.
DMA-attributes.txt
- listing of the various possible attributes a DMA region can have
DocBook/
- directory with DocBook templates etc. for kernel documentation.
EDID/
- directory with info on customizing EDID for broken gfx/displays.
IPMI.txt
@ -40,8 +38,6 @@ Intel-IOMMU.txt
- basic info on the Intel IOMMU virtualization support.
Makefile
- It's not of interest for those who aren't touching the build system.
Makefile.sphinx
- It's not of interest for those who aren't touching the build system.
PCI/
- info related to PCI drivers.
RCU/
@ -246,8 +242,6 @@ kprobes.txt
- documents the kernel probes debugging feature.
kref.txt
- docs on adding reference counters (krefs) to kernel objects.
kselftest.txt
- small unittests for (some) individual codepaths in the kernel.
laptops/
- directory with laptop related info and laptop driver documentation.
ldm.txt
@ -264,6 +258,8 @@ logo.gif
- full colour GIF image of Linux logo (penguin - Tux).
logo.txt
- info on creator of above logo & site to get additional images from.
lsm.txt
- Linux Security Modules: General Security Hooks for Linux
lzo.txt
- kernel LZO decompressor input formats
m68k/

16
Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-udc
View File

@ -55,14 +55,6 @@ Description:
Indicates the maximum USB speed supported by this port.
Users:
What: /sys/class/udc/<udc>/maximum_speed
Date: June 2011
KernelVersion: 3.1
Contact: Felipe Balbi <balbi@kernel.org>
Description:
Indicates the maximum USB speed supported by this port.
Users:
What: /sys/class/udc/<udc>/soft_connect
Date: June 2011
KernelVersion: 3.1
@ -91,3 +83,11 @@ Description:
'configured', and 'suspended'; however not all USB Device
Controllers support reporting all states.
Users:
What: /sys/class/udc/<udc>/function
Date: June 2017
KernelVersion: 4.13
Contact: Felipe Balbi <balbi@kernel.org>
Description:
Prints out name of currently running USB Gadget Driver.
Users:

15
Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-aspeed-vuart Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
What: /sys/bus/platform/drivers/aspeed-vuart/*/lpc_address
Date: April 2017
Contact: Jeremy Kerr <jk@ozlabs.org>
Description: Configures which IO port the host side of the UART
will appear on the host <-> BMC LPC bus.
Users: OpenBMC. Proposed changes should be mailed to
openbmc@lists.ozlabs.org
What: /sys/bus/platform/drivers/aspeed-vuart*/sirq
Date: April 2017
Contact: Jeremy Kerr <jk@ozlabs.org>
Description: Configures which interrupt number the host side of
the UART will appear on the host <-> BMC LPC bus.
Users: OpenBMC. Proposed changes should be mailed to
openbmc@lists.ozlabs.org

119
Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-hypervisor-xen Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
What: /sys/hypervisor/compilation/compile_date
Date: March 2009
KernelVersion: 2.6.30
Contact: xen-devel@lists.xenproject.org
Description: If running under Xen:
Contains the build time stamp of the Xen hypervisor
Might return "<denied>" in case of special security settings
in the hypervisor.
What: /sys/hypervisor/compilation/compiled_by
Date: March 2009
KernelVersion: 2.6.30
Contact: xen-devel@lists.xenproject.org
Description: If running under Xen:
Contains information who built the Xen hypervisor
Might return "<denied>" in case of special security settings
in the hypervisor.
What: /sys/hypervisor/compilation/compiler
Date: March 2009
KernelVersion: 2.6.30
Contact: xen-devel@lists.xenproject.org
Description: If running under Xen:
Compiler which was used to build the Xen hypervisor
Might return "<denied>" in case of special security settings
in the hypervisor.
What: /sys/hypervisor/properties/capabilities
Date: March 2009
KernelVersion: 2.6.30
Contact: xen-devel@lists.xenproject.org
Description: If running under Xen:
Space separated list of supported guest system types. Each type
is in the format: <class>-<major>.<minor>-<arch>
With:
<class>: "xen" -- x86: paravirtualized, arm: standard
"hvm" -- x86 only: fully virtualized
<major>: major guest interface version
<minor>: minor guest interface version
<arch>: architecture, e.g.:
"x86_32": 32 bit x86 guest without PAE
"x86_32p": 32 bit x86 guest with PAE
"x86_64": 64 bit x86 guest
"armv7l": 32 bit arm guest
"aarch64": 64 bit arm guest
What: /sys/hypervisor/properties/changeset
Date: March 2009
KernelVersion: 2.6.30
Contact: xen-devel@lists.xenproject.org
Description: If running under Xen:
Changeset of the hypervisor (git commit)
Might return "<denied>" in case of special security settings
in the hypervisor.
What: /sys/hypervisor/properties/features
Date: March 2009
KernelVersion: 2.6.30
Contact: xen-devel@lists.xenproject.org
Description: If running under Xen:
Features the Xen hypervisor supports for the guest as defined
in include/xen/interface/features.h printed as a hex value.
What: /sys/hypervisor/properties/pagesize
Date: March 2009
KernelVersion: 2.6.30
Contact: xen-devel@lists.xenproject.org
Description: If running under Xen:
Default page size of the hypervisor printed as a hex value.
Might return "0" in case of special security settings
in the hypervisor.
What: /sys/hypervisor/properties/virtual_start
Date: March 2009
KernelVersion: 2.6.30
Contact: xen-devel@lists.xenproject.org
Description: If running under Xen:
Virtual address of the hypervisor as a hex value.
What: /sys/hypervisor/type
Date: March 2009
KernelVersion: 2.6.30
Contact: xen-devel@lists.xenproject.org
Description: If running under Xen:
Type of hypervisor:
"xen": Xen hypervisor
What: /sys/hypervisor/uuid
Date: March 2009
KernelVersion: 2.6.30
Contact: xen-devel@lists.xenproject.org
Description: If running under Xen:
UUID of the guest as known to the Xen hypervisor.
What: /sys/hypervisor/version/extra
Date: March 2009
KernelVersion: 2.6.30
Contact: xen-devel@lists.xenproject.org
Description: If running under Xen:
The Xen version is in the format <major>.<minor><extra>
This is the <extra> part of it.
Might return "<denied>" in case of special security settings
in the hypervisor.
What: /sys/hypervisor/version/major
Date: March 2009
KernelVersion: 2.6.30
Contact: xen-devel@lists.xenproject.org
Description: If running under Xen:
The Xen version is in the format <major>.<minor><extra>
This is the <major> part of it.
What: /sys/hypervisor/version/minor
Date: March 2009
KernelVersion: 2.6.30
Contact: xen-devel@lists.xenproject.org
Description: If running under Xen:
The Xen version is in the format <major>.<minor><extra>
This is the <minor> part of it.

18
Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-uac1
View File

@ -1,12 +1,14 @@
What: /config/usb-gadget/gadget/functions/uac1.name
Date: Sep 2014
KernelVersion: 3.18
Date: June 2017
KernelVersion: 4.14
Description:
The attributes:
audio_buf_size - audio buffer size
fn_cap - capture pcm device file name
fn_cntl - control device file name
fn_play - playback pcm device file name
req_buf_size - ISO OUT endpoint request buffer size
req_count - ISO OUT endpoint request count
c_chmask - capture channel mask
c_srate - capture sampling rate
c_ssize - capture sample size (bytes)
p_chmask - playback channel mask
p_srate - playback sampling rate
p_ssize - playback sample size (bytes)
req_number - the number of pre-allocated request
for both capture and playback

12
Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-uac1_legacy Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
What: /config/usb-gadget/gadget/functions/uac1_legacy.name
Date: Sep 2014
KernelVersion: 3.18
Description:
The attributes:
audio_buf_size - audio buffer size
fn_cap - capture pcm device file name
fn_cntl - control device file name
fn_play - playback pcm device file name
req_buf_size - ISO OUT endpoint request buffer size
req_count - ISO OUT endpoint request count

8
Documentation/ABI/testing/ima_policy
View File

@ -34,9 +34,10 @@ Description:
fsuuid:= file system UUID (e.g 8bcbe394-4f13-4144-be8e-5aa9ea2ce2f6)
uid:= decimal value
euid:= decimal value
fowner:=decimal value
fowner:= decimal value
lsm: are LSM specific
option: appraise_type:= [imasig]
pcr:= decimal value
default policy:
# PROC_SUPER_MAGIC
@ -96,3 +97,8 @@ Description:
Smack:
measure subj_user=_ func=FILE_CHECK mask=MAY_READ
Example of measure rules using alternate PCRs:
measure func=KEXEC_KERNEL_CHECK pcr=4
measure func=KEXEC_INITRAMFS_CHECK pcr=5

38
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-fsi Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/fsi-master/rescan
Date: May 2017
KernelVersion: 4.12
Contact: cbostic@linux.vnet.ibm.com
Description:
Initiates a FSI master scan for all connected slave devices
on its links.
What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/fsi-master/break
Date: May 2017
KernelVersion: 4.12
Contact: cbostic@linux.vnet.ibm.com
Description:
Sends an FSI BREAK command on a master's communication
link to any connnected slaves. A BREAK resets connected
device's logic and preps it to receive further commands
from the master.
What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/fsi-master/slave@00:00/term
Date: May 2017
KernelVersion: 4.12
Contact: cbostic@linux.vnet.ibm.com
Description:
Sends an FSI terminate command from the master to its
connected slave. A terminate resets the slave's state machines
that control access to the internally connected engines. In
addition the slave freezes its internal error register for
debugging purposes. This command is also needed to abort any
ongoing operation in case of an expired 'Master Time Out'
timer.
What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/fsi-master/slave@00:00/raw
Date: May 2017
KernelVersion: 4.12
Contact: cbostic@linux.vnet.ibm.com
Description:
Provides a means of reading/writing a 32 bit value from/to a
specified FSI bus address.

11
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio
View File

@ -1425,6 +1425,17 @@ Description:
guarantees that the hardware fifo is flushed to the device
buffer.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:device*/buffer/hwfifo_timeout
KernelVersion: 4.12
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
A read/write property to provide capability to delay reporting of
samples till a timeout is reached. This allows host processors to
sleep, while the sensor is storing samples in its internal fifo.
The maximum timeout in seconds can be specified by setting
hwfifo_timeout.The current delay can be read by reading
hwfifo_timeout. A value of 0 means that there is no timeout.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/buffer/hwfifo_watermark
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org

1
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-meas-spec
View File

@ -5,4 +5,3 @@ Description:
Reading returns either '1' or '0'. '1' means that the
battery level supplied to sensor is below 2.25V.
This ABI is available for tsys02d, htu21, ms8607
This ABI is available for htu21, ms8607

63
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-timer-stm32
View File

@ -16,6 +16,54 @@ Description:
- "OC2REF" : OC2REF signal is used as trigger output.
- "OC3REF" : OC3REF signal is used as trigger output.
- "OC4REF" : OC4REF signal is used as trigger output.
Additional modes (on TRGO2 only):
- "OC5REF" : OC5REF signal is used as trigger output.
- "OC6REF" : OC6REF signal is used as trigger output.
- "compare_pulse_OC4REF":
OC4REF rising or falling edges generate pulses.
- "compare_pulse_OC6REF":
OC6REF rising or falling edges generate pulses.
- "compare_pulse_OC4REF_r_or_OC6REF_r":
OC4REF or OC6REF rising edges generate pulses.
- "compare_pulse_OC4REF_r_or_OC6REF_f":
OC4REF rising or OC6REF falling edges generate pulses.
- "compare_pulse_OC5REF_r_or_OC6REF_r":
OC5REF or OC6REF rising edges generate pulses.
- "compare_pulse_OC5REF_r_or_OC6REF_f":
OC5REF rising or OC6REF falling edges generate pulses.
+-----------+ +-------------+ +---------+
| Prescaler +-> | Counter | +-> | Master | TRGO(2)
+-----------+ +--+--------+-+ |-> | Control +-->
| | || +---------+
+--v--------+-+ OCxREF || +---------+
| Chx compare +----------> | Output | ChX
+-----------+-+ | | Control +-->
. | | +---------+
. | | .
+-----------v-+ OC6REF | .
| Ch6 compare +---------+>
+-------------+
Example with: "compare_pulse_OC4REF_r_or_OC6REF_r":
X
X X
X . . X
X . . X
X . . X
count X . . . . X
. . . .
. . . .
+---------------+
OC4REF | . . |
+-+ . . +-+
. +---+ .
OC6REF . | | .
+-------+ +-------+
+-+ +-+
TRGO2 | | | |
+-+ +---+ +---------+
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/triggerX/master_mode
KernelVersion: 4.11
@ -90,3 +138,18 @@ Description:
Counting is enabled on rising edge of the connected
trigger, and remains enabled for the duration of this
selected mode.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_count_trigger_mode_available
KernelVersion: 4.13
Contact: benjamin.gaignard@st.com
Description:
Reading returns the list possible trigger modes.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_count0_trigger_mode
KernelVersion: 4.13
Contact: benjamin.gaignard@st.com
Description:
Configure the device counter trigger mode
counting direction is set by in_count0_count_direction
attribute and the counter is clocked by the connected trigger
rising edges.

110
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-thunderbolt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
What: /sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/.../domainX/security
Date: Sep 2017
KernelVersion: 4.13
Contact: thunderbolt-software@lists.01.org
Description: This attribute holds current Thunderbolt security level
set by the system BIOS. Possible values are:
none: All devices are automatically authorized
user: Devices are only authorized based on writing
appropriate value to the authorized attribute
secure: Require devices that support secure connect at
minimum. User needs to authorize each device.
dponly: Automatically tunnel Display port (and USB). No
PCIe tunnels are created.
What: /sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/.../authorized
Date: Sep 2017
KernelVersion: 4.13
Contact: thunderbolt-software@lists.01.org
Description: This attribute is used to authorize Thunderbolt devices
after they have been connected. If the device is not
authorized, no devices such as PCIe and Display port are
available to the system.
Contents of this attribute will be 0 when the device is not
yet authorized.
Possible values are supported:
1: The device will be authorized and connected
When key attribute contains 32 byte hex string the possible
values are:
1: The 32 byte hex string is added to the device NVM and
the device is authorized.
2: Send a challenge based on the 32 byte hex string. If the
challenge response from device is valid, the device is
authorized. In case of failure errno will be ENOKEY if
the device did not contain a key at all, and
EKEYREJECTED if the challenge response did not match.
What: /sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/.../key
Date: Sep 2017
KernelVersion: 4.13
Contact: thunderbolt-software@lists.01.org
Description: When a devices supports Thunderbolt secure connect it will
have this attribute. Writing 32 byte hex string changes
authorization to use the secure connection method instead.
What: /sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/.../device
Date: Sep 2017
KernelVersion: 4.13
Contact: thunderbolt-software@lists.01.org
Description: This attribute contains id of this device extracted from
the device DROM.
What: /sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/.../device_name
Date: Sep 2017
KernelVersion: 4.13
Contact: thunderbolt-software@lists.01.org
Description: This attribute contains name of this device extracted from
the device DROM.
What: /sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/.../vendor
Date: Sep 2017
KernelVersion: 4.13
Contact: thunderbolt-software@lists.01.org
Description: This attribute contains vendor id of this device extracted
from the device DROM.
What: /sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/.../vendor_name
Date: Sep 2017
KernelVersion: 4.13
Contact: thunderbolt-software@lists.01.org
Description: This attribute contains vendor name of this device extracted
from the device DROM.
What: /sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/.../unique_id
Date: Sep 2017
KernelVersion: 4.13
Contact: thunderbolt-software@lists.01.org
Description: This attribute contains unique_id string of this device.
This is either read from hardware registers (UUID on
newer hardware) or based on UID from the device DROM.
Can be used to uniquely identify particular device.
What: /sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/.../nvm_version
Date: Sep 2017
KernelVersion: 4.13
Contact: thunderbolt-software@lists.01.org
Description: If the device has upgradeable firmware the version
number is available here. Format: %x.%x, major.minor.
If the device is in safe mode reading the file returns
-ENODATA instead as the NVM version is not available.
What: /sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/.../nvm_authenticate
Date: Sep 2017
KernelVersion: 4.13
Contact: thunderbolt-software@lists.01.org
Description: When new NVM image is written to the non-active NVM
area (through non_activeX NVMem device), the
authentication procedure is started by writing 1 to
this file. If everything goes well, the device is
restarted with the new NVM firmware. If the image
verification fails an error code is returned instead.
When read holds status of the last authentication
operation if an error occurred during the process. This
is directly the status value from the DMA configuration
based mailbox before the device is power cycled. Writing
0 here clears the status.

6
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mtd
View File

@ -229,6 +229,6 @@ KernelVersion: 4.1
Contact: linux-mtd@lists.infradead.org
Description:
For a partition, the offset of that partition from the start
of the master device in bytes. This attribute is absent on
main devices, so it can be used to distinguish between
partitions and devices that aren't partitions.
of the parent (another partition or a flash device) in bytes.
This attribute is absent on flash devices, so it can be used
to distinguish them from partitions.

16
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mux Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
What: /sys/class/mux/
Date: April 2017
KernelVersion: 4.13
Contact: Peter Rosin <peda@axentia.se>
Description:
The mux/ class sub-directory belongs to the Generic MUX
Framework and provides a sysfs interface for using MUX
controllers.
What: /sys/class/mux/muxchipN/
Date: April 2017
KernelVersion: 4.13
Contact: Peter Rosin <peda@axentia.se>
Description:
A /sys/class/mux/muxchipN directory is created for each
probed MUX chip where N is a simple enumeration.

8
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net
View File

@ -251,3 +251,11 @@ Contact: netdev@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Indicates the unique physical switch identifier of a switch this
port belongs to, as a string.
What: /sys/class/net/<iface>/phydev
Date: May 2017
KernelVersion: 4.13
Contact: netdev@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Symbolic link to the PHY device this network device is attached
to.

36
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-phydev Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
What: /sys/class/mdio_bus/<bus>/<device>/attached_dev
Date: May 2017
KernelVersion: 4.13
Contact: netdev@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Symbolic link to the network device this PHY device is
attached to.
What: /sys/class/mdio_bus/<bus>/<device>/phy_has_fixups
Date: February 2014
KernelVersion: 3.15
Contact: netdev@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Boolean value indicating whether the PHY device has
any fixups registered against it (phy_register_fixup)
What: /sys/class/mdio_bus/<bus>/<device>/phy_id
Date: November 2012
KernelVersion: 3.8
Contact: netdev@vger.kernel.org
Description:
32-bit hexadecimal value corresponding to the PHY device's OUI,
model and revision number.
What: /sys/class/mdio_bus/<bus>/<device>/phy_interface
Date: February 2014
KernelVersion: 3.15
Contact: netdev@vger.kernel.org
Description:
String value indicating the PHY interface, possible
values are:.
<empty> (not available), mii, gmii, sgmii, tbi, rev-mii,
rmii, rgmii, rgmii-id, rgmii-rxid, rgmii-txid, rtbi, smii
xgmii, moca, qsgmii, trgmii, 1000base-x, 2500base-x, rxaui,
xaui, 10gbase-kr, unknown

17
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-power-twl4030
View File

@ -1,20 +1,3 @@
What: /sys/class/power_supply/twl4030_ac/max_current
/sys/class/power_supply/twl4030_usb/max_current
Description:
Read/Write limit on current which may
be drawn from the ac (Accessory Charger) or
USB port.
Value is in micro-Amps.
Value is set automatically to an appropriate
value when a cable is plugged or unplugged.
Value can the set by writing to the attribute.
The change will only persist until the next
plug event. These event are reported via udev.
What: /sys/class/power_supply/twl4030_usb/mode
Description:
Changing mode for USB port.

15
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-typec
View File

@ -30,6 +30,21 @@ Description:
Valid values: source, sink
What: /sys/class/typec/<port>/port_type
Date: May 2017
Contact: Badhri Jagan Sridharan <Badhri@google.com>
Description:
Indicates the type of the port. This attribute can be used for
requesting a change in the port type. Port type change is
supported as a synchronous operation, so write(2) to the
attribute will not return until the operation has finished.
Valid values:
- source (The port will behave as source only DFP port)
- sink (The port will behave as sink only UFP port)
- dual (The port will behave as dual-role-data and
dual-role-power port)
What: /sys/class/typec/<port>/vconn_source
Date: April 2017
Contact: Heikki Krogerus <heikki.krogerus@linux.intel.com>

26
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-ofw
View File

@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
What: /sys/firmware/devicetree/*
Date: November 2013
Contact: Grant Likely <grant.likely@linaro.org>
Contact: Grant Likely <grant.likely@arm.com>, devicetree@vger.kernel.org
Description:
When using OpenFirmware or a Flattened Device Tree to enumerate
hardware, the device tree structure will be exposed in this
@ -26,3 +26,27 @@ Description:
name plus address). Properties are represented as files
in the directory. The contents of each file is the exact
binary data from the device tree.
What: /sys/firmware/fdt
Date: February 2015
KernelVersion: 3.19
Contact: Frank Rowand <frowand.list@gmail.com>, devicetree@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Exports the FDT blob that was passed to the kernel by
the bootloader. This allows userland applications such
as kexec to access the raw binary. This blob is also
useful when debugging since it contains any changes
made to the blob by the bootloader.
The fact that this node does not reside under
/sys/firmware/device-tree is deliberate: FDT is also used
on arm64 UEFI/ACPI systems to communicate just the UEFI
and ACPI entry points, but the FDT is never unflattened
and used to configure the system.
A CRC32 checksum is calculated over the entire FDT
blob, and verified at late_initcall time. The sysfs
entry is instantiated only if the checksum is valid,
i.e., if the FDT blob has not been modified in the mean
time. Otherwise, a warning is printed.
Users: kexec, debugging

20
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-f2fs
View File

@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Contact: "Jaegeuk Kim" <jaegeuk.kim@samsung.com>
Description:
Controls the memory footprint used by f2fs.
What: /sys/fs/f2fs/<disk>/trim_sections
What: /sys/fs/f2fs/<disk>/batched_trim_sections
Date: February 2015
Contact: "Jaegeuk Kim" <jaegeuk@kernel.org>
Description:
@ -112,3 +112,21 @@ Date: January 2016
Contact: "Shuoran Liu" <liushuoran@huawei.com>
Description:
Shows total written kbytes issued to disk.
What: /sys/fs/f2fs/<disk>/inject_rate
Date: May 2016
Contact: "Sheng Yong" <shengyong1@huawei.com>
Description:
Controls the injection rate.
What: /sys/fs/f2fs/<disk>/inject_type
Date: May 2016
Contact: "Sheng Yong" <shengyong1@huawei.com>
Description:
Controls the injection type.
What: /sys/fs/f2fs/<disk>/reserved_blocks
Date: June 2017
Contact: "Chao Yu" <yuchao0@huawei.com>
Description:
Controls current reserved blocks in system.

24
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-hypervisor-pmu → Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-hypervisor-xen
View File

@ -1,8 +1,19 @@
What: /sys/hypervisor/guest_type
Date: June 2017
KernelVersion: 4.13
Contact: xen-devel@lists.xenproject.org
Description: If running under Xen:
Type of guest:
"Xen": standard guest type on arm
"HVM": fully virtualized guest (x86)
"PV": paravirtualized guest (x86)
"PVH": fully virtualized guest without legacy emulation (x86)
What: /sys/hypervisor/pmu/pmu_mode
Date: August 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com>
Description:
Description: If running under Xen:
Describes mode that Xen's performance-monitoring unit (PMU)
uses. Accepted values are
"off" -- PMU is disabled
@ -17,7 +28,16 @@ What: /sys/hypervisor/pmu/pmu_features
Date: August 2015
KernelVersion: 4.3
Contact: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com>
Description:
Description: If running under Xen:
Describes Xen PMU features (as an integer). A set bit indicates
that the corresponding feature is enabled. See
include/xen/interface/xenpmu.h for available features
What: /sys/hypervisor/properties/buildid
Date: June 2017
KernelVersion: 4.13
Contact: xen-devel@lists.xenproject.org
Description: If running under Xen:
Build id of the hypervisor, needed for hypervisor live patching.
Might return "<denied>" in case of special security settings
in the hypervisor.

8
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-ideapad-laptop
View File

@ -17,3 +17,11 @@ Description:
* 2 -> Dust Cleaning
* 4 -> Efficient Thermal Dissipation Mode
What: /sys/devices/platform/ideapad/touchpad
Date: May 2017
KernelVersion: 4.13
Contact: "Ritesh Raj Sarraf <rrs@debian.org>"
Description:
Control touchpad mode.
* 1 -> Switched On
* 0 -> Switched Off

47
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-uevent Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
What: /sys/.../uevent
Date: May 2017
KernelVersion: 4.13
Contact: Linux kernel mailing list <linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org>
Description:
Enable passing additional variables for synthetic uevents that
are generated by writing /sys/.../uevent file.
Recognized extended format is ACTION [UUID [KEY=VALUE ...].
The ACTION is compulsory - it is the name of the uevent action
("add", "change", "remove"). There is no change compared to
previous functionality here. The rest of the extended format
is optional.
You need to pass UUID first before any KEY=VALUE pairs.
The UUID must be in "xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx"
format where 'x' is a hex digit. The UUID is considered to be
a transaction identifier so it's possible to use the same UUID
value for one or more synthetic uevents in which case we
logically group these uevents together for any userspace
listeners. The UUID value appears in uevent as
"SYNTH_UUID=xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx" environment
variable.
If UUID is not passed in, the generated synthetic uevent gains
"SYNTH_UUID=0" environment variable automatically.
The KEY=VALUE pairs can contain alphanumeric characters only.
It's possible to define zero or more pairs - each pair is then
delimited by a space character ' '. Each pair appears in
synthetic uevent as "SYNTH_ARG_KEY=VALUE". That means the KEY
name gains "SYNTH_ARG_" prefix to avoid possible collisions
with existing variables.
Example of valid sequence written to the uevent file:
add fe4d7c9d-b8c6-4a70-9ef1-3d8a58d18eed A=1 B=abc
This generates synthetic uevent including these variables:
ACTION=add
SYNTH_ARG_A=1
SYNTH_ARG_B=abc
SYNTH_UUID=fe4d7c9d-b8c6-4a70-9ef1-3d8a58d18eed
Users:
udev, userspace tools generating synthetic uevents

184
Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt
View File

@ -1,22 +1,24 @@
Dynamic DMA mapping Guide
=========================
=========================
Dynamic DMA mapping Guide
=========================
David S. Miller <davem@redhat.com>
Richard Henderson <rth@cygnus.com>
Jakub Jelinek <jakub@redhat.com>
:Author: David S. Miller <davem@redhat.com>
:Author: Richard Henderson <rth@cygnus.com>
:Author: Jakub Jelinek <jakub@redhat.com>
This is a guide to device driver writers on how to use the DMA API
with example pseudo-code. For a concise description of the API, see
DMA-API.txt.
CPU and DMA addresses
CPU and DMA addresses
=====================
There are several kinds of addresses involved in the DMA API, and it's
important to understand the differences.
The kernel normally uses virtual addresses. Any address returned by
kmalloc(), vmalloc(), and similar interfaces is a virtual address and can
be stored in a "void *".
be stored in a ``void *``.
The virtual memory system (TLB, page tables, etc.) translates virtual
addresses to CPU physical addresses, which are stored as "phys_addr_t" or
@ -37,7 +39,7 @@ be restricted to a subset of that space. For example, even if a system
supports 64-bit addresses for main memory and PCI BARs, it may use an IOMMU
so devices only need to use 32-bit DMA addresses.
Here's a picture and some examples:
Here's a picture and some examples::
CPU CPU Bus
Virtual Physical Address
@ -98,15 +100,16 @@ microprocessor architecture. You should use the DMA API rather than the
bus-specific DMA API, i.e., use the dma_map_*() interfaces rather than the
pci_map_*() interfaces.
First of all, you should make sure
First of all, you should make sure::
#include <linux/dma-mapping.h>
#include <linux/dma-mapping.h>
is in your driver, which provides the definition of dma_addr_t. This type
can hold any valid DMA address for the platform and should be used
everywhere you hold a DMA address returned from the DMA mapping functions.
What memory is DMA'able?
What memory is DMA'able?
========================
The first piece of information you must know is what kernel memory can
be used with the DMA mapping facilities. There has been an unwritten
@ -143,7 +146,8 @@ What about block I/O and networking buffers? The block I/O and
networking subsystems make sure that the buffers they use are valid
for you to DMA from/to.
DMA addressing limitations
DMA addressing limitations
==========================
Does your device have any DMA addressing limitations? For example, is
your device only capable of driving the low order 24-bits of address?
@ -166,7 +170,7 @@ style to do this even if your device holds the default setting,
because this shows that you did think about these issues wrt. your
device.
The query is performed via a call to dma_set_mask_and_coherent():
The query is performed via a call to dma_set_mask_and_coherent()::
int dma_set_mask_and_coherent(struct device *dev, u64 mask);
@ -175,12 +179,12 @@ If you have some special requirements, then the following two separate
queries can be used instead:
The query for streaming mappings is performed via a call to
dma_set_mask():
dma_set_mask()::
int dma_set_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask);
The query for consistent allocations is performed via a call
to dma_set_coherent_mask():
to dma_set_coherent_mask()::
int dma_set_coherent_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask);
@ -209,7 +213,7 @@ of your driver reports that performance is bad or that the device is not
even detected, you can ask them for the kernel messages to find out
exactly why.
The standard 32-bit addressing device would do something like this:
The standard 32-bit addressing device would do something like this::
if (dma_set_mask_and_coherent(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(32))) {
dev_warn(dev, "mydev: No suitable DMA available\n");
@ -225,7 +229,7 @@ than 64-bit addressing. For example, Sparc64 PCI SAC addressing is
more efficient than DAC addressing.
Here is how you would handle a 64-bit capable device which can drive
all 64-bits when accessing streaming DMA:
all 64-bits when accessing streaming DMA::
int using_dac;
@ -239,7 +243,7 @@ all 64-bits when accessing streaming DMA:
}
If a card is capable of using 64-bit consistent allocations as well,
the case would look like this:
the case would look like this::
int using_dac, consistent_using_dac;
@ -260,7 +264,7 @@ uses consistent allocations, one would have to check the return value from
dma_set_coherent_mask().
Finally, if your device can only drive the low 24-bits of
address you might do something like:
address you might do something like::
if (dma_set_mask(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(24))) {
dev_warn(dev, "mydev: 24-bit DMA addressing not available\n");
@ -280,7 +284,7 @@ only provide the functionality which the machine can handle. It
is important that the last call to dma_set_mask() be for the
most specific mask.
Here is pseudo-code showing how this might be done:
Here is pseudo-code showing how this might be done::
#define PLAYBACK_ADDRESS_BITS DMA_BIT_MASK(32)
#define RECORD_ADDRESS_BITS DMA_BIT_MASK(24)
@ -308,7 +312,8 @@ A sound card was used as an example here because this genre of PCI
devices seems to be littered with ISA chips given a PCI front end,
and thus retaining the 16MB DMA addressing limitations of ISA.
Types of DMA mappings
Types of DMA mappings
=====================
There are two types of DMA mappings:
@ -336,12 +341,14 @@ There are two types of DMA mappings:
to memory is immediately visible to the device, and vice
versa. Consistent mappings guarantee this.
IMPORTANT: Consistent DMA memory does not preclude the usage of
proper memory barriers. The CPU may reorder stores to
.. important::
Consistent DMA memory does not preclude the usage of
proper memory barriers. The CPU may reorder stores to
consistent memory just as it may normal memory. Example:
if it is important for the device to see the first word
of a descriptor updated before the second, you must do
something like:
something like::
desc->word0 = address;
wmb();
@ -377,16 +384,17 @@ Also, systems with caches that aren't DMA-coherent will work better
when the underlying buffers don't share cache lines with other data.
Using Consistent DMA mappings.
Using Consistent DMA mappings
=============================
To allocate and map large (PAGE_SIZE or so) consistent DMA regions,
you should do:
you should do::
dma_addr_t dma_handle;
cpu_addr = dma_alloc_coherent(dev, size, &dma_handle, gfp);
where device is a struct device *. This may be called in interrupt
where device is a ``struct device *``. This may be called in interrupt
context with the GFP_ATOMIC flag.
Size is the length of the region you want to allocate, in bytes.
@ -415,7 +423,7 @@ exists (for example) to guarantee that if you allocate a chunk
which is smaller than or equal to 64 kilobytes, the extent of the
buffer you receive will not cross a 64K boundary.
To unmap and free such a DMA region, you call:
To unmap and free such a DMA region, you call::
dma_free_coherent(dev, size, cpu_addr, dma_handle);
@ -430,7 +438,7 @@ a kmem_cache, but it uses dma_alloc_coherent(), not __get_free_pages().
Also, it understands common hardware constraints for alignment,
like queue heads needing to be aligned on N byte boundaries.
Create a dma_pool like this:
Create a dma_pool like this::
struct dma_pool *pool;
@ -444,7 +452,7 @@ pass 0 for boundary; passing 4096 says memory allocated from this pool
must not cross 4KByte boundaries (but at that time it may be better to
use dma_alloc_coherent() directly instead).
Allocate memory from a DMA pool like this:
Allocate memory from a DMA pool like this::
cpu_addr = dma_pool_alloc(pool, flags, &dma_handle);
@ -452,7 +460,7 @@ flags are GFP_KERNEL if blocking is permitted (not in_interrupt nor
holding SMP locks), GFP_ATOMIC otherwise. Like dma_alloc_coherent(),
this returns two values, cpu_addr and dma_handle.
Free memory that was allocated from a dma_pool like this:
Free memory that was allocated from a dma_pool like this::
dma_pool_free(pool, cpu_addr, dma_handle);
@ -460,7 +468,7 @@ where pool is what you passed to dma_pool_alloc(), and cpu_addr and
dma_handle are the values dma_pool_alloc() returned. This function
may be called in interrupt context.
Destroy a dma_pool by calling:
Destroy a dma_pool by calling::
dma_pool_destroy(pool);
@ -468,11 +476,12 @@ Make sure you've called dma_pool_free() for all memory allocated
from a pool before you destroy the pool. This function may not
be called in interrupt context.
DMA Direction
DMA Direction
=============
The interfaces described in subsequent portions of this document
take a DMA direction argument, which is an integer and takes on
one of the following values:
one of the following values::
DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL
DMA_TO_DEVICE
@ -521,14 +530,15 @@ packets, map/unmap them with the DMA_TO_DEVICE direction
specifier. For receive packets, just the opposite, map/unmap them
with the DMA_FROM_DEVICE direction specifier.
Using Streaming DMA mappings
Using Streaming DMA mappings
============================
The streaming DMA mapping routines can be called from interrupt
context. There are two versions of each map/unmap, one which will
map/unmap a single memory region, and one which will map/unmap a
scatterlist.
To map a single region, you do:
To map a single region, you do::
struct device *dev = &my_dev->dev;
dma_addr_t dma_handle;
@ -545,37 +555,16 @@ To map a single region, you do:
goto map_error_handling;
}
and to unmap it:
and to unmap it::
dma_unmap_single(dev, dma_handle, size, direction);
You should call dma_mapping_error() as dma_map_single() could fail and return
error. Not all DMA implementations support the dma_mapping_error() interface.
However, it is a good practice to call dma_mapping_error() interface, which
will invoke the generic mapping error check interface. Doing so will ensure
that the mapping code will work correctly on all DMA implementations without
any dependency on the specifics of the underlying implementation. Using the
returned address without checking for errors could result in failures ranging
from panics to silent data corruption. A couple of examples of incorrect ways
to check for errors that make assumptions about the underlying DMA
implementation are as follows and these are applicable to dma_map_page() as
well.
Incorrect example 1:
dma_addr_t dma_handle;
dma_handle = dma_map_single(dev, addr, size, direction);
if ((dma_handle & 0xffff != 0) || (dma_handle >= 0x1000000)) {
goto map_error;
}
Incorrect example 2:
dma_addr_t dma_handle;
dma_handle = dma_map_single(dev, addr, size, direction);
if (dma_handle == DMA_ERROR_CODE) {
goto map_error;
}
error. Doing so will ensure that the mapping code will work correctly on all
DMA implementations without any dependency on the specifics of the underlying
implementation. Using the returned address without checking for errors could
result in failures ranging from panics to silent data corruption. The same
applies to dma_map_page() as well.
You should call dma_unmap_single() when the DMA activity is finished, e.g.,
from the interrupt which told you that the DMA transfer is done.
@ -584,7 +573,7 @@ Using CPU pointers like this for single mappings has a disadvantage:
you cannot reference HIGHMEM memory in this way. Thus, there is a
map/unmap interface pair akin to dma_{map,unmap}_single(). These
interfaces deal with page/offset pairs instead of CPU pointers.
Specifically:
Specifically::
struct device *dev = &my_dev->dev;
dma_addr_t dma_handle;
@ -614,7 +603,7 @@ error as outlined under the dma_map_single() discussion.
You should call dma_unmap_page() when the DMA activity is finished, e.g.,
from the interrupt which told you that the DMA transfer is done.
With scatterlists, you map a region gathered from several regions by:
With scatterlists, you map a region gathered from several regions by::
int i, count = dma_map_sg(dev, sglist, nents, direction);
struct scatterlist *sg;
@ -638,16 +627,18 @@ Then you should loop count times (note: this can be less than nents times)
and use sg_dma_address() and sg_dma_len() macros where you previously
accessed sg->address and sg->length as shown above.
To unmap a scatterlist, just call:
To unmap a scatterlist, just call::
dma_unmap_sg(dev, sglist, nents, direction);
Again, make sure DMA activity has already finished.
PLEASE NOTE: The 'nents' argument to the dma_unmap_sg call must be
the _same_ one you passed into the dma_map_sg call,
it should _NOT_ be the 'count' value _returned_ from the
dma_map_sg call.
.. note::
The 'nents' argument to the dma_unmap_sg call must be
the _same_ one you passed into the dma_map_sg call,
it should _NOT_ be the 'count' value _returned_ from the
dma_map_sg call.
Every dma_map_{single,sg}() call should have its dma_unmap_{single,sg}()
counterpart, because the DMA address space is a shared resource and
@ -659,11 +650,11 @@ properly in order for the CPU and device to see the most up-to-date and
correct copy of the DMA buffer.
So, firstly, just map it with dma_map_{single,sg}(), and after each DMA
transfer call either:
transfer call either::
dma_sync_single_for_cpu(dev, dma_handle, size, direction);
or:
or::
dma_sync_sg_for_cpu(dev, sglist, nents, direction);
@ -671,17 +662,19 @@ as appropriate.
Then, if you wish to let the device get at the DMA area again,
finish accessing the data with the CPU, and then before actually
giving the buffer to the hardware call either:
giving the buffer to the hardware call either::
dma_sync_single_for_device(dev, dma_handle, size, direction);
or:
or::
dma_sync_sg_for_device(dev, sglist, nents, direction);
as appropriate.
PLEASE NOTE: The 'nents' argument to dma_sync_sg_for_cpu() and
.. note::
The 'nents' argument to dma_sync_sg_for_cpu() and
dma_sync_sg_for_device() must be the same passed to
dma_map_sg(). It is _NOT_ the count returned by
dma_map_sg().
@ -692,7 +685,7 @@ dma_map_*() call till dma_unmap_*(), then you don't have to call the
dma_sync_*() routines at all.
Here is pseudo code which shows a situation in which you would need
to use the dma_sync_*() interfaces.
to use the dma_sync_*() interfaces::
my_card_setup_receive_buffer(struct my_card *cp, char *buffer, int len)
{
@ -768,7 +761,8 @@ is planned to completely remove virt_to_bus() and bus_to_virt() as
they are entirely deprecated. Some ports already do not provide these
as it is impossible to correctly support them.
Handling Errors
Handling Errors
===============
DMA address space is limited on some architectures and an allocation
failure can be determined by:
@ -776,7 +770,7 @@ failure can be determined by:
- checking if dma_alloc_coherent() returns NULL or dma_map_sg returns 0
- checking the dma_addr_t returned from dma_map_single() and dma_map_page()
by using dma_mapping_error():
by using dma_mapping_error()::
dma_addr_t dma_handle;
@ -794,7 +788,8 @@ failure can be determined by:
of a multiple page mapping attempt. These example are applicable to
dma_map_page() as well.
Example 1:
Example 1::
dma_addr_t dma_handle1;
dma_addr_t dma_handle2;
@ -823,8 +818,12 @@ Example 1:
dma_unmap_single(dma_handle1);
map_error_handling1:
Example 2: (if buffers are allocated in a loop, unmap all mapped buffers when
mapping error is detected in the middle)
Example 2::
/*
* if buffers are allocated in a loop, unmap all mapped buffers when
* mapping error is detected in the middle
*/
dma_addr_t dma_addr;
dma_addr_t array[DMA_BUFFERS];
@ -867,7 +866,8 @@ SCSI drivers must return SCSI_MLQUEUE_HOST_BUSY if the DMA mapping
fails in the queuecommand hook. This means that the SCSI subsystem
passes the command to the driver again later.
Optimizing Unmap State Space Consumption
Optimizing Unmap State Space Consumption
========================================
On many platforms, dma_unmap_{single,page}() is simply a nop.
Therefore, keeping track of the mapping address and length is a waste
@ -879,7 +879,7 @@ Actually, instead of describing the macros one by one, we'll
transform some example code.
1) Use DEFINE_DMA_UNMAP_{ADDR,LEN} in state saving structures.
Example, before:
Example, before::
struct ring_state {
struct sk_buff *skb;
@ -887,7 +887,7 @@ transform some example code.
__u32 len;
};
after:
after::
struct ring_state {
struct sk_buff *skb;
@ -896,23 +896,23 @@ transform some example code.
};
2) Use dma_unmap_{addr,len}_set() to set these values.
Example, before:
Example, before::
ringp->mapping = FOO;
ringp->len = BAR;
after:
after::
dma_unmap_addr_set(ringp, mapping, FOO);
dma_unmap_len_set(ringp, len, BAR);
3) Use dma_unmap_{addr,len}() to access these values.
Example, before:
Example, before::
dma_unmap_single(dev, ringp->mapping, ringp->len,
DMA_FROM_DEVICE);
after:
after::
dma_unmap_single(dev,
dma_unmap_addr(ringp, mapping),
@ -923,7 +923,8 @@ It really should be self-explanatory. We treat the ADDR and LEN
separately, because it is possible for an implementation to only
need the address in order to perform the unmap operation.
Platform Issues
Platform Issues
===============
If you are just writing drivers for Linux and do not maintain
an architecture port for the kernel, you can safely skip down
@ -949,12 +950,13 @@ to "Closing".
alignment constraints (e.g. the alignment constraints about 64-bit
objects).
Closing
Closing
=======
This document, and the API itself, would not be in its current
form without the feedback and suggestions from numerous individuals.
We would like to specifically mention, in no particular order, the
following people:
following people::
Russell King <rmk@arm.linux.org.uk>
Leo Dagum <dagum@barrel.engr.sgi.com>

562
Documentation/DMA-API.txt
View File

@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
Dynamic DMA mapping using the generic device
============================================
============================================
Dynamic DMA mapping using the generic device
============================================
James E.J. Bottomley <James.Bottomley@HansenPartnership.com>
:Author: James E.J. Bottomley <James.Bottomley@HansenPartnership.com>
This document describes the DMA API. For a more gentle introduction
of the API (and actual examples), see Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt.
@ -12,10 +13,10 @@ machines. Unless you know that your driver absolutely has to support
non-consistent platforms (this is usually only legacy platforms) you
should only use the API described in part I.
Part I - dma_ API
-------------------------------------
Part I - dma_API
----------------
To get the dma_ API, you must #include <linux/dma-mapping.h>. This
To get the dma_API, you must #include <linux/dma-mapping.h>. This
provides dma_addr_t and the interfaces described below.
A dma_addr_t can hold any valid DMA address for the platform. It can be
@ -26,9 +27,11 @@ address space and the DMA address space.
Part Ia - Using large DMA-coherent buffers
------------------------------------------
void *
dma_alloc_coherent(struct device *dev, size_t size,
dma_addr_t *dma_handle, gfp_t flag)
::
void *
dma_alloc_coherent(struct device *dev, size_t size,
dma_addr_t *dma_handle, gfp_t flag)
Consistent memory is memory for which a write by either the device or
the processor can immediately be read by the processor or device
@ -51,20 +54,24 @@ consolidate your requests for consistent memory as much as possible.
The simplest way to do that is to use the dma_pool calls (see below).
The flag parameter (dma_alloc_coherent() only) allows the caller to
specify the GFP_ flags (see kmalloc()) for the allocation (the
specify the ``GFP_`` flags (see kmalloc()) for the allocation (the
implementation may choose to ignore flags that affect the location of
the returned memory, like GFP_DMA).
void *
dma_zalloc_coherent(struct device *dev, size_t size,
dma_addr_t *dma_handle, gfp_t flag)
::
void *
dma_zalloc_coherent(struct device *dev, size_t size,
dma_addr_t *dma_handle, gfp_t flag)
Wraps dma_alloc_coherent() and also zeroes the returned memory if the
allocation attempt succeeded.
void
dma_free_coherent(struct device *dev, size_t size, void *cpu_addr,
dma_addr_t dma_handle)
::
void
dma_free_coherent(struct device *dev, size_t size, void *cpu_addr,
dma_addr_t dma_handle)
Free a region of consistent memory you previously allocated. dev,
size and dma_handle must all be the same as those passed into
@ -78,7 +85,7 @@ may only be called with IRQs enabled.
Part Ib - Using small DMA-coherent buffers
------------------------------------------
To get this part of the dma_ API, you must #include <linux/dmapool.h>
To get this part of the dma_API, you must #include <linux/dmapool.h>
Many drivers need lots of small DMA-coherent memory regions for DMA
descriptors or I/O buffers. Rather than allocating in units of a page
@ -88,6 +95,8 @@ not __get_free_pages(). Also, they understand common hardware constraints
for alignment, like queue heads needing to be aligned on N-byte boundaries.
::
struct dma_pool *
dma_pool_create(const char *name, struct device *dev,
size_t size, size_t align, size_t alloc);
@ -103,16 +112,21 @@ in bytes, and must be a power of two). If your device has no boundary
crossing restrictions, pass 0 for alloc; passing 4096 says memory allocated
from this pool must not cross 4KByte boundaries.
::
void *dma_pool_zalloc(struct dma_pool *pool, gfp_t mem_flags,
dma_addr_t *handle)
void *
dma_pool_zalloc(struct dma_pool *pool, gfp_t mem_flags,
dma_addr_t *handle)
Wraps dma_pool_alloc() and also zeroes the returned memory if the
allocation attempt succeeded.
void *dma_pool_alloc(struct dma_pool *pool, gfp_t gfp_flags,
dma_addr_t *dma_handle);
::
void *
dma_pool_alloc(struct dma_pool *pool, gfp_t gfp_flags,
dma_addr_t *dma_handle);
This allocates memory from the pool; the returned memory will meet the
size and alignment requirements specified at creation time. Pass
@ -122,16 +136,20 @@ blocking. Like dma_alloc_coherent(), this returns two values: an
address usable by the CPU, and the DMA address usable by the pool's
device.
::
void dma_pool_free(struct dma_pool *pool, void *vaddr,
dma_addr_t addr);
void
dma_pool_free(struct dma_pool *pool, void *vaddr,
dma_addr_t addr);
This puts memory back into the pool. The pool is what was passed to
dma_pool_alloc(); the CPU (vaddr) and DMA addresses are what
were returned when that routine allocated the memory being freed.
::
void dma_pool_destroy(struct dma_pool *pool);
void
dma_pool_destroy(struct dma_pool *pool);
dma_pool_destroy() frees the resources of the pool. It must be
called in a context which can sleep. Make sure you've freed all allocated
@ -141,32 +159,40 @@ memory back to the pool before you destroy it.
Part Ic - DMA addressing limitations
------------------------------------
int
dma_set_mask_and_coherent(struct device *dev, u64 mask)
::
int
dma_set_mask_and_coherent(struct device *dev, u64 mask)
Checks to see if the mask is possible and updates the device
streaming and coherent DMA mask parameters if it is.
Returns: 0 if successful and a negative error if not.
int
dma_set_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask)
::
int
dma_set_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask)
Checks to see if the mask is possible and updates the device
parameters if it is.
Returns: 0 if successful and a negative error if not.
int
dma_set_coherent_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask)
::
int
dma_set_coherent_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask)
Checks to see if the mask is possible and updates the device
parameters if it is.
Returns: 0 if successful and a negative error if not.
u64
dma_get_required_mask(struct device *dev)
::
u64
dma_get_required_mask(struct device *dev)
This API returns the mask that the platform requires to
operate efficiently. Usually this means the returned mask
@ -182,94 +208,107 @@ call to set the mask to the value returned.
Part Id - Streaming DMA mappings
--------------------------------
dma_addr_t
dma_map_single(struct device *dev, void *cpu_addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
::
dma_addr_t
dma_map_single(struct device *dev, void *cpu_addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
Maps a piece of processor virtual memory so it can be accessed by the
device and returns the DMA address of the memory.
The direction for both APIs may be converted freely by casting.
However the dma_ API uses a strongly typed enumerator for its
However the dma_API uses a strongly typed enumerator for its
direction:
======================= =============================================
DMA_NONE no direction (used for debugging)
DMA_TO_DEVICE data is going from the memory to the device
DMA_FROM_DEVICE data is coming from the device to the memory
DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL direction isn't known
======================= =============================================
Notes: Not all memory regions in a machine can be mapped by this API.
Further, contiguous kernel virtual space may not be contiguous as
physical memory. Since this API does not provide any scatter/gather
capability, it will fail if the user tries to map a non-physically
contiguous piece of memory. For this reason, memory to be mapped by
this API should be obtained from sources which guarantee it to be
physically contiguous (like kmalloc).
.. note::
Further, the DMA address of the memory must be within the
dma_mask of the device (the dma_mask is a bit mask of the
addressable region for the device, i.e., if the DMA address of
the memory ANDed with the dma_mask is still equal to the DMA
address, then the device can perform DMA to the memory). To
ensure that the memory allocated by kmalloc is within the dma_mask,
the driver may specify various platform-dependent flags to restrict
the DMA address range of the allocation (e.g., on x86, GFP_DMA
guarantees to be within the first 16MB of available DMA addresses,
as required by ISA devices).
Not all memory regions in a machine can be mapped by this API.
Further, contiguous kernel virtual space may not be contiguous as
physical memory. Since this API does not provide any scatter/gather
capability, it will fail if the user tries to map a non-physically
contiguous piece of memory. For this reason, memory to be mapped by
this API should be obtained from sources which guarantee it to be
physically contiguous (like kmalloc).
Note also that the above constraints on physical contiguity and
dma_mask may not apply if the platform has an IOMMU (a device which
maps an I/O DMA address to a physical memory address). However, to be
portable, device driver writers may *not* assume that such an IOMMU
exists.
Further, the DMA address of the memory must be within the
dma_mask of the device (the dma_mask is a bit mask of the
addressable region for the device, i.e., if the DMA address of
the memory ANDed with the dma_mask is still equal to the DMA
address, then the device can perform DMA to the memory). To
ensure that the memory allocated by kmalloc is within the dma_mask,
the driver may specify various platform-dependent flags to restrict
the DMA address range of the allocation (e.g., on x86, GFP_DMA
guarantees to be within the first 16MB of available DMA addresses,
as required by ISA devices).
Warnings: Memory coherency operates at a granularity called the cache
line width. In order for memory mapped by this API to operate
correctly, the mapped region must begin exactly on a cache line
boundary and end exactly on one (to prevent two separately mapped
regions from sharing a single cache line). Since the cache line size
may not be known at compile time, the API will not enforce this
requirement. Therefore, it is recommended that driver writers who
don't take special care to determine the cache line size at run time
only map virtual regions that begin and end on page boundaries (which
are guaranteed also to be cache line boundaries).
Note also that the above constraints on physical contiguity and
dma_mask may not apply if the platform has an IOMMU (a device which
maps an I/O DMA address to a physical memory address). However, to be
portable, device driver writers may *not* assume that such an IOMMU
exists.
DMA_TO_DEVICE synchronisation must be done after the last modification
of the memory region by the software and before it is handed off to
the device. Once this primitive is used, memory covered by this
primitive should be treated as read-only by the device. If the device
may write to it at any point, it should be DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL (see
below).
.. warning::
DMA_FROM_DEVICE synchronisation must be done before the driver
accesses data that may be changed by the device. This memory should
be treated as read-only by the driver. If the driver needs to write
to it at any point, it should be DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL (see below).
Memory coherency operates at a granularity called the cache
line width. In order for memory mapped by this API to operate
correctly, the mapped region must begin exactly on a cache line
boundary and end exactly on one (to prevent two separately mapped
regions from sharing a single cache line). Since the cache line size
may not be known at compile time, the API will not enforce this
requirement. Therefore, it is recommended that driver writers who
don't take special care to determine the cache line size at run time
only map virtual regions that begin and end on page boundaries (which
are guaranteed also to be cache line boundaries).
DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL requires special handling: it means that the driver
isn't sure if the memory was modified before being handed off to the
device and also isn't sure if the device will also modify it. Thus,
you must always sync bidirectional memory twice: once before the
memory is handed off to the device (to make sure all memory changes
are flushed from the processor) and once before the data may be
accessed after being used by the device (to make sure any processor
cache lines are updated with data that the device may have changed).
DMA_TO_DEVICE synchronisation must be done after the last modification
of the memory region by the software and before it is handed off to
the device. Once this primitive is used, memory covered by this
primitive should be treated as read-only by the device. If the device
may write to it at any point, it should be DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL (see
below).
void
dma_unmap_single(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
DMA_FROM_DEVICE synchronisation must be done before the driver
accesses data that may be changed by the device. This memory should
be treated as read-only by the driver. If the driver needs to write
to it at any point, it should be DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL (see below).
DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL requires special handling: it means that the driver
isn't sure if the memory was modified before being handed off to the
device and also isn't sure if the device will also modify it. Thus,
you must always sync bidirectional memory twice: once before the
memory is handed off to the device (to make sure all memory changes
are flushed from the processor) and once before the data may be
accessed after being used by the device (to make sure any processor
cache lines are updated with data that the device may have changed).
::
void
dma_unmap_single(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
Unmaps the region previously mapped. All the parameters passed in
must be identical to those passed in (and returned) by the mapping
API.
dma_addr_t
dma_map_page(struct device *dev, struct page *page,
unsigned long offset, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
void
dma_unmap_page(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_address, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
::
dma_addr_t
dma_map_page(struct device *dev, struct page *page,
unsigned long offset, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
void
dma_unmap_page(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_address, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
API for mapping and unmapping for pages. All the notes and warnings
for the other mapping APIs apply here. Also, although the <offset>
@ -277,20 +316,24 @@ and <size> parameters are provided to do partial page mapping, it is
recommended that you never use these unless you really know what the
cache width is.
dma_addr_t
dma_map_resource(struct device *dev, phys_addr_t phys_addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction dir, unsigned long attrs)
::
void
dma_unmap_resource(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction dir, unsigned long attrs)
dma_addr_t
dma_map_resource(struct device *dev, phys_addr_t phys_addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction dir, unsigned long attrs)
void
dma_unmap_resource(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction dir, unsigned long attrs)
API for mapping and unmapping for MMIO resources. All the notes and
warnings for the other mapping APIs apply here. The API should only be
used to map device MMIO resources, mapping of RAM is not permitted.
int
dma_mapping_error(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr)
::
int
dma_mapping_error(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr)
In some circumstances dma_map_single(), dma_map_page() and dma_map_resource()
will fail to create a mapping. A driver can check for these errors by testing
@ -298,9 +341,11 @@ the returned DMA address with dma_mapping_error(). A non-zero return value
means the mapping could not be created and the driver should take appropriate
action (e.g. reduce current DMA mapping usage or delay and try again later).
::
int
dma_map_sg(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg,
int nents, enum dma_data_direction direction)
int nents, enum dma_data_direction direction)
Returns: the number of DMA address segments mapped (this may be shorter
than <nents> passed in if some elements of the scatter/gather list are
@ -316,7 +361,7 @@ critical that the driver do something, in the case of a block driver
aborting the request or even oopsing is better than doing nothing and
corrupting the filesystem.
With scatterlists, you use the resulting mapping like this:
With scatterlists, you use the resulting mapping like this::
int i, count = dma_map_sg(dev, sglist, nents, direction);
struct scatterlist *sg;
@ -337,9 +382,11 @@ Then you should loop count times (note: this can be less than nents times)
and use sg_dma_address() and sg_dma_len() macros where you previously
accessed sg->address and sg->length as shown above.
::
void
dma_unmap_sg(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg,
int nents, enum dma_data_direction direction)
int nents, enum dma_data_direction direction)
Unmap the previously mapped scatter/gather list. All the parameters
must be the same as those and passed in to the scatter/gather mapping
@ -348,18 +395,27 @@ API.
Note: <nents> must be the number you passed in, *not* the number of
DMA address entries returned.
void
dma_sync_single_for_cpu(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_handle, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
void
dma_sync_single_for_device(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_handle, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
void
dma_sync_sg_for_cpu(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg, int nents,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
void
dma_sync_sg_for_device(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg, int nents,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
::
void
dma_sync_single_for_cpu(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_handle,
size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
void
dma_sync_single_for_device(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_handle,
size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
void
dma_sync_sg_for_cpu(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg,
int nents,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
void
dma_sync_sg_for_device(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg,
int nents,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
Synchronise a single contiguous or scatter/gather mapping for the CPU
and device. With the sync_sg API, all the parameters must be the same
@ -367,36 +423,41 @@ as those passed into the single mapping API. With the sync_single API,
you can use dma_handle and size parameters that aren't identical to
those passed into the single mapping API to do a partial sync.
Notes: You must do this:
- Before reading values that have been written by DMA from the device
(use the DMA_FROM_DEVICE direction)
- After writing values that will be written to the device using DMA
(use the DMA_TO_DEVICE) direction
- before *and* after handing memory to the device if the memory is
DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL
.. note::
You must do this:
- Before reading values that have been written by DMA from the device
(use the DMA_FROM_DEVICE direction)
- After writing values that will be written to the device using DMA
(use the DMA_TO_DEVICE) direction
- before *and* after handing memory to the device if the memory is
DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL
See also dma_map_single().
dma_addr_t
dma_map_single_attrs(struct device *dev, void *cpu_addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction dir,
unsigned long attrs)
::
void
dma_unmap_single_attrs(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr,
size_t size, enum dma_data_direction dir,
unsigned long attrs)
dma_addr_t
dma_map_single_attrs(struct device *dev, void *cpu_addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction dir,
unsigned long attrs)
int
dma_map_sg_attrs(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sgl,
int nents, enum dma_data_direction dir,
unsigned long attrs)
void
dma_unmap_single_attrs(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr,
size_t size, enum dma_data_direction dir,
unsigned long attrs)
void
dma_unmap_sg_attrs(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sgl,
int nents, enum dma_data_direction dir,
unsigned long attrs)
int
dma_map_sg_attrs(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sgl,
int nents, enum dma_data_direction dir,
unsigned long attrs)
void
dma_unmap_sg_attrs(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sgl,
int nents, enum dma_data_direction dir,
unsigned long attrs)
The four functions above are just like the counterpart functions
without the _attrs suffixes, except that they pass an optional
@ -410,37 +471,38 @@ is identical to those of the corresponding function
without the _attrs suffix. As a result dma_map_single_attrs()
can generally replace dma_map_single(), etc.
As an example of the use of the *_attrs functions, here's how
As an example of the use of the ``*_attrs`` functions, here's how
you could pass an attribute DMA_ATTR_FOO when mapping memory
for DMA:
for DMA::
#include <linux/dma-mapping.h>
/* DMA_ATTR_FOO should be defined in linux/dma-mapping.h and
* documented in Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt */
...
#include <linux/dma-mapping.h>
/* DMA_ATTR_FOO should be defined in linux/dma-mapping.h and
* documented in Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt */
...
unsigned long attr;
attr |= DMA_ATTR_FOO;
....
n = dma_map_sg_attrs(dev, sg, nents, DMA_TO_DEVICE, attr);
....
unsigned long attr;
attr |= DMA_ATTR_FOO;
....
n = dma_map_sg_attrs(dev, sg, nents, DMA_TO_DEVICE, attr);
....
Architectures that care about DMA_ATTR_FOO would check for its
presence in their implementations of the mapping and unmapping
routines, e.g.:
routines, e.g.:::
void whizco_dma_map_sg_attrs(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr,
size_t size, enum dma_data_direction dir,
unsigned long attrs)
{
....
if (attrs & DMA_ATTR_FOO)
/* twizzle the frobnozzle */
....
void whizco_dma_map_sg_attrs(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr,
size_t size, enum dma_data_direction dir,
unsigned long attrs)
{
....
if (attrs & DMA_ATTR_FOO)
/* twizzle the frobnozzle */
....
}
Part II - Advanced dma_ usage
-----------------------------
Part II - Advanced dma usage
----------------------------
Warning: These pieces of the DMA API should not be used in the
majority of cases, since they cater for unlikely corner cases that
@ -450,9 +512,11 @@ If you don't understand how cache line coherency works between a
processor and an I/O device, you should not be using this part of the
API at all.
void *
dma_alloc_noncoherent(struct device *dev, size_t size,
dma_addr_t *dma_handle, gfp_t flag)
::
void *
dma_alloc_noncoherent(struct device *dev, size_t size,
dma_addr_t *dma_handle, gfp_t flag)
Identical to dma_alloc_coherent() except that the platform will
choose to return either consistent or non-consistent memory as it sees
@ -468,39 +532,49 @@ only use this API if you positively know your driver will be
required to work on one of the rare (usually non-PCI) architectures
that simply cannot make consistent memory.
void
dma_free_noncoherent(struct device *dev, size_t size, void *cpu_addr,
dma_addr_t dma_handle)
::
void
dma_free_noncoherent(struct device *dev, size_t size, void *cpu_addr,
dma_addr_t dma_handle)
Free memory allocated by the nonconsistent API. All parameters must
be identical to those passed in (and returned by
dma_alloc_noncoherent()).
int
dma_get_cache_alignment(void)
::
int
dma_get_cache_alignment(void)
Returns the processor cache alignment. This is the absolute minimum
alignment *and* width that you must observe when either mapping
memory or doing partial flushes.
Notes: This API may return a number *larger* than the actual cache
line, but it will guarantee that one or more cache lines fit exactly
into the width returned by this call. It will also always be a power
of two for easy alignment.
.. note::
void
dma_cache_sync(struct device *dev, void *vaddr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
This API may return a number *larger* than the actual cache
line, but it will guarantee that one or more cache lines fit exactly
into the width returned by this call. It will also always be a power
of two for easy alignment.
::
void
dma_cache_sync(struct device *dev, void *vaddr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
Do a partial sync of memory that was allocated by
dma_alloc_noncoherent(), starting at virtual address vaddr and
continuing on for size. Again, you *must* observe the cache line
boundaries when doing this.
int
dma_declare_coherent_memory(struct device *dev, phys_addr_t phys_addr,
dma_addr_t device_addr, size_t size, int
flags)
::
int
dma_declare_coherent_memory(struct device *dev, phys_addr_t phys_addr,
dma_addr_t device_addr, size_t size, int
flags)
Declare region of memory to be handed out by dma_alloc_coherent() when
it's asked for coherent memory for this device.
@ -516,21 +590,21 @@ size is the size of the area (must be multiples of PAGE_SIZE).
flags can be ORed together and are:
DMA_MEMORY_MAP - request that the memory returned from
dma_alloc_coherent() be directly writable.
- DMA_MEMORY_MAP - request that the memory returned from
dma_alloc_coherent() be directly writable.
DMA_MEMORY_IO - request that the memory returned from
dma_alloc_coherent() be addressable using read()/write()/memcpy_toio() etc.
- DMA_MEMORY_IO - request that the memory returned from
dma_alloc_coherent() be addressable using read()/write()/memcpy_toio() etc.
One or both of these flags must be present.
DMA_MEMORY_INCLUDES_CHILDREN - make the declared memory be allocated by
dma_alloc_coherent of any child devices of this one (for memory residing
on a bridge).
- DMA_MEMORY_INCLUDES_CHILDREN - make the declared memory be allocated by
dma_alloc_coherent of any child devices of this one (for memory residing
on a bridge).
DMA_MEMORY_EXCLUSIVE - only allocate memory from the declared regions.
Do not allow dma_alloc_coherent() to fall back to system memory when
it's out of memory in the declared region.
- DMA_MEMORY_EXCLUSIVE - only allocate memory from the declared regions.
Do not allow dma_alloc_coherent() to fall back to system memory when
it's out of memory in the declared region.
The return value will be either DMA_MEMORY_MAP or DMA_MEMORY_IO and
must correspond to a passed in flag (i.e. no returning DMA_MEMORY_IO
@ -543,15 +617,17 @@ must be accessed using the correct bus functions. If your driver
isn't prepared to handle this contingency, it should not specify
DMA_MEMORY_IO in the input flags.
As a simplification for the platforms, only *one* such region of
As a simplification for the platforms, only **one** such region of
memory may be declared per device.
For reasons of efficiency, most platforms choose to track the declared
region only at the granularity of a page. For smaller allocations,
you should use the dma_pool() API.
void
dma_release_declared_memory(struct device *dev)
::
void
dma_release_declared_memory(struct device *dev)
Remove the memory region previously declared from the system. This
API performs *no* in-use checking for this region and will return
@ -559,9 +635,11 @@ unconditionally having removed all the required structures. It is the
driver's job to ensure that no parts of this memory region are
currently in use.
void *
dma_mark_declared_memory_occupied(struct device *dev,
dma_addr_t device_addr, size_t size)
::
void *
dma_mark_declared_memory_occupied(struct device *dev,
dma_addr_t device_addr, size_t size)
This is used to occupy specific regions of the declared space
(dma_alloc_coherent() will hand out the first free region it finds).
@ -592,38 +670,37 @@ option has a performance impact. Do not enable it in production kernels.
If you boot the resulting kernel will contain code which does some bookkeeping
about what DMA memory was allocated for which device. If this code detects an
error it prints a warning message with some details into your kernel log. An
example warning message may look like this:
example warning message may look like this::
------------[ cut here ]------------
WARNING: at /data2/repos/linux-2.6-iommu/lib/dma-debug.c:448
check_unmap+0x203/0x490()
Hardware name:
forcedeth 0000:00:08.0: DMA-API: device driver frees DMA memory with wrong
function [device address=0x00000000640444be] [size=66 bytes] [mapped as
single] [unmapped as page]
Modules linked in: nfsd exportfs bridge stp llc r8169
Pid: 0, comm: swapper Tainted: G W 2.6.28-dmatest-09289-g8bb99c0 #1
Call Trace:
<IRQ> [<ffffffff80240b22>] warn_slowpath+0xf2/0x130
[<ffffffff80647b70>] _spin_unlock+0x10/0x30
[<ffffffff80537e75>] usb_hcd_link_urb_to_ep+0x75/0xc0
[<ffffffff80647c22>] _spin_unlock_irqrestore+0x12/0x40
[<ffffffff8055347f>] ohci_urb_enqueue+0x19f/0x7c0
[<ffffffff80252f96>] queue_work+0x56/0x60
[<ffffffff80237e10>] enqueue_task_fair+0x20/0x50
[<ffffffff80539279>] usb_hcd_submit_urb+0x379/0xbc0
[<ffffffff803b78c3>] cpumask_next_and+0x23/0x40
[<ffffffff80235177>] find_busiest_group+0x207/0x8a0
[<ffffffff8064784f>] _spin_lock_irqsave+0x1f/0x50
[<ffffffff803c7ea3>] check_unmap+0x203/0x490
[<ffffffff803c8259>] debug_dma_unmap_page+0x49/0x50
[<ffffffff80485f26>] nv_tx_done_optimized+0xc6/0x2c0
[<ffffffff80486c13>] nv_nic_irq_optimized+0x73/0x2b0
[<ffffffff8026df84>] handle_IRQ_event+0x34/0x70
[<ffffffff8026ffe9>] handle_edge_irq+0xc9/0x150
[<ffffffff8020e3ab>] do_IRQ+0xcb/0x1c0
[<ffffffff8020c093>] ret_from_intr+0x0/0xa
<EOI> <4>---[ end trace f6435a98e2a38c0e ]---
WARNING: at /data2/repos/linux-2.6-iommu/lib/dma-debug.c:448
check_unmap+0x203/0x490()
Hardware name:
forcedeth 0000:00:08.0: DMA-API: device driver frees DMA memory with wrong
function [device address=0x00000000640444be] [size=66 bytes] [mapped as
single] [unmapped as page]
Modules linked in: nfsd exportfs bridge stp llc r8169
Pid: 0, comm: swapper Tainted: G W 2.6.28-dmatest-09289-g8bb99c0 #1
Call Trace:
<IRQ> [<ffffffff80240b22>] warn_slowpath+0xf2/0x130
[<ffffffff80647b70>] _spin_unlock+0x10/0x30
[<ffffffff80537e75>] usb_hcd_link_urb_to_ep+0x75/0xc0
[<ffffffff80647c22>] _spin_unlock_irqrestore+0x12/0x40
[<ffffffff8055347f>] ohci_urb_enqueue+0x19f/0x7c0
[<ffffffff80252f96>] queue_work+0x56/0x60
[<ffffffff80237e10>] enqueue_task_fair+0x20/0x50
[<ffffffff80539279>] usb_hcd_submit_urb+0x379/0xbc0
[<ffffffff803b78c3>] cpumask_next_and+0x23/0x40
[<ffffffff80235177>] find_busiest_group+0x207/0x8a0
[<ffffffff8064784f>] _spin_lock_irqsave+0x1f/0x50
[<ffffffff803c7ea3>] check_unmap+0x203/0x490
[<ffffffff803c8259>] debug_dma_unmap_page+0x49/0x50
[<ffffffff80485f26>] nv_tx_done_optimized+0xc6/0x2c0
[<ffffffff80486c13>] nv_nic_irq_optimized+0x73/0x2b0
[<ffffffff8026df84>] handle_IRQ_event+0x34/0x70
[<ffffffff8026ffe9>] handle_edge_irq+0xc9/0x150
[<ffffffff8020e3ab>] do_IRQ+0xcb/0x1c0
[<ffffffff8020c093>] ret_from_intr+0x0/0xa
<EOI> <4>---[ end trace f6435a98e2a38c0e ]---
The driver developer can find the driver and the device including a stacktrace
of the DMA-API call which caused this warning.
@ -637,43 +714,42 @@ details.
The debugfs directory for the DMA-API debugging code is called dma-api/. In
this directory the following files can currently be found:
dma-api/all_errors This file contains a numeric value. If this
=============================== ===============================================
dma-api/all_errors This file contains a numeric value. If this
value is not equal to zero the debugging code
will print a warning for every error it finds
into the kernel log. Be careful with this
option, as it can easily flood your logs.
dma-api/disabled This read-only file contains the character 'Y'
dma-api/disabled This read-only file contains the character 'Y'
if the debugging code is disabled. This can
happen when it runs out of memory or if it was
disabled at boot time
dma-api/error_count This file is read-only and shows the total
dma-api/error_count This file is read-only and shows the total
numbers of errors found.
dma-api/num_errors The number in this file shows how many
dma-api/num_errors The number in this file shows how many
warnings will be printed to the kernel log
before it stops. This number is initialized to
one at system boot and be set by writing into
this file
dma-api/min_free_entries
This read-only file can be read to get the
dma-api/min_free_entries This read-only file can be read to get the
minimum number of free dma_debug_entries the
allocator has ever seen. If this value goes
down to zero the code will disable itself
because it is not longer reliable.
dma-api/num_free_entries
The current number of free dma_debug_entries
dma-api/num_free_entries The current number of free dma_debug_entries
in the allocator.
dma-api/driver-filter
You can write a name of a driver into this file
dma-api/driver-filter You can write a name of a driver into this file
to limit the debug output to requests from that
particular driver. Write an empty string to
that file to disable the filter and see
all errors again.
=============================== ===============================================
If you have this code compiled into your kernel it will be enabled by default.
If you want to boot without the bookkeeping anyway you can provide
@ -692,7 +768,10 @@ of preallocated entries is defined per architecture. If it is too low for you
boot with 'dma_debug_entries=<your_desired_number>' to overwrite the
architectural default.
void debug_dmap_mapping_error(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr);
::
void
debug_dma_mapping_error(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr);
dma-debug interface debug_dma_mapping_error() to debug drivers that fail
to check DMA mapping errors on addresses returned by dma_map_single() and
@ -702,4 +781,3 @@ the driver. When driver does unmap, debug_dma_unmap() checks the flag and if
this flag is still set, prints warning message that includes call trace that
leads up to the unmap. This interface can be called from dma_mapping_error()
routines to enable DMA mapping error check debugging.

73
Documentation/DMA-ISA-LPC.txt
View File

@ -1,19 +1,20 @@
DMA with ISA and LPC devices
============================
============================
DMA with ISA and LPC devices
============================
Pierre Ossman <drzeus@drzeus.cx>
:Author: Pierre Ossman <drzeus@drzeus.cx>
This document describes how to do DMA transfers using the old ISA DMA
controller. Even though ISA is more or less dead today the LPC bus
uses the same DMA system so it will be around for quite some time.
Part I - Headers and dependencies
---------------------------------
Headers and dependencies
------------------------
To do ISA style DMA you need to include two headers:
To do ISA style DMA you need to include two headers::
#include <linux/dma-mapping.h>
#include <asm/dma.h>
#include <linux/dma-mapping.h>
#include <asm/dma.h>
The first is the generic DMA API used to convert virtual addresses to
bus addresses (see Documentation/DMA-API.txt for details).
@ -23,8 +24,8 @@ this is not present on all platforms make sure you construct your
Kconfig to be dependent on ISA_DMA_API (not ISA) so that nobody tries
to build your driver on unsupported platforms.
Part II - Buffer allocation
---------------------------
Buffer allocation
-----------------
The ISA DMA controller has some very strict requirements on which
memory it can access so extra care must be taken when allocating
@ -42,13 +43,13 @@ requirements you pass the flag GFP_DMA to kmalloc.
Unfortunately the memory available for ISA DMA is scarce so unless you
allocate the memory during boot-up it's a good idea to also pass
__GFP_REPEAT and __GFP_NOWARN to make the allocator try a bit harder.
__GFP_RETRY_MAYFAIL and __GFP_NOWARN to make the allocator try a bit harder.
(This scarcity also means that you should allocate the buffer as
early as possible and not release it until the driver is unloaded.)
Part III - Address translation
------------------------------
Address translation
-------------------
To translate the virtual address to a bus address, use the normal DMA
API. Do _not_ use isa_virt_to_phys() even though it does the same
@ -61,8 +62,8 @@ Note: x86_64 had a broken DMA API when it came to ISA but has since
been fixed. If your arch has problems then fix the DMA API instead of
reverting to the ISA functions.
Part IV - Channels
------------------
Channels
--------
A normal ISA DMA controller has 8 channels. The lower four are for
8-bit transfers and the upper four are for 16-bit transfers.
@ -80,8 +81,8 @@ The ability to use 16-bit or 8-bit transfers is _not_ up to you as a
driver author but depends on what the hardware supports. Check your
specs or test different channels.
Part V - Transfer data
----------------------
Transfer data
-------------
Now for the good stuff, the actual DMA transfer. :)
@ -112,37 +113,37 @@ Once the DMA transfer is finished (or timed out) you should disable
the channel again. You should also check get_dma_residue() to make
sure that all data has been transferred.
Example:
Example::
int flags, residue;
int flags, residue;
flags = claim_dma_lock();
flags = claim_dma_lock();
clear_dma_ff();
clear_dma_ff();
set_dma_mode(channel, DMA_MODE_WRITE);
set_dma_addr(channel, phys_addr);
set_dma_count(channel, num_bytes);
set_dma_mode(channel, DMA_MODE_WRITE);
set_dma_addr(channel, phys_addr);
set_dma_count(channel, num_bytes);
dma_enable(channel);
dma_enable(channel);
release_dma_lock(flags);
release_dma_lock(flags);
while (!device_done());
while (!device_done());
flags = claim_dma_lock();
flags = claim_dma_lock();
dma_disable(channel);
dma_disable(channel);
residue = dma_get_residue(channel);
if (residue != 0)
printk(KERN_ERR "driver: Incomplete DMA transfer!"
" %d bytes left!\n", residue);
residue = dma_get_residue(channel);
if (residue != 0)
printk(KERN_ERR "driver: Incomplete DMA transfer!"
" %d bytes left!\n", residue);
release_dma_lock(flags);
release_dma_lock(flags);
Part VI - Suspend/resume
------------------------
Suspend/resume
--------------
It is the driver's responsibility to make sure that the machine isn't
suspended while a DMA transfer is in progress. Also, all DMA settings

15
Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt
View File

@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
DMA attributes
==============
==============
DMA attributes
==============
This document describes the semantics of the DMA attributes that are
defined in linux/dma-mapping.h.
@ -108,6 +109,7 @@ This is a hint to the DMA-mapping subsystem that it's probably not worth
the time to try to allocate memory to in a way that gives better TLB
efficiency (AKA it's not worth trying to build the mapping out of larger
pages). You might want to specify this if:
- You know that the accesses to this memory won't thrash the TLB.
You might know that the accesses are likely to be sequential or
that they aren't sequential but it's unlikely you'll ping-pong
@ -121,11 +123,12 @@ pages). You might want to specify this if:
the mapping to have a short lifetime then it may be worth it to
optimize allocation (avoid coming up with large pages) instead of
getting the slight performance win of larger pages.
Setting this hint doesn't guarantee that you won't get huge pages, but it
means that we won't try quite as hard to get them.
NOTE: At the moment DMA_ATTR_ALLOC_SINGLE_PAGES is only implemented on ARM,
though ARM64 patches will likely be posted soon.
.. note:: At the moment DMA_ATTR_ALLOC_SINGLE_PAGES is only implemented on ARM,
though ARM64 patches will likely be posted soon.
DMA_ATTR_NO_WARN
----------------
@ -142,10 +145,10 @@ problem at all, depending on the implementation of the retry mechanism.
So, this provides a way for drivers to avoid those error messages on calls
where allocation failures are not a problem, and shouldn't bother the logs.
NOTE: At the moment DMA_ATTR_NO_WARN is only implemented on PowerPC.
.. note:: At the moment DMA_ATTR_NO_WARN is only implemented on PowerPC.
DMA_ATTR_PRIVILEGED
------------------------------
-------------------
Some advanced peripherals such as remote processors and GPUs perform
accesses to DMA buffers in both privileged "supervisor" and unprivileged

17
Documentation/DocBook/.gitignore vendored
View File

@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
*.xml
*.ps
*.pdf
*.html
*.9.gz
*.9
*.aux
*.dvi
*.log
*.out
*.png
*.gif
*.svg
*.proc
*.db
media-indices.tmpl
media-entities.tmpl

282
Documentation/DocBook/Makefile
View File

@ -1,282 +0,0 @@
###
# This makefile is used to generate the kernel documentation,
# primarily based on in-line comments in various source files.
# See Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt for instruction in how
# to document the SRC - and how to read it.
# To add a new book the only step required is to add the book to the
# list of DOCBOOKS.
DOCBOOKS := z8530book.xml \
kernel-hacking.xml kernel-locking.xml \
networking.xml \
filesystems.xml lsm.xml kgdb.xml \
libata.xml mtdnand.xml librs.xml rapidio.xml \
s390-drivers.xml scsi.xml \
sh.xml w1.xml
ifeq ($(DOCBOOKS),)
# Skip DocBook build if the user explicitly requested no DOCBOOKS.
.DEFAULT:
@echo " SKIP DocBook $@ target (DOCBOOKS=\"\" specified)."
else
ifneq ($(SPHINXDIRS),)
# Skip DocBook build if the user explicitly requested a sphinx dir
.DEFAULT:
@echo " SKIP DocBook $@ target (SPHINXDIRS specified)."
else
###
# The build process is as follows (targets):
# (xmldocs) [by docproc]
# file.tmpl --> file.xml +--> file.ps (psdocs) [by db2ps or xmlto]
# +--> file.pdf (pdfdocs) [by db2pdf or xmlto]
# +--> DIR=file (htmldocs) [by xmlto]
# +--> man/ (mandocs) [by xmlto]
# for PDF and PS output you can choose between xmlto and docbook-utils tools
PDF_METHOD = $(prefer-db2x)
PS_METHOD = $(prefer-db2x)
targets += $(DOCBOOKS)
BOOKS := $(addprefix $(obj)/,$(DOCBOOKS))
xmldocs: $(BOOKS)
sgmldocs: xmldocs
PS := $(patsubst %.xml, %.ps, $(BOOKS))
psdocs: $(PS)
PDF := $(patsubst %.xml, %.pdf, $(BOOKS))
pdfdocs: $(PDF)
HTML := $(sort $(patsubst %.xml, %.html, $(BOOKS)))
htmldocs: $(HTML)
$(call cmd,build_main_index)
MAN := $(patsubst %.xml, %.9, $(BOOKS))
mandocs: $(MAN)
find $(obj)/man -name '*.9' | xargs gzip -nf
# Default location for installed man pages
export INSTALL_MAN_PATH = $(objtree)/usr
installmandocs: mandocs
mkdir -p $(INSTALL_MAN_PATH)/man/man9/
find $(obj)/man -name '*.9.gz' -printf '%h %f\n' | \
sort -k 2 -k 1 | uniq -f 1 | sed -e 's: :/:' | \
xargs install -m 644 -t $(INSTALL_MAN_PATH)/man/man9/
# no-op for the DocBook toolchain
epubdocs:
latexdocs:
linkcheckdocs:
###
#External programs used
KERNELDOCXMLREF = $(srctree)/scripts/kernel-doc-xml-ref
KERNELDOC = $(srctree)/scripts/kernel-doc
DOCPROC = $(objtree)/scripts/docproc
CHECK_LC_CTYPE = $(objtree)/scripts/check-lc_ctype
# Use a fixed encoding - UTF-8 if the C library has support built-in
# or ASCII if not
LC_CTYPE := $(call try-run, LC_CTYPE=C.UTF-8 $(CHECK_LC_CTYPE),C.UTF-8,C)
export LC_CTYPE
XMLTOFLAGS = -m $(srctree)/$(src)/stylesheet.xsl
XMLTOFLAGS += --skip-validation
###
# DOCPROC is used for two purposes:
# 1) To generate a dependency list for a .tmpl file
# 2) To preprocess a .tmpl file and call kernel-doc with
# appropriate parameters.
# The following rules are used to generate the .xml documentation
# required to generate the final targets. (ps, pdf, html).
quiet_cmd_docproc = DOCPROC $@
cmd_docproc = SRCTREE=$(srctree)/ $(DOCPROC) doc $< >$@
define rule_docproc
set -e; \
$(if $($(quiet)cmd_$(1)),echo ' $($(quiet)cmd_$(1))';) \
$(cmd_$(1)); \
( \
echo 'cmd_$@ := $(cmd_$(1))'; \
echo $@: `SRCTREE=$(srctree) $(DOCPROC) depend $<`; \
) > $(dir $@).$(notdir $@).cmd
endef
%.xml: %.tmpl $(KERNELDOC) $(DOCPROC) $(KERNELDOCXMLREF) FORCE
$(call if_changed_rule,docproc)
# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
always := $(hostprogs-y)
notfoundtemplate = echo "*** You have to install docbook-utils or xmlto ***"; \
exit 1
db2xtemplate = db2TYPE -o $(dir $@) $<
xmltotemplate = xmlto TYPE $(XMLTOFLAGS) -o $(dir $@) $<
# determine which methods are available
ifeq ($(shell which db2ps >/dev/null 2>&1 && echo found),found)
use-db2x = db2x
prefer-db2x = db2x
else
use-db2x = notfound
prefer-db2x = $(use-xmlto)
endif
ifeq ($(shell which xmlto >/dev/null 2>&1 && echo found),found)
use-xmlto = xmlto
prefer-xmlto = xmlto
else
use-xmlto = notfound
prefer-xmlto = $(use-db2x)
endif
# the commands, generated from the chosen template
quiet_cmd_db2ps = PS $@
cmd_db2ps = $(subst TYPE,ps, $($(PS_METHOD)template))
%.ps : %.xml
$(call cmd,db2ps)
quiet_cmd_db2pdf = PDF $@
cmd_db2pdf = $(subst TYPE,pdf, $($(PDF_METHOD)template))
%.pdf : %.xml
$(call cmd,db2pdf)
index = index.html
main_idx = $(obj)/$(index)
quiet_cmd_build_main_index = HTML $(main_idx)
cmd_build_main_index = rm -rf $(main_idx); \
echo '<h1>Linux Kernel HTML Documentation</h1>' >> $(main_idx) && \
echo '<h2>Kernel Version: $(KERNELVERSION)</h2>' >> $(main_idx) && \
cat $(HTML) >> $(main_idx)
quiet_cmd_db2html = HTML $@
cmd_db2html = xmlto html $(XMLTOFLAGS) -o $(patsubst %.html,%,$@) $< && \
echo '<a HREF="$(patsubst %.html,%,$(notdir $@))/index.html"> \
$(patsubst %.html,%,$(notdir $@))</a><p>' > $@
###
# Rules to create an aux XML and .db, and use them to re-process the DocBook XML
# to fill internal hyperlinks
gen_aux_xml = :
quiet_gen_aux_xml = echo ' XMLREF $@'
silent_gen_aux_xml = :
%.aux.xml: %.xml
@$($(quiet)gen_aux_xml)
@rm -rf $@
@(cat $< | egrep "^<refentry id" | egrep -o "\".*\"" | cut -f 2 -d \" > $<.db)
@$(KERNELDOCXMLREF) -db $<.db $< > $@
.PRECIOUS: %.aux.xml
%.html: %.aux.xml
@(which xmlto > /dev/null 2>&1) || \
(echo "*** You need to install xmlto ***"; \
exit 1)
@rm -rf $@ $(patsubst %.html,%,$@)
$(call cmd,db2html)
@if [ ! -z "$(PNG-$(basename $(notdir $@)))" ]; then \
cp $(PNG-$(basename $(notdir $@))) $(patsubst %.html,%,$@); fi
quiet_cmd_db2man = MAN $@
cmd_db2man = if grep -q refentry $<; then xmlto man $(XMLTOFLAGS) -o $(obj)/man/$(*F) $< ; fi
%.9 : %.xml
@(which xmlto > /dev/null 2>&1) || \
(echo "*** You need to install xmlto ***"; \
exit 1)
$(Q)mkdir -p $(obj)/man/$(*F)
$(call cmd,db2man)
@touch $@
###
# Rules to generate postscripts and PNG images from .fig format files
quiet_cmd_fig2eps = FIG2EPS $@
cmd_fig2eps = fig2dev -Leps $< $@
%.eps: %.fig
@(which fig2dev > /dev/null 2>&1) || \
(echo "*** You need to install transfig ***"; \
exit 1)
$(call cmd,fig2eps)
quiet_cmd_fig2png = FIG2PNG $@
cmd_fig2png = fig2dev -Lpng $< $@
%.png: %.fig
@(which fig2dev > /dev/null 2>&1) || \
(echo "*** You need to install transfig ***"; \
exit 1)
$(call cmd,fig2png)
###
# Rule to convert a .c file to inline XML documentation
gen_xml = :
quiet_gen_xml = echo ' GEN $@'
silent_gen_xml = :
%.xml: %.c
@$($(quiet)gen_xml)
@( \
echo "<programlisting>"; \
expand --tabs=8 < $< | \
sed -e "s/&/\\&amp;/g" \
-e "s/</\\&lt;/g" \
-e "s/>/\\&gt;/g"; \
echo "</programlisting>") > $@
endif # DOCBOOKS=""
endif # SPHINDIR=...
###
# Help targets as used by the top-level makefile
dochelp:
@echo ' Linux kernel internal documentation in different formats (DocBook):'
@echo ' htmldocs - HTML'
@echo ' pdfdocs - PDF'
@echo ' psdocs - Postscript'
@echo ' xmldocs - XML DocBook'
@echo ' mandocs - man pages'
@echo ' installmandocs - install man pages generated by mandocs to INSTALL_MAN_PATH'; \
echo ' (default: $(INSTALL_MAN_PATH))'; \
echo ''
@echo ' cleandocs - clean all generated DocBook files'
@echo
@echo ' make DOCBOOKS="s1.xml s2.xml" [target] Generate only docs s1.xml s2.xml'
@echo ' valid values for DOCBOOKS are: $(DOCBOOKS)'
@echo
@echo " make DOCBOOKS=\"\" [target] Don't generate docs from Docbook"
@echo ' This is useful to generate only the ReST docs (Sphinx)'
###
# Temporary files left by various tools
clean-files := $(DOCBOOKS) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.dvi, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.aux, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.tex, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.log, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.out, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.ps, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.pdf, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.html, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.9, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.aux.xml, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.xml.db, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.xml, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, .%.xml.cmd, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(index)
clean-dirs := $(patsubst %.xml,%,$(DOCBOOKS)) man
cleandocs:
$(Q)rm -f $(call objectify, $(clean-files))
$(Q)rm -rf $(call objectify, $(clean-dirs))
# Declare the contents of the .PHONY variable as phony. We keep that
# information in a variable so we can use it in if_changed and friends.
.PHONY: $(PHONY)

381
Documentation/DocBook/filesystems.tmpl
View File

@ -1,381 +0,0 @@
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
<book id="Linux-filesystems-API">
<bookinfo>
<title>Linux Filesystems API</title>
<legalnotice>
<para>
This documentation is free software; you can redistribute
it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later
version.
</para>
<para>
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
See the GNU General Public License for more details.
</para>
<para>
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
MA 02111-1307 USA
</para>
<para>
For more details see the file COPYING in the source
distribution of Linux.
</para>
</legalnotice>
</bookinfo>
<toc></toc>
<chapter id="vfs">
<title>The Linux VFS</title>
<sect1 id="the_filesystem_types"><title>The Filesystem types</title>
!Iinclude/linux/fs.h
</sect1>
<sect1 id="the_directory_cache"><title>The Directory Cache</title>
!Efs/dcache.c
!Iinclude/linux/dcache.h
</sect1>
<sect1 id="inode_handling"><title>Inode Handling</title>
!Efs/inode.c
!Efs/bad_inode.c
</sect1>
<sect1 id="registration_and_superblocks"><title>Registration and Superblocks</title>
!Efs/super.c
</sect1>
<sect1 id="file_locks"><title>File Locks</title>
!Efs/locks.c
!Ifs/locks.c
</sect1>
<sect1 id="other_functions"><title>Other Functions</title>
!Efs/mpage.c
!Efs/namei.c
!Efs/buffer.c
!Eblock/bio.c
!Efs/seq_file.c
!Efs/filesystems.c
!Efs/fs-writeback.c
!Efs/block_dev.c
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="proc">
<title>The proc filesystem</title>
<sect1 id="sysctl_interface"><title>sysctl interface</title>
!Ekernel/sysctl.c
</sect1>
<sect1 id="proc_filesystem_interface"><title>proc filesystem interface</title>
!Ifs/proc/base.c
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="fs_events">
<title>Events based on file descriptors</title>
!Efs/eventfd.c
</chapter>
<chapter id="sysfs">
<title>The Filesystem for Exporting Kernel Objects</title>
!Efs/sysfs/file.c
!Efs/sysfs/symlink.c
</chapter>
<chapter id="debugfs">
<title>The debugfs filesystem</title>
<sect1 id="debugfs_interface"><title>debugfs interface</title>
!Efs/debugfs/inode.c
!Efs/debugfs/file.c
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="LinuxJDBAPI">
<chapterinfo>
<title>The Linux Journalling API</title>
<authorgroup>
<author>
<firstname>Roger</firstname>
<surname>Gammans</surname>
<affiliation>
<address>
<email>rgammans@computer-surgery.co.uk</email>
</address>
</affiliation>
</author>
</authorgroup>
<authorgroup>
<author>
<firstname>Stephen</firstname>
<surname>Tweedie</surname>
<affiliation>
<address>
<email>sct@redhat.com</email>
</address>
</affiliation>
</author>
</authorgroup>
<copyright>
<year>2002</year>
<holder>Roger Gammans</holder>
</copyright>
</chapterinfo>
<title>The Linux Journalling API</title>
<sect1 id="journaling_overview">
<title>Overview</title>
<sect2 id="journaling_details">
<title>Details</title>
<para>
The journalling layer is easy to use. You need to
first of all create a journal_t data structure. There are
two calls to do this dependent on how you decide to allocate the physical
media on which the journal resides. The jbd2_journal_init_inode() call
is for journals stored in filesystem inodes, or the jbd2_journal_init_dev()
call can be used for journal stored on a raw device (in a continuous range
of blocks). A journal_t is a typedef for a struct pointer, so when
you are finally finished make sure you call jbd2_journal_destroy() on it
to free up any used kernel memory.
</para>
<para>
Once you have got your journal_t object you need to 'mount' or load the journal
file. The journalling layer expects the space for the journal was already
allocated and initialized properly by the userspace tools. When loading the
journal you must call jbd2_journal_load() to process journal contents. If the
client file system detects the journal contents does not need to be processed
(or even need not have valid contents), it may call jbd2_journal_wipe() to
clear the journal contents before calling jbd2_journal_load().
</para>
<para>
Note that jbd2_journal_wipe(..,0) calls jbd2_journal_skip_recovery() for you if
it detects any outstanding transactions in the journal and similarly
jbd2_journal_load() will call jbd2_journal_recover() if necessary. I would
advise reading ext4_load_journal() in fs/ext4/super.c for examples on this
stage.
</para>
<para>
Now you can go ahead and start modifying the underlying
filesystem. Almost.
</para>
<para>
You still need to actually journal your filesystem changes, this
is done by wrapping them into transactions. Additionally you
also need to wrap the modification of each of the buffers
with calls to the journal layer, so it knows what the modifications
you are actually making are. To do this use jbd2_journal_start() which
returns a transaction handle.
</para>
<para>
jbd2_journal_start()
and its counterpart jbd2_journal_stop(), which indicates the end of a
transaction are nestable calls, so you can reenter a transaction if necessary,
but remember you must call jbd2_journal_stop() the same number of times as
jbd2_journal_start() before the transaction is completed (or more accurately
leaves the update phase). Ext4/VFS makes use of this feature to simplify
handling of inode dirtying, quota support, etc.
</para>
<para>
Inside each transaction you need to wrap the modifications to the
individual buffers (blocks). Before you start to modify a buffer you
need to call jbd2_journal_get_{create,write,undo}_access() as appropriate,
this allows the journalling layer to copy the unmodified data if it
needs to. After all the buffer may be part of a previously uncommitted
transaction.
At this point you are at last ready to modify a buffer, and once
you are have done so you need to call jbd2_journal_dirty_{meta,}data().
Or if you've asked for access to a buffer you now know is now longer
required to be pushed back on the device you can call jbd2_journal_forget()
in much the same way as you might have used bforget() in the past.
</para>
<para>
A jbd2_journal_flush() may be called at any time to commit and checkpoint
all your transactions.
</para>
<para>
Then at umount time , in your put_super() you can then call jbd2_journal_destroy()
to clean up your in-core journal object.
</para>
<para>
Unfortunately there a couple of ways the journal layer can cause a deadlock.
The first thing to note is that each task can only have
a single outstanding transaction at any one time, remember nothing
commits until the outermost jbd2_journal_stop(). This means
you must complete the transaction at the end of each file/inode/address
etc. operation you perform, so that the journalling system isn't re-entered
on another journal. Since transactions can't be nested/batched
across differing journals, and another filesystem other than
yours (say ext4) may be modified in a later syscall.
</para>
<para>
The second case to bear in mind is that jbd2_journal_start() can
block if there isn't enough space in the journal for your transaction
(based on the passed nblocks param) - when it blocks it merely(!) needs to
wait for transactions to complete and be committed from other tasks,
so essentially we are waiting for jbd2_journal_stop(). So to avoid
deadlocks you must treat jbd2_journal_start/stop() as if they
were semaphores and include them in your semaphore ordering rules to prevent
deadlocks. Note that jbd2_journal_extend() has similar blocking behaviour to
jbd2_journal_start() so you can deadlock here just as easily as on
jbd2_journal_start().
</para>
<para>
Try to reserve the right number of blocks the first time. ;-). This will
be the maximum number of blocks you are going to touch in this transaction.
I advise having a look at at least ext4_jbd.h to see the basis on which
ext4 uses to make these decisions.
</para>
<para>
Another wriggle to watch out for is your on-disk block allocation strategy.
Why? Because, if you do a delete, you need to ensure you haven't reused any
of the freed blocks until the transaction freeing these blocks commits. If you
reused these blocks and crash happens, there is no way to restore the contents
of the reallocated blocks at the end of the last fully committed transaction.
One simple way of doing this is to mark blocks as free in internal in-memory
block allocation structures only after the transaction freeing them commits.
Ext4 uses journal commit callback for this purpose.
</para>
<para>
With journal commit callbacks you can ask the journalling layer to call a
callback function when the transaction is finally committed to disk, so that
you can do some of your own management. You ask the journalling layer for
calling the callback by simply setting journal->j_commit_callback function
pointer and that function is called after each transaction commit. You can also
use transaction->t_private_list for attaching entries to a transaction that
need processing when the transaction commits.
</para>
<para>
JBD2 also provides a way to block all transaction updates via
jbd2_journal_{un,}lock_updates(). Ext4 uses this when it wants a window with a
clean and stable fs for a moment. E.g.
</para>
<programlisting>
jbd2_journal_lock_updates() //stop new stuff happening..
jbd2_journal_flush() // checkpoint everything.
..do stuff on stable fs
jbd2_journal_unlock_updates() // carry on with filesystem use.
</programlisting>
<para>
The opportunities for abuse and DOS attacks with this should be obvious,
if you allow unprivileged userspace to trigger codepaths containing these
calls.
</para>
</sect2>
<sect2 id="jbd_summary">
<title>Summary</title>
<para>
Using the journal is a matter of wrapping the different context changes,
being each mount, each modification (transaction) and each changed buffer
to tell the journalling layer about them.
</para>
</sect2>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="data_types">
<title>Data Types</title>
<para>
The journalling layer uses typedefs to 'hide' the concrete definitions
of the structures used. As a client of the JBD2 layer you can
just rely on the using the pointer as a magic cookie of some sort.
Obviously the hiding is not enforced as this is 'C'.
</para>
<sect2 id="structures"><title>Structures</title>
!Iinclude/linux/jbd2.h
</sect2>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="functions">
<title>Functions</title>
<para>
The functions here are split into two groups those that
affect a journal as a whole, and those which are used to
manage transactions
</para>
<sect2 id="journal_level"><title>Journal Level</title>
!Efs/jbd2/journal.c
!Ifs/jbd2/recovery.c
</sect2>
<sect2 id="transaction_level"><title>Transasction Level</title>
!Efs/jbd2/transaction.c
</sect2>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="see_also">
<title>See also</title>
<para>
<citation>
<ulink url="http://kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/sct/ext3/journal-design.ps.gz">
Journaling the Linux ext2fs Filesystem, LinuxExpo 98, Stephen Tweedie
</ulink>
</citation>
</para>
<para>
<citation>
<ulink url="http://olstrans.sourceforge.net/release/OLS2000-ext3/OLS2000-ext3.html">
Ext3 Journalling FileSystem, OLS 2000, Dr. Stephen Tweedie
</ulink>
</citation>
</para>
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="splice">
<title>splice API</title>
<para>
splice is a method for moving blocks of data around inside the
kernel, without continually transferring them between the kernel
and user space.
</para>
!Ffs/splice.c
</chapter>
<chapter id="pipes">
<title>pipes API</title>
<para>
Pipe interfaces are all for in-kernel (builtin image) use.
They are not exported for use by modules.
</para>
!Iinclude/linux/pipe_fs_i.h
!Ffs/pipe.c
</chapter>
</book>

1312
Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

2151
Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

918
Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl
View File

@ -1,918 +0,0 @@
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
<book id="kgdbOnLinux">
<bookinfo>
<title>Using kgdb, kdb and the kernel debugger internals</title>
<authorgroup>
<author>
<firstname>Jason</firstname>
<surname>Wessel</surname>
<affiliation>
<address>
<email>jason.wessel@windriver.com</email>
</address>
</affiliation>
</author>
</authorgroup>
<copyright>
<year>2008,2010</year>
<holder>Wind River Systems, Inc.</holder>
</copyright>
<copyright>
<year>2004-2005</year>
<holder>MontaVista Software, Inc.</holder>
</copyright>
<copyright>
<year>2004</year>
<holder>Amit S. Kale</holder>
</copyright>
<legalnotice>
<para>
This file is licensed under the terms of the GNU General Public License
version 2. This program is licensed "as is" without any warranty of any
kind, whether express or implied.
</para>
</legalnotice>
</bookinfo>
<toc></toc>
<chapter id="Introduction">
<title>Introduction</title>
<para>
The kernel has two different debugger front ends (kdb and kgdb)
which interface to the debug core. It is possible to use either
of the debugger front ends and dynamically transition between them
if you configure the kernel properly at compile and runtime.
</para>
<para>
Kdb is simplistic shell-style interface which you can use on a
system console with a keyboard or serial console. You can use it
to inspect memory, registers, process lists, dmesg, and even set
breakpoints to stop in a certain location. Kdb is not a source
level debugger, although you can set breakpoints and execute some
basic kernel run control. Kdb is mainly aimed at doing some
analysis to aid in development or diagnosing kernel problems. You
can access some symbols by name in kernel built-ins or in kernel
modules if the code was built
with <symbol>CONFIG_KALLSYMS</symbol>.
</para>
<para>
Kgdb is intended to be used as a source level debugger for the
Linux kernel. It is used along with gdb to debug a Linux kernel.
The expectation is that gdb can be used to "break in" to the
kernel to inspect memory, variables and look through call stack
information similar to the way an application developer would use
gdb to debug an application. It is possible to place breakpoints
in kernel code and perform some limited execution stepping.
</para>
<para>
Two machines are required for using kgdb. One of these machines is
a development machine and the other is the target machine. The
kernel to be debugged runs on the target machine. The development
machine runs an instance of gdb against the vmlinux file which
contains the symbols (not a boot image such as bzImage, zImage,
uImage...). In gdb the developer specifies the connection
parameters and connects to kgdb. The type of connection a
developer makes with gdb depends on the availability of kgdb I/O
modules compiled as built-ins or loadable kernel modules in the test
machine's kernel.
</para>
</chapter>
<chapter id="CompilingAKernel">
<title>Compiling a kernel</title>
<para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>In order to enable compilation of kdb, you must first enable kgdb.</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>The kgdb test compile options are described in the kgdb test suite chapter.</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</para>
<sect1 id="CompileKGDB">
<title>Kernel config options for kgdb</title>
<para>
To enable <symbol>CONFIG_KGDB</symbol> you should look under
"Kernel hacking" / "Kernel debugging" and select "KGDB: kernel debugger".
</para>
<para>
While it is not a hard requirement that you have symbols in your
vmlinux file, gdb tends not to be very useful without the symbolic
data, so you will want to turn
on <symbol>CONFIG_DEBUG_INFO</symbol> which is called "Compile the
kernel with debug info" in the config menu.
</para>
<para>
It is advised, but not required, that you turn on the
<symbol>CONFIG_FRAME_POINTER</symbol> kernel option which is called "Compile the
kernel with frame pointers" in the config menu. This option
inserts code to into the compiled executable which saves the frame
information in registers or on the stack at different points which
allows a debugger such as gdb to more accurately construct
stack back traces while debugging the kernel.
</para>
<para>
If the architecture that you are using supports the kernel option
CONFIG_STRICT_KERNEL_RWX, you should consider turning it off. This
option will prevent the use of software breakpoints because it
marks certain regions of the kernel's memory space as read-only.
If kgdb supports it for the architecture you are using, you can
use hardware breakpoints if you desire to run with the
CONFIG_STRICT_KERNEL_RWX option turned on, else you need to turn off
this option.
</para>
<para>
Next you should choose one of more I/O drivers to interconnect
debugging host and debugged target. Early boot debugging requires
a KGDB I/O driver that supports early debugging and the driver
must be built into the kernel directly. Kgdb I/O driver
configuration takes place via kernel or module parameters which
you can learn more about in the in the section that describes the
parameter "kgdboc".
</para>
<para>Here is an example set of .config symbols to enable or
disable for kgdb:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para># CONFIG_STRICT_KERNEL_RWX is not set</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>CONFIG_FRAME_POINTER=y</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>CONFIG_KGDB=y</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>CONFIG_KGDB_SERIAL_CONSOLE=y</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="CompileKDB">
<title>Kernel config options for kdb</title>
<para>Kdb is quite a bit more complex than the simple gdbstub
sitting on top of the kernel's debug core. Kdb must implement a
shell, and also adds some helper functions in other parts of the
kernel, responsible for printing out interesting data such as what
you would see if you ran "lsmod", or "ps". In order to build kdb
into the kernel you follow the same steps as you would for kgdb.
</para>
<para>The main config option for kdb
is <symbol>CONFIG_KGDB_KDB</symbol> which is called "KGDB_KDB:
include kdb frontend for kgdb" in the config menu. In theory you
would have already also selected an I/O driver such as the
CONFIG_KGDB_SERIAL_CONSOLE interface if you plan on using kdb on a
serial port, when you were configuring kgdb.
</para>
<para>If you want to use a PS/2-style keyboard with kdb, you would
select CONFIG_KDB_KEYBOARD which is called "KGDB_KDB: keyboard as
input device" in the config menu. The CONFIG_KDB_KEYBOARD option
is not used for anything in the gdb interface to kgdb. The
CONFIG_KDB_KEYBOARD option only works with kdb.
</para>
<para>Here is an example set of .config symbols to enable/disable kdb:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para># CONFIG_STRICT_KERNEL_RWX is not set</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>CONFIG_FRAME_POINTER=y</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>CONFIG_KGDB=y</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>CONFIG_KGDB_SERIAL_CONSOLE=y</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>CONFIG_KGDB_KDB=y</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>CONFIG_KDB_KEYBOARD=y</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</para>
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="kgdbKernelArgs">
<title>Kernel Debugger Boot Arguments</title>
<para>This section describes the various runtime kernel
parameters that affect the configuration of the kernel debugger.
The following chapter covers using kdb and kgdb as well as
providing some examples of the configuration parameters.</para>
<sect1 id="kgdboc">
<title>Kernel parameter: kgdboc</title>
<para>The kgdboc driver was originally an abbreviation meant to
stand for "kgdb over console". Today it is the primary mechanism
to configure how to communicate from gdb to kgdb as well as the
devices you want to use to interact with the kdb shell.
</para>
<para>For kgdb/gdb, kgdboc is designed to work with a single serial
port. It is intended to cover the circumstance where you want to
use a serial console as your primary console as well as using it to
perform kernel debugging. It is also possible to use kgdb on a
serial port which is not designated as a system console. Kgdboc
may be configured as a kernel built-in or a kernel loadable module.
You can only make use of <constant>kgdbwait</constant> and early
debugging if you build kgdboc into the kernel as a built-in.
</para>
<para>Optionally you can elect to activate kms (Kernel Mode
Setting) integration. When you use kms with kgdboc and you have a
video driver that has atomic mode setting hooks, it is possible to
enter the debugger on the graphics console. When the kernel
execution is resumed, the previous graphics mode will be restored.
This integration can serve as a useful tool to aid in diagnosing
crashes or doing analysis of memory with kdb while allowing the
full graphics console applications to run.
</para>
<sect2 id="kgdbocArgs">
<title>kgdboc arguments</title>
<para>Usage: <constant>kgdboc=[kms][[,]kbd][[,]serial_device][,baud]</constant></para>
<para>The order listed above must be observed if you use any of the
optional configurations together.
</para>
<para>Abbreviations:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>kms = Kernel Mode Setting</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>kbd = Keyboard</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</para>
<para>You can configure kgdboc to use the keyboard, and/or a serial
device depending on if you are using kdb and/or kgdb, in one of the
following scenarios. The order listed above must be observed if
you use any of the optional configurations together. Using kms +
only gdb is generally not a useful combination.</para>
<sect3 id="kgdbocArgs1">
<title>Using loadable module or built-in</title>
<para>
<orderedlist>
<listitem><para>As a kernel built-in:</para>
<para>Use the kernel boot argument: <constant>kgdboc=&lt;tty-device&gt;,[baud]</constant></para></listitem>
<listitem>
<para>As a kernel loadable module:</para>
<para>Use the command: <constant>modprobe kgdboc kgdboc=&lt;tty-device&gt;,[baud]</constant></para>
<para>Here are two examples of how you might format the kgdboc
string. The first is for an x86 target using the first serial port.
The second example is for the ARM Versatile AB using the second
serial port.
<orderedlist>
<listitem><para><constant>kgdboc=ttyS0,115200</constant></para></listitem>
<listitem><para><constant>kgdboc=ttyAMA1,115200</constant></para></listitem>
</orderedlist>
</para>
</listitem>
</orderedlist></para>
</sect3>
<sect3 id="kgdbocArgs2">
<title>Configure kgdboc at runtime with sysfs</title>
<para>At run time you can enable or disable kgdboc by echoing a
parameters into the sysfs. Here are two examples:</para>
<orderedlist>
<listitem><para>Enable kgdboc on ttyS0</para>
<para><constant>echo ttyS0 &gt; /sys/module/kgdboc/parameters/kgdboc</constant></para></listitem>
<listitem><para>Disable kgdboc</para>
<para><constant>echo "" &gt; /sys/module/kgdboc/parameters/kgdboc</constant></para></listitem>
</orderedlist>
<para>NOTE: You do not need to specify the baud if you are
configuring the console on tty which is already configured or
open.</para>
</sect3>
<sect3 id="kgdbocArgs3">
<title>More examples</title>
<para>You can configure kgdboc to use the keyboard, and/or a serial device
depending on if you are using kdb and/or kgdb, in one of the
following scenarios.
<orderedlist>
<listitem><para>kdb and kgdb over only a serial port</para>
<para><constant>kgdboc=&lt;serial_device&gt;[,baud]</constant></para>
<para>Example: <constant>kgdboc=ttyS0,115200</constant></para>
</listitem>
<listitem><para>kdb and kgdb with keyboard and a serial port</para>
<para><constant>kgdboc=kbd,&lt;serial_device&gt;[,baud]</constant></para>
<para>Example: <constant>kgdboc=kbd,ttyS0,115200</constant></para>
</listitem>
<listitem><para>kdb with a keyboard</para>
<para><constant>kgdboc=kbd</constant></para>
</listitem>
<listitem><para>kdb with kernel mode setting</para>
<para><constant>kgdboc=kms,kbd</constant></para>
</listitem>
<listitem><para>kdb with kernel mode setting and kgdb over a serial port</para>
<para><constant>kgdboc=kms,kbd,ttyS0,115200</constant></para>
</listitem>
</orderedlist>
</para>
<para>NOTE: Kgdboc does not support interrupting the target via the
gdb remote protocol. You must manually send a sysrq-g unless you
have a proxy that splits console output to a terminal program.
A console proxy has a separate TCP port for the debugger and a separate
TCP port for the "human" console. The proxy can take care of sending
the sysrq-g for you.
</para>
<para>When using kgdboc with no debugger proxy, you can end up
connecting the debugger at one of two entry points. If an
exception occurs after you have loaded kgdboc, a message should
print on the console stating it is waiting for the debugger. In
this case you disconnect your terminal program and then connect the
debugger in its place. If you want to interrupt the target system
and forcibly enter a debug session you have to issue a Sysrq
sequence and then type the letter <constant>g</constant>. Then
you disconnect the terminal session and connect gdb. Your options
if you don't like this are to hack gdb to send the sysrq-g for you
as well as on the initial connect, or to use a debugger proxy that
allows an unmodified gdb to do the debugging.
</para>
</sect3>
</sect2>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="kgdbwait">
<title>Kernel parameter: kgdbwait</title>
<para>
The Kernel command line option <constant>kgdbwait</constant> makes
kgdb wait for a debugger connection during booting of a kernel. You
can only use this option if you compiled a kgdb I/O driver into the
kernel and you specified the I/O driver configuration as a kernel
command line option. The kgdbwait parameter should always follow the
configuration parameter for the kgdb I/O driver in the kernel
command line else the I/O driver will not be configured prior to
asking the kernel to use it to wait.
</para>
<para>
The kernel will stop and wait as early as the I/O driver and
architecture allows when you use this option. If you build the
kgdb I/O driver as a loadable kernel module kgdbwait will not do
anything.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="kgdbcon">
<title>Kernel parameter: kgdbcon</title>
<para> The kgdbcon feature allows you to see printk() messages
inside gdb while gdb is connected to the kernel. Kdb does not make
use of the kgdbcon feature.
</para>
<para>Kgdb supports using the gdb serial protocol to send console
messages to the debugger when the debugger is connected and running.
There are two ways to activate this feature.
<orderedlist>
<listitem><para>Activate with the kernel command line option:</para>
<para><constant>kgdbcon</constant></para>
</listitem>
<listitem><para>Use sysfs before configuring an I/O driver</para>
<para>
<constant>echo 1 &gt; /sys/module/kgdb/parameters/kgdb_use_con</constant>
</para>
<para>
NOTE: If you do this after you configure the kgdb I/O driver, the
setting will not take effect until the next point the I/O is
reconfigured.
</para>
</listitem>
</orderedlist>
</para>
<para>IMPORTANT NOTE: You cannot use kgdboc + kgdbcon on a tty that is an
active system console. An example of incorrect usage is <constant>console=ttyS0,115200 kgdboc=ttyS0 kgdbcon</constant>
</para>
<para>It is possible to use this option with kgdboc on a tty that is not a system console.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="kgdbreboot">
<title>Run time parameter: kgdbreboot</title>
<para> The kgdbreboot feature allows you to change how the debugger
deals with the reboot notification. You have 3 choices for the
behavior. The default behavior is always set to 0.</para>
<orderedlist>
<listitem><para>echo -1 > /sys/module/debug_core/parameters/kgdbreboot</para>
<para>Ignore the reboot notification entirely.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem><para>echo 0 > /sys/module/debug_core/parameters/kgdbreboot</para>
<para>Send the detach message to any attached debugger client.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem><para>echo 1 > /sys/module/debug_core/parameters/kgdbreboot</para>
<para>Enter the debugger on reboot notify.</para>
</listitem>
</orderedlist>
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="usingKDB">
<title>Using kdb</title>
<para>
</para>
<sect1 id="quickKDBserial">
<title>Quick start for kdb on a serial port</title>
<para>This is a quick example of how to use kdb.</para>
<para><orderedlist>
<listitem><para>Configure kgdboc at boot using kernel parameters:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para><constant>console=ttyS0,115200 kgdboc=ttyS0,115200</constant></para></listitem>
</itemizedlist></para>
<para>OR</para>
<para>Configure kgdboc after the kernel has booted; assuming you are using a serial port console:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para><constant>echo ttyS0 &gt; /sys/module/kgdboc/parameters/kgdboc</constant></para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem><para>Enter the kernel debugger manually or by waiting for an oops or fault. There are several ways you can enter the kernel debugger manually; all involve using the sysrq-g, which means you must have enabled CONFIG_MAGIC_SYSRQ=y in your kernel config.</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>When logged in as root or with a super user session you can run:</para>
<para><constant>echo g &gt; /proc/sysrq-trigger</constant></para></listitem>
<listitem><para>Example using minicom 2.2</para>
<para>Press: <constant>Control-a</constant></para>
<para>Press: <constant>f</constant></para>
<para>Press: <constant>g</constant></para>
</listitem>
<listitem><para>When you have telneted to a terminal server that supports sending a remote break</para>
<para>Press: <constant>Control-]</constant></para>
<para>Type in:<constant>send break</constant></para>
<para>Press: <constant>Enter</constant></para>
<para>Press: <constant>g</constant></para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</listitem>
<listitem><para>From the kdb prompt you can run the "help" command to see a complete list of the commands that are available.</para>
<para>Some useful commands in kdb include:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>lsmod -- Shows where kernel modules are loaded</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>ps -- Displays only the active processes</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>ps A -- Shows all the processes</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>summary -- Shows kernel version info and memory usage</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>bt -- Get a backtrace of the current process using dump_stack()</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>dmesg -- View the kernel syslog buffer</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>go -- Continue the system</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>When you are done using kdb you need to consider rebooting the
system or using the "go" command to resuming normal kernel
execution. If you have paused the kernel for a lengthy period of
time, applications that rely on timely networking or anything to do
with real wall clock time could be adversely affected, so you
should take this into consideration when using the kernel
debugger.</para>
</listitem>
</orderedlist></para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="quickKDBkeyboard">
<title>Quick start for kdb using a keyboard connected console</title>
<para>This is a quick example of how to use kdb with a keyboard.</para>
<para><orderedlist>
<listitem><para>Configure kgdboc at boot using kernel parameters:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para><constant>kgdboc=kbd</constant></para></listitem>
</itemizedlist></para>
<para>OR</para>
<para>Configure kgdboc after the kernel has booted:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para><constant>echo kbd &gt; /sys/module/kgdboc/parameters/kgdboc</constant></para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem><para>Enter the kernel debugger manually or by waiting for an oops or fault. There are several ways you can enter the kernel debugger manually; all involve using the sysrq-g, which means you must have enabled CONFIG_MAGIC_SYSRQ=y in your kernel config.</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>When logged in as root or with a super user session you can run:</para>
<para><constant>echo g &gt; /proc/sysrq-trigger</constant></para></listitem>
<listitem><para>Example using a laptop keyboard</para>
<para>Press and hold down: <constant>Alt</constant></para>
<para>Press and hold down: <constant>Fn</constant></para>
<para>Press and release the key with the label: <constant>SysRq</constant></para>
<para>Release: <constant>Fn</constant></para>
<para>Press and release: <constant>g</constant></para>
<para>Release: <constant>Alt</constant></para>
</listitem>
<listitem><para>Example using a PS/2 101-key keyboard</para>
<para>Press and hold down: <constant>Alt</constant></para>
<para>Press and release the key with the label: <constant>SysRq</constant></para>
<para>Press and release: <constant>g</constant></para>
<para>Release: <constant>Alt</constant></para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>Now type in a kdb command such as "help", "dmesg", "bt" or "go" to continue kernel execution.</para>
</listitem>
</orderedlist></para>
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="EnableKGDB">
<title>Using kgdb / gdb</title>
<para>In order to use kgdb you must activate it by passing
configuration information to one of the kgdb I/O drivers. If you
do not pass any configuration information kgdb will not do anything
at all. Kgdb will only actively hook up to the kernel trap hooks
if a kgdb I/O driver is loaded and configured. If you unconfigure
a kgdb I/O driver, kgdb will unregister all the kernel hook points.
</para>
<para> All kgdb I/O drivers can be reconfigured at run time, if
<symbol>CONFIG_SYSFS</symbol> and <symbol>CONFIG_MODULES</symbol>
are enabled, by echo'ing a new config string to
<constant>/sys/module/&lt;driver&gt;/parameter/&lt;option&gt;</constant>.
The driver can be unconfigured by passing an empty string. You cannot
change the configuration while the debugger is attached. Make sure
to detach the debugger with the <constant>detach</constant> command
prior to trying to unconfigure a kgdb I/O driver.
</para>
<sect1 id="ConnectingGDB">
<title>Connecting with gdb to a serial port</title>
<orderedlist>
<listitem><para>Configure kgdboc</para>
<para>Configure kgdboc at boot using kernel parameters:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para><constant>kgdboc=ttyS0,115200</constant></para></listitem>
</itemizedlist></para>
<para>OR</para>
<para>Configure kgdboc after the kernel has booted:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para><constant>echo ttyS0 &gt; /sys/module/kgdboc/parameters/kgdboc</constant></para></listitem>
</itemizedlist></para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>Stop kernel execution (break into the debugger)</para>
<para>In order to connect to gdb via kgdboc, the kernel must
first be stopped. There are several ways to stop the kernel which
include using kgdbwait as a boot argument, via a sysrq-g, or running
the kernel until it takes an exception where it waits for the
debugger to attach.
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>When logged in as root or with a super user session you can run:</para>
<para><constant>echo g &gt; /proc/sysrq-trigger</constant></para></listitem>
<listitem><para>Example using minicom 2.2</para>
<para>Press: <constant>Control-a</constant></para>
<para>Press: <constant>f</constant></para>
<para>Press: <constant>g</constant></para>
</listitem>
<listitem><para>When you have telneted to a terminal server that supports sending a remote break</para>
<para>Press: <constant>Control-]</constant></para>
<para>Type in:<constant>send break</constant></para>
<para>Press: <constant>Enter</constant></para>
<para>Press: <constant>g</constant></para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>Connect from gdb</para>
<para>
Example (using a directly connected port):
</para>
<programlisting>
% gdb ./vmlinux
(gdb) set remotebaud 115200
(gdb) target remote /dev/ttyS0
</programlisting>
<para>
Example (kgdb to a terminal server on TCP port 2012):
</para>
<programlisting>
% gdb ./vmlinux
(gdb) target remote 192.168.2.2:2012
</programlisting>
<para>
Once connected, you can debug a kernel the way you would debug an
application program.
</para>
<para>
If you are having problems connecting or something is going
seriously wrong while debugging, it will most often be the case
that you want to enable gdb to be verbose about its target
communications. You do this prior to issuing the <constant>target
remote</constant> command by typing in: <constant>set debug remote 1</constant>
</para>
</listitem>
</orderedlist>
<para>Remember if you continue in gdb, and need to "break in" again,
you need to issue an other sysrq-g. It is easy to create a simple
entry point by putting a breakpoint at <constant>sys_sync</constant>
and then you can run "sync" from a shell or script to break into the
debugger.</para>
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="switchKdbKgdb">
<title>kgdb and kdb interoperability</title>
<para>It is possible to transition between kdb and kgdb dynamically.
The debug core will remember which you used the last time and
automatically start in the same mode.</para>
<sect1>
<title>Switching between kdb and kgdb</title>
<sect2>
<title>Switching from kgdb to kdb</title>
<para>
There are two ways to switch from kgdb to kdb: you can use gdb to
issue a maintenance packet, or you can blindly type the command $3#33.
Whenever the kernel debugger stops in kgdb mode it will print the
message <constant>KGDB or $3#33 for KDB</constant>. It is important
to note that you have to type the sequence correctly in one pass.
You cannot type a backspace or delete because kgdb will interpret
that as part of the debug stream.
<orderedlist>
<listitem><para>Change from kgdb to kdb by blindly typing:</para>
<para><constant>$3#33</constant></para></listitem>
<listitem><para>Change from kgdb to kdb with gdb</para>
<para><constant>maintenance packet 3</constant></para>
<para>NOTE: Now you must kill gdb. Typically you press control-z and
issue the command: kill -9 %</para></listitem>
</orderedlist>
</para>
</sect2>
<sect2>
<title>Change from kdb to kgdb</title>
<para>There are two ways you can change from kdb to kgdb. You can
manually enter kgdb mode by issuing the kgdb command from the kdb
shell prompt, or you can connect gdb while the kdb shell prompt is
active. The kdb shell looks for the typical first commands that gdb
would issue with the gdb remote protocol and if it sees one of those
commands it automatically changes into kgdb mode.</para>
<orderedlist>
<listitem><para>From kdb issue the command:</para>
<para><constant>kgdb</constant></para>
<para>Now disconnect your terminal program and connect gdb in its place</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>At the kdb prompt, disconnect the terminal program and connect gdb in its place.</para></listitem>
</orderedlist>
</sect2>
</sect1>
<sect1>
<title>Running kdb commands from gdb</title>
<para>It is possible to run a limited set of kdb commands from gdb,
using the gdb monitor command. You don't want to execute any of the
run control or breakpoint operations, because it can disrupt the
state of the kernel debugger. You should be using gdb for
breakpoints and run control operations if you have gdb connected.
The more useful commands to run are things like lsmod, dmesg, ps or
possibly some of the memory information commands. To see all the kdb
commands you can run <constant>monitor help</constant>.</para>
<para>Example:
<informalexample><programlisting>
(gdb) monitor ps
1 idle process (state I) and
27 sleeping system daemon (state M) processes suppressed,
use 'ps A' to see all.
Task Addr Pid Parent [*] cpu State Thread Command
0xc78291d0 1 0 0 0 S 0xc7829404 init
0xc7954150 942 1 0 0 S 0xc7954384 dropbear
0xc78789c0 944 1 0 0 S 0xc7878bf4 sh
(gdb)
</programlisting></informalexample>
</para>
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="KGDBTestSuite">
<title>kgdb Test Suite</title>
<para>
When kgdb is enabled in the kernel config you can also elect to
enable the config parameter KGDB_TESTS. Turning this on will
enable a special kgdb I/O module which is designed to test the
kgdb internal functions.
</para>
<para>
The kgdb tests are mainly intended for developers to test the kgdb
internals as well as a tool for developing a new kgdb architecture
specific implementation. These tests are not really for end users
of the Linux kernel. The primary source of documentation would be
to look in the drivers/misc/kgdbts.c file.
</para>
<para>
The kgdb test suite can also be configured at compile time to run
the core set of tests by setting the kernel config parameter
KGDB_TESTS_ON_BOOT. This particular option is aimed at automated
regression testing and does not require modifying the kernel boot
config arguments. If this is turned on, the kgdb test suite can
be disabled by specifying "kgdbts=" as a kernel boot argument.
</para>
</chapter>
<chapter id="CommonBackEndReq">
<title>Kernel Debugger Internals</title>
<sect1 id="kgdbArchitecture">
<title>Architecture Specifics</title>
<para>
The kernel debugger is organized into a number of components:
<orderedlist>
<listitem><para>The debug core</para>
<para>
The debug core is found in kernel/debugger/debug_core.c. It contains:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>A generic OS exception handler which includes
sync'ing the processors into a stopped state on an multi-CPU
system.</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>The API to talk to the kgdb I/O drivers</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>The API to make calls to the arch-specific kgdb implementation</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>The logic to perform safe memory reads and writes to memory while using the debugger</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>A full implementation for software breakpoints unless overridden by the arch</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>The API to invoke either the kdb or kgdb frontend to the debug core.</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>The structures and callback API for atomic kernel mode setting.</para>
<para>NOTE: kgdboc is where the kms callbacks are invoked.</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem><para>kgdb arch-specific implementation</para>
<para>
This implementation is generally found in arch/*/kernel/kgdb.c.
As an example, arch/x86/kernel/kgdb.c contains the specifics to
implement HW breakpoint as well as the initialization to
dynamically register and unregister for the trap handlers on
this architecture. The arch-specific portion implements:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>contains an arch-specific trap catcher which
invokes kgdb_handle_exception() to start kgdb about doing its
work</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>translation to and from gdb specific packet format to pt_regs</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>Registration and unregistration of architecture specific trap hooks</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>Any special exception handling and cleanup</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>NMI exception handling and cleanup</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>(optional) HW breakpoints</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem><para>gdbstub frontend (aka kgdb)</para>
<para>The gdbstub is located in kernel/debug/gdbstub.c. It contains:</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>All the logic to implement the gdb serial protocol</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</listitem>
<listitem><para>kdb frontend</para>
<para>The kdb debugger shell is broken down into a number of
components. The kdb core is located in kernel/debug/kdb. There
are a number of helper functions in some of the other kernel
components to make it possible for kdb to examine and report
information about the kernel without taking locks that could
cause a kernel deadlock. The kdb core contains implements the following functionality.</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>A simple shell</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>The kdb core command set</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>A registration API to register additional kdb shell commands.</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>A good example of a self-contained kdb module
is the "ftdump" command for dumping the ftrace buffer. See:
kernel/trace/trace_kdb.c</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>For an example of how to dynamically register
a new kdb command you can build the kdb_hello.ko kernel module
from samples/kdb/kdb_hello.c. To build this example you can
set CONFIG_SAMPLES=y and CONFIG_SAMPLE_KDB=m in your kernel
config. Later run "modprobe kdb_hello" and the next time you
enter the kdb shell, you can run the "hello"
command.</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist></listitem>
<listitem><para>The implementation for kdb_printf() which
emits messages directly to I/O drivers, bypassing the kernel
log.</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>SW / HW breakpoint management for the kdb shell</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</listitem>
<listitem><para>kgdb I/O driver</para>
<para>
Each kgdb I/O driver has to provide an implementation for the following:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>configuration via built-in or module</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>dynamic configuration and kgdb hook registration calls</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>read and write character interface</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>A cleanup handler for unconfiguring from the kgdb core</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>(optional) Early debug methodology</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
Any given kgdb I/O driver has to operate very closely with the
hardware and must do it in such a way that does not enable
interrupts or change other parts of the system context without
completely restoring them. The kgdb core will repeatedly "poll"
a kgdb I/O driver for characters when it needs input. The I/O
driver is expected to return immediately if there is no data
available. Doing so allows for the future possibility to touch
watchdog hardware in such a way as to have a target system not
reset when these are enabled.
</para>
</listitem>
</orderedlist>
</para>
<para>
If you are intent on adding kgdb architecture specific support
for a new architecture, the architecture should define
<constant>HAVE_ARCH_KGDB</constant> in the architecture specific
Kconfig file. This will enable kgdb for the architecture, and
at that point you must create an architecture specific kgdb
implementation.
</para>
<para>
There are a few flags which must be set on every architecture in
their &lt;asm/kgdb.h&gt; file. These are:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>
NUMREGBYTES: The size in bytes of all of the registers, so
that we can ensure they will all fit into a packet.
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
BUFMAX: The size in bytes of the buffer GDB will read into.
This must be larger than NUMREGBYTES.
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
CACHE_FLUSH_IS_SAFE: Set to 1 if it is always safe to call
flush_cache_range or flush_icache_range. On some architectures,
these functions may not be safe to call on SMP since we keep other
CPUs in a holding pattern.
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</para>
<para>
There are also the following functions for the common backend,
found in kernel/kgdb.c, that must be supplied by the
architecture-specific backend unless marked as (optional), in
which case a default function maybe used if the architecture
does not need to provide a specific implementation.
</para>
!Iinclude/linux/kgdb.h
</sect1>
<sect1 id="kgdbocDesign">
<title>kgdboc internals</title>
<sect2>
<title>kgdboc and uarts</title>
<para>
The kgdboc driver is actually a very thin driver that relies on the
underlying low level to the hardware driver having "polling hooks"
to which the tty driver is attached. In the initial
implementation of kgdboc the serial_core was changed to expose a
low level UART hook for doing polled mode reading and writing of a
single character while in an atomic context. When kgdb makes an I/O
request to the debugger, kgdboc invokes a callback in the serial
core which in turn uses the callback in the UART driver.</para>
<para>
When using kgdboc with a UART, the UART driver must implement two callbacks in the <constant>struct uart_ops</constant>. Example from drivers/8250.c:<programlisting>
#ifdef CONFIG_CONSOLE_POLL
.poll_get_char = serial8250_get_poll_char,
.poll_put_char = serial8250_put_poll_char,
#endif
</programlisting>
Any implementation specifics around creating a polling driver use the
<constant>#ifdef CONFIG_CONSOLE_POLL</constant>, as shown above.
Keep in mind that polling hooks have to be implemented in such a way
that they can be called from an atomic context and have to restore
the state of the UART chip on return such that the system can return
to normal when the debugger detaches. You need to be very careful
with any kind of lock you consider, because failing here is most likely
going to mean pressing the reset button.
</para>
</sect2>
<sect2 id="kgdbocKbd">
<title>kgdboc and keyboards</title>
<para>The kgdboc driver contains logic to configure communications
with an attached keyboard. The keyboard infrastructure is only
compiled into the kernel when CONFIG_KDB_KEYBOARD=y is set in the
kernel configuration.</para>
<para>The core polled keyboard driver driver for PS/2 type keyboards
is in drivers/char/kdb_keyboard.c. This driver is hooked into the
debug core when kgdboc populates the callback in the array
called <constant>kdb_poll_funcs[]</constant>. The
kdb_get_kbd_char() is the top-level function which polls hardware
for single character input.
</para>
</sect2>
<sect2 id="kgdbocKms">
<title>kgdboc and kms</title>
<para>The kgdboc driver contains logic to request the graphics
display to switch to a text context when you are using
"kgdboc=kms,kbd", provided that you have a video driver which has a
frame buffer console and atomic kernel mode setting support.</para>
<para>
Every time the kernel
debugger is entered it calls kgdboc_pre_exp_handler() which in turn
calls con_debug_enter() in the virtual console layer. On resuming kernel
execution, the kernel debugger calls kgdboc_post_exp_handler() which
in turn calls con_debug_leave().</para>
<para>Any video driver that wants to be compatible with the kernel
debugger and the atomic kms callbacks must implement the
mode_set_base_atomic, fb_debug_enter and fb_debug_leave operations.
For the fb_debug_enter and fb_debug_leave the option exists to use
the generic drm fb helper functions or implement something custom for
the hardware. The following example shows the initialization of the
.mode_set_base_atomic operation in
drivers/gpu/drm/i915/intel_display.c:
<informalexample>
<programlisting>
static const struct drm_crtc_helper_funcs intel_helper_funcs = {
[...]
.mode_set_base_atomic = intel_pipe_set_base_atomic,
[...]
};
</programlisting>
</informalexample>
</para>
<para>Here is an example of how the i915 driver initializes the fb_debug_enter and fb_debug_leave functions to use the generic drm helpers in
drivers/gpu/drm/i915/intel_fb.c:
<informalexample>
<programlisting>
static struct fb_ops intelfb_ops = {
[...]
.fb_debug_enter = drm_fb_helper_debug_enter,
.fb_debug_leave = drm_fb_helper_debug_leave,
[...]
};
</programlisting>
</informalexample>
</para>
</sect2>
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="credits">
<title>Credits</title>
<para>
The following people have contributed to this document:
<orderedlist>
<listitem><para>Amit Kale<email>amitkale@linsyssoft.com</email></para></listitem>
<listitem><para>Tom Rini<email>trini@kernel.crashing.org</email></para></listitem>
</orderedlist>
In March 2008 this document was completely rewritten by:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>Jason Wessel<email>jason.wessel@windriver.com</email></para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
In Jan 2010 this document was updated to include kdb.
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>Jason Wessel<email>jason.wessel@windriver.com</email></para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</para>
</chapter>
</book>

1625
Documentation/DocBook/libata.tmpl
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

289
Documentation/DocBook/librs.tmpl
View File

@ -1,289 +0,0 @@
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
<book id="Reed-Solomon-Library-Guide">
<bookinfo>
<title>Reed-Solomon Library Programming Interface</title>
<authorgroup>
<author>
<firstname>Thomas</firstname>
<surname>Gleixner</surname>
<affiliation>
<address>
<email>tglx@linutronix.de</email>
</address>
</affiliation>
</author>
</authorgroup>
<copyright>
<year>2004</year>
<holder>Thomas Gleixner</holder>
</copyright>
<legalnotice>
<para>
This documentation is free software; you can redistribute
it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License version 2 as published by the Free Software Foundation.
</para>
<para>
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
See the GNU General Public License for more details.
</para>
<para>
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
MA 02111-1307 USA
</para>
<para>
For more details see the file COPYING in the source
distribution of Linux.
</para>
</legalnotice>
</bookinfo>
<toc></toc>
<chapter id="intro">
<title>Introduction</title>
<para>
The generic Reed-Solomon Library provides encoding, decoding
and error correction functions.
</para>
<para>
Reed-Solomon codes are used in communication and storage
applications to ensure data integrity.
</para>
<para>
This documentation is provided for developers who want to utilize
the functions provided by the library.
</para>
</chapter>
<chapter id="bugs">
<title>Known Bugs And Assumptions</title>
<para>
None.
</para>
</chapter>
<chapter id="usage">
<title>Usage</title>
<para>
This chapter provides examples of how to use the library.
</para>
<sect1>
<title>Initializing</title>
<para>
The init function init_rs returns a pointer to an
rs decoder structure, which holds the necessary
information for encoding, decoding and error correction
with the given polynomial. It either uses an existing
matching decoder or creates a new one. On creation all
the lookup tables for fast en/decoding are created.
The function may take a while, so make sure not to
call it in critical code paths.
</para>
<programlisting>
/* the Reed Solomon control structure */
static struct rs_control *rs_decoder;
/* Symbolsize is 10 (bits)
* Primitive polynomial is x^10+x^3+1
* first consecutive root is 0
* primitive element to generate roots = 1
* generator polynomial degree (number of roots) = 6
*/
rs_decoder = init_rs (10, 0x409, 0, 1, 6);
</programlisting>
</sect1>
<sect1>
<title>Encoding</title>
<para>
The encoder calculates the Reed-Solomon code over
the given data length and stores the result in
the parity buffer. Note that the parity buffer must
be initialized before calling the encoder.
</para>
<para>
The expanded data can be inverted on the fly by
providing a non-zero inversion mask. The expanded data is
XOR'ed with the mask. This is used e.g. for FLASH
ECC, where the all 0xFF is inverted to an all 0x00.
The Reed-Solomon code for all 0x00 is all 0x00. The
code is inverted before storing to FLASH so it is 0xFF
too. This prevents that reading from an erased FLASH
results in ECC errors.
</para>
<para>
The databytes are expanded to the given symbol size
on the fly. There is no support for encoding continuous
bitstreams with a symbol size != 8 at the moment. If
it is necessary it should be not a big deal to implement
such functionality.
</para>
<programlisting>
/* Parity buffer. Size = number of roots */
uint16_t par[6];
/* Initialize the parity buffer */
memset(par, 0, sizeof(par));
/* Encode 512 byte in data8. Store parity in buffer par */
encode_rs8 (rs_decoder, data8, 512, par, 0);
</programlisting>
</sect1>
<sect1>
<title>Decoding</title>
<para>
The decoder calculates the syndrome over
the given data length and the received parity symbols
and corrects errors in the data.
</para>
<para>
If a syndrome is available from a hardware decoder
then the syndrome calculation is skipped.
</para>
<para>
The correction of the data buffer can be suppressed
by providing a correction pattern buffer and an error
location buffer to the decoder. The decoder stores the
calculated error location and the correction bitmask
in the given buffers. This is useful for hardware
decoders which use a weird bit ordering scheme.
</para>
<para>
The databytes are expanded to the given symbol size
on the fly. There is no support for decoding continuous
bitstreams with a symbolsize != 8 at the moment. If
it is necessary it should be not a big deal to implement
such functionality.
</para>
<sect2>
<title>
Decoding with syndrome calculation, direct data correction
</title>
<programlisting>
/* Parity buffer. Size = number of roots */
uint16_t par[6];
uint8_t data[512];
int numerr;
/* Receive data */
.....
/* Receive parity */
.....
/* Decode 512 byte in data8.*/
numerr = decode_rs8 (rs_decoder, data8, par, 512, NULL, 0, NULL, 0, NULL);
</programlisting>
</sect2>
<sect2>
<title>
Decoding with syndrome given by hardware decoder, direct data correction
</title>
<programlisting>
/* Parity buffer. Size = number of roots */
uint16_t par[6], syn[6];
uint8_t data[512];
int numerr;
/* Receive data */
.....
/* Receive parity */
.....
/* Get syndrome from hardware decoder */
.....
/* Decode 512 byte in data8.*/
numerr = decode_rs8 (rs_decoder, data8, par, 512, syn, 0, NULL, 0, NULL);
</programlisting>
</sect2>
<sect2>
<title>
Decoding with syndrome given by hardware decoder, no direct data correction.
</title>
<para>
Note: It's not necessary to give data and received parity to the decoder.
</para>
<programlisting>
/* Parity buffer. Size = number of roots */
uint16_t par[6], syn[6], corr[8];
uint8_t data[512];
int numerr, errpos[8];
/* Receive data */
.....
/* Receive parity */
.....
/* Get syndrome from hardware decoder */
.....
/* Decode 512 byte in data8.*/
numerr = decode_rs8 (rs_decoder, NULL, NULL, 512, syn, 0, errpos, 0, corr);
for (i = 0; i &lt; numerr; i++) {
do_error_correction_in_your_buffer(errpos[i], corr[i]);
}
</programlisting>
</sect2>
</sect1>
<sect1>
<title>Cleanup</title>
<para>
The function free_rs frees the allocated resources,
if the caller is the last user of the decoder.
</para>
<programlisting>
/* Release resources */
free_rs(rs_decoder);
</programlisting>
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="structs">
<title>Structures</title>
<para>
This chapter contains the autogenerated documentation of the structures which are
used in the Reed-Solomon Library and are relevant for a developer.
</para>
!Iinclude/linux/rslib.h
</chapter>
<chapter id="pubfunctions">
<title>Public Functions Provided</title>
<para>
This chapter contains the autogenerated documentation of the Reed-Solomon functions
which are exported.
</para>
!Elib/reed_solomon/reed_solomon.c
</chapter>
<chapter id="credits">
<title>Credits</title>
<para>
The library code for encoding and decoding was written by Phil Karn.
</para>
<programlisting>
Copyright 2002, Phil Karn, KA9Q
May be used under the terms of the GNU General Public License (GPL)
</programlisting>
<para>
The wrapper functions and interfaces are written by Thomas Gleixner.
</para>
<para>
Many users have provided bugfixes, improvements and helping hands for testing.
Thanks a lot.
</para>
<para>
The following people have contributed to this document:
</para>
<para>
Thomas Gleixner<email>tglx@linutronix.de</email>
</para>
</chapter>
</book>

265
Documentation/DocBook/lsm.tmpl
View File

@ -1,265 +0,0 @@
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE article PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
<article class="whitepaper" id="LinuxSecurityModule" lang="en">
<articleinfo>
<title>Linux Security Modules: General Security Hooks for Linux</title>
<authorgroup>
<author>
<firstname>Stephen</firstname>
<surname>Smalley</surname>
<affiliation>
<orgname>NAI Labs</orgname>
<address><email>ssmalley@nai.com</email></address>
</affiliation>
</author>
<author>
<firstname>Timothy</firstname>
<surname>Fraser</surname>
<affiliation>
<orgname>NAI Labs</orgname>
<address><email>tfraser@nai.com</email></address>
</affiliation>
</author>
<author>
<firstname>Chris</firstname>
<surname>Vance</surname>
<affiliation>
<orgname>NAI Labs</orgname>
<address><email>cvance@nai.com</email></address>
</affiliation>
</author>
</authorgroup>
</articleinfo>
<sect1 id="Introduction"><title>Introduction</title>
<para>
In March 2001, the National Security Agency (NSA) gave a presentation
about Security-Enhanced Linux (SELinux) at the 2.5 Linux Kernel
Summit. SELinux is an implementation of flexible and fine-grained
nondiscretionary access controls in the Linux kernel, originally
implemented as its own particular kernel patch. Several other
security projects (e.g. RSBAC, Medusa) have also developed flexible
access control architectures for the Linux kernel, and various
projects have developed particular access control models for Linux
(e.g. LIDS, DTE, SubDomain). Each project has developed and
maintained its own kernel patch to support its security needs.
</para>
<para>
In response to the NSA presentation, Linus Torvalds made a set of
remarks that described a security framework he would be willing to
consider for inclusion in the mainstream Linux kernel. He described a
general framework that would provide a set of security hooks to
control operations on kernel objects and a set of opaque security
fields in kernel data structures for maintaining security attributes.
This framework could then be used by loadable kernel modules to
implement any desired model of security. Linus also suggested the
possibility of migrating the Linux capabilities code into such a
module.
</para>
<para>
The Linux Security Modules (LSM) project was started by WireX to
develop such a framework. LSM is a joint development effort by
several security projects, including Immunix, SELinux, SGI and Janus,
and several individuals, including Greg Kroah-Hartman and James
Morris, to develop a Linux kernel patch that implements this
framework. The patch is currently tracking the 2.4 series and is
targeted for integration into the 2.5 development series. This
technical report provides an overview of the framework and the example
capabilities security module provided by the LSM kernel patch.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="framework"><title>LSM Framework</title>
<para>
The LSM kernel patch provides a general kernel framework to support
security modules. In particular, the LSM framework is primarily
focused on supporting access control modules, although future
development is likely to address other security needs such as
auditing. By itself, the framework does not provide any additional
security; it merely provides the infrastructure to support security
modules. The LSM kernel patch also moves most of the capabilities
logic into an optional security module, with the system defaulting
to the traditional superuser logic. This capabilities module
is discussed further in <xref linkend="cap"/>.
</para>
<para>
The LSM kernel patch adds security fields to kernel data structures
and inserts calls to hook functions at critical points in the kernel
code to manage the security fields and to perform access control. It
also adds functions for registering and unregistering security
modules, and adds a general <function>security</function> system call
to support new system calls for security-aware applications.
</para>
<para>
The LSM security fields are simply <type>void*</type> pointers. For
process and program execution security information, security fields
were added to <structname>struct task_struct</structname> and
<structname>struct linux_binprm</structname>. For filesystem security
information, a security field was added to
<structname>struct super_block</structname>. For pipe, file, and socket
security information, security fields were added to
<structname>struct inode</structname> and
<structname>struct file</structname>. For packet and network device security
information, security fields were added to
<structname>struct sk_buff</structname> and
<structname>struct net_device</structname>. For System V IPC security
information, security fields were added to
<structname>struct kern_ipc_perm</structname> and
<structname>struct msg_msg</structname>; additionally, the definitions
for <structname>struct msg_msg</structname>, <structname>struct
msg_queue</structname>, and <structname>struct
shmid_kernel</structname> were moved to header files
(<filename>include/linux/msg.h</filename> and
<filename>include/linux/shm.h</filename> as appropriate) to allow
the security modules to use these definitions.
</para>
<para>
Each LSM hook is a function pointer in a global table,
security_ops. This table is a
<structname>security_operations</structname> structure as defined by
<filename>include/linux/security.h</filename>. Detailed documentation
for each hook is included in this header file. At present, this
structure consists of a collection of substructures that group related
hooks based on the kernel object (e.g. task, inode, file, sk_buff,
etc) as well as some top-level hook function pointers for system
operations. This structure is likely to be flattened in the future
for performance. The placement of the hook calls in the kernel code
is described by the "called:" lines in the per-hook documentation in
the header file. The hook calls can also be easily found in the
kernel code by looking for the string "security_ops->".
</para>
<para>
Linus mentioned per-process security hooks in his original remarks as a
possible alternative to global security hooks. However, if LSM were
to start from the perspective of per-process hooks, then the base
framework would have to deal with how to handle operations that
involve multiple processes (e.g. kill), since each process might have
its own hook for controlling the operation. This would require a
general mechanism for composing hooks in the base framework.
Additionally, LSM would still need global hooks for operations that
have no process context (e.g. network input operations).
Consequently, LSM provides global security hooks, but a security
module is free to implement per-process hooks (where that makes sense)
by storing a security_ops table in each process' security field and
then invoking these per-process hooks from the global hooks.
The problem of composition is thus deferred to the module.
</para>
<para>
The global security_ops table is initialized to a set of hook
functions provided by a dummy security module that provides
traditional superuser logic. A <function>register_security</function>
function (in <filename>security/security.c</filename>) is provided to
allow a security module to set security_ops to refer to its own hook
functions, and an <function>unregister_security</function> function is
provided to revert security_ops to the dummy module hooks. This
mechanism is used to set the primary security module, which is
responsible for making the final decision for each hook.
</para>
<para>
LSM also provides a simple mechanism for stacking additional security
modules with the primary security module. It defines
<function>register_security</function> and
<function>unregister_security</function> hooks in the
<structname>security_operations</structname> structure and provides
<function>mod_reg_security</function> and
<function>mod_unreg_security</function> functions that invoke these
hooks after performing some sanity checking. A security module can
call these functions in order to stack with other modules. However,
the actual details of how this stacking is handled are deferred to the
module, which can implement these hooks in any way it wishes
(including always returning an error if it does not wish to support
stacking). In this manner, LSM again defers the problem of
composition to the module.
</para>
<para>
Although the LSM hooks are organized into substructures based on
kernel object, all of the hooks can be viewed as falling into two
major categories: hooks that are used to manage the security fields
and hooks that are used to perform access control. Examples of the
first category of hooks include the
<function>alloc_security</function> and
<function>free_security</function> hooks defined for each kernel data
structure that has a security field. These hooks are used to allocate
and free security structures for kernel objects. The first category
of hooks also includes hooks that set information in the security
field after allocation, such as the <function>post_lookup</function>
hook in <structname>struct inode_security_ops</structname>. This hook
is used to set security information for inodes after successful lookup
operations. An example of the second category of hooks is the
<function>permission</function> hook in
<structname>struct inode_security_ops</structname>. This hook checks
permission when accessing an inode.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="cap"><title>LSM Capabilities Module</title>
<para>
The LSM kernel patch moves most of the existing POSIX.1e capabilities
logic into an optional security module stored in the file
<filename>security/capability.c</filename>. This change allows
users who do not want to use capabilities to omit this code entirely
from their kernel, instead using the dummy module for traditional
superuser logic or any other module that they desire. This change
also allows the developers of the capabilities logic to maintain and
enhance their code more freely, without needing to integrate patches
back into the base kernel.
</para>
<para>
In addition to moving the capabilities logic, the LSM kernel patch
could move the capability-related fields from the kernel data
structures into the new security fields managed by the security
modules. However, at present, the LSM kernel patch leaves the
capability fields in the kernel data structures. In his original
remarks, Linus suggested that this might be preferable so that other
security modules can be easily stacked with the capabilities module
without needing to chain multiple security structures on the security field.
It also avoids imposing extra overhead on the capabilities module
to manage the security fields. However, the LSM framework could
certainly support such a move if it is determined to be desirable,
with only a few additional changes described below.
</para>
<para>
At present, the capabilities logic for computing process capabilities
on <function>execve</function> and <function>set*uid</function>,
checking capabilities for a particular process, saving and checking
capabilities for netlink messages, and handling the
<function>capget</function> and <function>capset</function> system
calls have been moved into the capabilities module. There are still a
few locations in the base kernel where capability-related fields are
directly examined or modified, but the current version of the LSM
patch does allow a security module to completely replace the
assignment and testing of capabilities. These few locations would
need to be changed if the capability-related fields were moved into
the security field. The following is a list of known locations that
still perform such direct examination or modification of
capability-related fields:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para><filename>fs/open.c</filename>:<function>sys_access</function></para></listitem>
<listitem><para><filename>fs/lockd/host.c</filename>:<function>nlm_bind_host</function></para></listitem>
<listitem><para><filename>fs/nfsd/auth.c</filename>:<function>nfsd_setuser</function></para></listitem>
<listitem><para><filename>fs/proc/array.c</filename>:<function>task_cap</function></para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</para>
</sect1>
</article>

1291
Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

111
Documentation/DocBook/networking.tmpl
View File

@ -1,111 +0,0 @@
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
<book id="LinuxNetworking">
<bookinfo>
<title>Linux Networking and Network Devices APIs</title>
<legalnotice>
<para>
This documentation is free software; you can redistribute
it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later
version.
</para>
<para>
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
See the GNU General Public License for more details.
</para>
<para>
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
MA 02111-1307 USA
</para>
<para>
For more details see the file COPYING in the source
distribution of Linux.
</para>
</legalnotice>
</bookinfo>
<toc></toc>
<chapter id="netcore">
<title>Linux Networking</title>
<sect1><title>Networking Base Types</title>
!Iinclude/linux/net.h
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Socket Buffer Functions</title>
!Iinclude/linux/skbuff.h
!Iinclude/net/sock.h
!Enet/socket.c
!Enet/core/skbuff.c
!Enet/core/sock.c
!Enet/core/datagram.c
!Enet/core/stream.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Socket Filter</title>
!Enet/core/filter.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Generic Network Statistics</title>
!Iinclude/uapi/linux/gen_stats.h
!Enet/core/gen_stats.c
!Enet/core/gen_estimator.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>SUN RPC subsystem</title>
<!-- The !D functionality is not perfect, garbage has to be protected by comments
!Dnet/sunrpc/sunrpc_syms.c
-->
!Enet/sunrpc/xdr.c
!Enet/sunrpc/svc_xprt.c
!Enet/sunrpc/xprt.c
!Enet/sunrpc/sched.c
!Enet/sunrpc/socklib.c
!Enet/sunrpc/stats.c
!Enet/sunrpc/rpc_pipe.c
!Enet/sunrpc/rpcb_clnt.c
!Enet/sunrpc/clnt.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>WiMAX</title>
!Enet/wimax/op-msg.c
!Enet/wimax/op-reset.c
!Enet/wimax/op-rfkill.c
!Enet/wimax/stack.c
!Iinclude/net/wimax.h
!Iinclude/uapi/linux/wimax.h
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="netdev">
<title>Network device support</title>
<sect1><title>Driver Support</title>
!Enet/core/dev.c
!Enet/ethernet/eth.c
!Enet/sched/sch_generic.c
!Iinclude/linux/etherdevice.h
!Iinclude/linux/netdevice.h
</sect1>
<sect1><title>PHY Support</title>
!Edrivers/net/phy/phy.c
!Idrivers/net/phy/phy.c
!Edrivers/net/phy/phy_device.c
!Idrivers/net/phy/phy_device.c
!Edrivers/net/phy/mdio_bus.c
!Idrivers/net/phy/mdio_bus.c
</sect1>
<!-- FIXME: Removed for now since no structured comments in source
<sect1><title>Wireless</title>
X!Enet/core/wireless.c
</sect1>
-->
</chapter>
</book>

155
Documentation/DocBook/rapidio.tmpl
View File

@ -1,155 +0,0 @@
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" [
<!ENTITY rapidio SYSTEM "rapidio.xml">
]>
<book id="RapidIO-Guide">
<bookinfo>
<title>RapidIO Subsystem Guide</title>
<authorgroup>
<author>
<firstname>Matt</firstname>
<surname>Porter</surname>
<affiliation>
<address>
<email>mporter@kernel.crashing.org</email>
<email>mporter@mvista.com</email>
</address>
</affiliation>
</author>
</authorgroup>
<copyright>
<year>2005</year>
<holder>MontaVista Software, Inc.</holder>
</copyright>
<legalnotice>
<para>
This documentation is free software; you can redistribute
it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License version 2 as published by the Free Software Foundation.
</para>
<para>
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
See the GNU General Public License for more details.
</para>
<para>
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
MA 02111-1307 USA
</para>
<para>
For more details see the file COPYING in the source
distribution of Linux.
</para>
</legalnotice>
</bookinfo>
<toc></toc>
<chapter id="intro">
<title>Introduction</title>
<para>
RapidIO is a high speed switched fabric interconnect with
features aimed at the embedded market. RapidIO provides
support for memory-mapped I/O as well as message-based
transactions over the switched fabric network. RapidIO has
a standardized discovery mechanism not unlike the PCI bus
standard that allows simple detection of devices in a
network.
</para>
<para>
This documentation is provided for developers intending
to support RapidIO on new architectures, write new drivers,
or to understand the subsystem internals.
</para>
</chapter>
<chapter id="bugs">
<title>Known Bugs and Limitations</title>
<sect1 id="known_bugs">
<title>Bugs</title>
<para>None. ;)</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="Limitations">
<title>Limitations</title>
<para>
<orderedlist>
<listitem><para>Access/management of RapidIO memory regions is not supported</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>Multiple host enumeration is not supported</para></listitem>
</orderedlist>
</para>
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="drivers">
<title>RapidIO driver interface</title>
<para>
Drivers are provided a set of calls in order
to interface with the subsystem to gather info
on devices, request/map memory region resources,
and manage mailboxes/doorbells.
</para>
<sect1 id="Functions">
<title>Functions</title>
!Iinclude/linux/rio_drv.h
!Edrivers/rapidio/rio-driver.c
!Edrivers/rapidio/rio.c
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="internals">
<title>Internals</title>
<para>
This chapter contains the autogenerated documentation of the RapidIO
subsystem.
</para>
<sect1 id="Structures"><title>Structures</title>
!Iinclude/linux/rio.h
</sect1>
<sect1 id="Enumeration_and_Discovery"><title>Enumeration and Discovery</title>
!Idrivers/rapidio/rio-scan.c
</sect1>
<sect1 id="Driver_functionality"><title>Driver functionality</title>
!Idrivers/rapidio/rio.c
!Idrivers/rapidio/rio-access.c
</sect1>
<sect1 id="Device_model_support"><title>Device model support</title>
!Idrivers/rapidio/rio-driver.c
</sect1>
<sect1 id="PPC32_support"><title>PPC32 support</title>
!Iarch/powerpc/sysdev/fsl_rio.c
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="credits">
<title>Credits</title>
<para>
The following people have contributed to the RapidIO
subsystem directly or indirectly:
<orderedlist>
<listitem><para>Matt Porter<email>mporter@kernel.crashing.org</email></para></listitem>
<listitem><para>Randy Vinson<email>rvinson@mvista.com</email></para></listitem>
<listitem><para>Dan Malek<email>dan@embeddedalley.com</email></para></listitem>
</orderedlist>
</para>
<para>
The following people have contributed to this document:
<orderedlist>
<listitem><para>Matt Porter<email>mporter@kernel.crashing.org</email></para></listitem>
</orderedlist>
</para>
</chapter>
</book>

161
Documentation/DocBook/s390-drivers.tmpl
View File

@ -1,161 +0,0 @@
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
<book id="s390drivers">
<bookinfo>
<title>Writing s390 channel device drivers</title>
<authorgroup>
<author>
<firstname>Cornelia</firstname>
<surname>Huck</surname>
<affiliation>
<address>
<email>cornelia.huck@de.ibm.com</email>
</address>
</affiliation>
</author>
</authorgroup>
<copyright>
<year>2007</year>
<holder>IBM Corp.</holder>
</copyright>
<legalnotice>
<para>
This documentation is free software; you can redistribute
it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later
version.
</para>
<para>
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
See the GNU General Public License for more details.
</para>
<para>
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
MA 02111-1307 USA
</para>
<para>
For more details see the file COPYING in the source
distribution of Linux.
</para>
</legalnotice>
</bookinfo>
<toc></toc>
<chapter id="intro">
<title>Introduction</title>
<para>
This document describes the interfaces available for device drivers that
drive s390 based channel attached I/O devices. This includes interfaces for
interaction with the hardware and interfaces for interacting with the
common driver core. Those interfaces are provided by the s390 common I/O
layer.
</para>
<para>
The document assumes a familarity with the technical terms associated
with the s390 channel I/O architecture. For a description of this
architecture, please refer to the "z/Architecture: Principles of
Operation", IBM publication no. SA22-7832.
</para>
<para>
While most I/O devices on a s390 system are typically driven through the
channel I/O mechanism described here, there are various other methods
(like the diag interface). These are out of the scope of this document.
</para>
<para>
Some additional information can also be found in the kernel source
under Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt.
</para>
</chapter>
<chapter id="ccw">
<title>The ccw bus</title>
<para>
The ccw bus typically contains the majority of devices available to
a s390 system. Named after the channel command word (ccw), the basic
command structure used to address its devices, the ccw bus contains
so-called channel attached devices. They are addressed via I/O
subchannels, visible on the css bus. A device driver for
channel-attached devices, however, will never interact with the
subchannel directly, but only via the I/O device on the ccw bus,
the ccw device.
</para>
<sect1 id="channelIO">
<title>I/O functions for channel-attached devices</title>
<para>
Some hardware structures have been translated into C structures for use
by the common I/O layer and device drivers. For more information on
the hardware structures represented here, please consult the Principles
of Operation.
</para>
!Iarch/s390/include/asm/cio.h
</sect1>
<sect1 id="ccwdev">
<title>ccw devices</title>
<para>
Devices that want to initiate channel I/O need to attach to the ccw bus.
Interaction with the driver core is done via the common I/O layer, which
provides the abstractions of ccw devices and ccw device drivers.
</para>
<para>
The functions that initiate or terminate channel I/O all act upon a
ccw device structure. Device drivers must not bypass those functions
or strange side effects may happen.
</para>
!Iarch/s390/include/asm/ccwdev.h
!Edrivers/s390/cio/device.c
!Edrivers/s390/cio/device_ops.c
</sect1>
<sect1 id="cmf">
<title>The channel-measurement facility</title>
<para>
The channel-measurement facility provides a means to collect
measurement data which is made available by the channel subsystem
for each channel attached device.
</para>
!Iarch/s390/include/asm/cmb.h
!Edrivers/s390/cio/cmf.c
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="ccwgroup">
<title>The ccwgroup bus</title>
<para>
The ccwgroup bus only contains artificial devices, created by the user.
Many networking devices (e.g. qeth) are in fact composed of several
ccw devices (like read, write and data channel for qeth). The
ccwgroup bus provides a mechanism to create a meta-device which
contains those ccw devices as slave devices and can be associated
with the netdevice.
</para>
<sect1 id="ccwgroupdevices">
<title>ccw group devices</title>
!Iarch/s390/include/asm/ccwgroup.h
!Edrivers/s390/cio/ccwgroup.c
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="genericinterfaces">
<title>Generic interfaces</title>
<para>
Some interfaces are available to other drivers that do not necessarily
have anything to do with the busses described above, but still are
indirectly using basic infrastructure in the common I/O layer.
One example is the support for adapter interrupts.
</para>
!Edrivers/s390/cio/airq.c
</chapter>
</book>

409
Documentation/DocBook/scsi.tmpl
View File

@ -1,409 +0,0 @@
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
<book id="scsimid">
<bookinfo>
<title>SCSI Interfaces Guide</title>
<authorgroup>
<author>
<firstname>James</firstname>
<surname>Bottomley</surname>
<affiliation>
<address>
<email>James.Bottomley@hansenpartnership.com</email>
</address>
</affiliation>
</author>
<author>
<firstname>Rob</firstname>
<surname>Landley</surname>
<affiliation>
<address>
<email>rob@landley.net</email>
</address>
</affiliation>
</author>
</authorgroup>
<copyright>
<year>2007</year>
<holder>Linux Foundation</holder>
</copyright>
<legalnotice>
<para>
This documentation is free software; you can redistribute
it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License version 2.
</para>
<para>
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
For more details see the file COPYING in the source
distribution of Linux.
</para>
</legalnotice>
</bookinfo>
<toc></toc>
<chapter id="intro">
<title>Introduction</title>
<sect1 id="protocol_vs_bus">
<title>Protocol vs bus</title>
<para>
Once upon a time, the Small Computer Systems Interface defined both
a parallel I/O bus and a data protocol to connect a wide variety of
peripherals (disk drives, tape drives, modems, printers, scanners,
optical drives, test equipment, and medical devices) to a host
computer.
</para>
<para>
Although the old parallel (fast/wide/ultra) SCSI bus has largely
fallen out of use, the SCSI command set is more widely used than ever
to communicate with devices over a number of different busses.
</para>
<para>
The <ulink url='http://www.t10.org/scsi-3.htm'>SCSI protocol</ulink>
is a big-endian peer-to-peer packet based protocol. SCSI commands
are 6, 10, 12, or 16 bytes long, often followed by an associated data
payload.
</para>
<para>
SCSI commands can be transported over just about any kind of bus, and
are the default protocol for storage devices attached to USB, SATA,
SAS, Fibre Channel, FireWire, and ATAPI devices. SCSI packets are
also commonly exchanged over Infiniband,
<ulink url='http://i2o.shadowconnect.com/faq.php'>I20</ulink>, TCP/IP
(<ulink url='https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISCSI'>iSCSI</ulink>), even
<ulink url='http://cyberelk.net/tim/parport/parscsi.html'>Parallel
ports</ulink>.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="subsystem_design">
<title>Design of the Linux SCSI subsystem</title>
<para>
The SCSI subsystem uses a three layer design, with upper, mid, and low
layers. Every operation involving the SCSI subsystem (such as reading
a sector from a disk) uses one driver at each of the 3 levels: one
upper layer driver, one lower layer driver, and the SCSI midlayer.
</para>
<para>
The SCSI upper layer provides the interface between userspace and the
kernel, in the form of block and char device nodes for I/O and
ioctl(). The SCSI lower layer contains drivers for specific hardware
devices.
</para>
<para>
In between is the SCSI mid-layer, analogous to a network routing
layer such as the IPv4 stack. The SCSI mid-layer routes a packet
based data protocol between the upper layer's /dev nodes and the
corresponding devices in the lower layer. It manages command queues,
provides error handling and power management functions, and responds
to ioctl() requests.
</para>
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="upper_layer">
<title>SCSI upper layer</title>
<para>
The upper layer supports the user-kernel interface by providing
device nodes.
</para>
<sect1 id="sd">
<title>sd (SCSI Disk)</title>
<para>sd (sd_mod.o)</para>
<!-- !Idrivers/scsi/sd.c -->
</sect1>
<sect1 id="sr">
<title>sr (SCSI CD-ROM)</title>
<para>sr (sr_mod.o)</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="st">
<title>st (SCSI Tape)</title>
<para>st (st.o)</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="sg">
<title>sg (SCSI Generic)</title>
<para>sg (sg.o)</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="ch">
<title>ch (SCSI Media Changer)</title>
<para>ch (ch.c)</para>
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="mid_layer">
<title>SCSI mid layer</title>
<sect1 id="midlayer_implementation">
<title>SCSI midlayer implementation</title>
<sect2 id="scsi_device.h">
<title>include/scsi/scsi_device.h</title>
<para>
</para>
!Iinclude/scsi/scsi_device.h
</sect2>
<sect2 id="scsi.c">
<title>drivers/scsi/scsi.c</title>
<para>Main file for the SCSI midlayer.</para>
!Edrivers/scsi/scsi.c
</sect2>
<sect2 id="scsicam.c">
<title>drivers/scsi/scsicam.c</title>
<para>
<ulink url='http://www.t10.org/ftp/t10/drafts/cam/cam-r12b.pdf'>SCSI
Common Access Method</ulink> support functions, for use with
HDIO_GETGEO, etc.
</para>
!Edrivers/scsi/scsicam.c
</sect2>
<sect2 id="scsi_error.c">
<title>drivers/scsi/scsi_error.c</title>
<para>Common SCSI error/timeout handling routines.</para>
!Edrivers/scsi/scsi_error.c
</sect2>
<sect2 id="scsi_devinfo.c">
<title>drivers/scsi/scsi_devinfo.c</title>
<para>
Manage scsi_dev_info_list, which tracks blacklisted and whitelisted
devices.
</para>
!Idrivers/scsi/scsi_devinfo.c
</sect2>
<sect2 id="scsi_ioctl.c">
<title>drivers/scsi/scsi_ioctl.c</title>
<para>
Handle ioctl() calls for SCSI devices.
</para>
!Edrivers/scsi/scsi_ioctl.c
</sect2>
<sect2 id="scsi_lib.c">
<title>drivers/scsi/scsi_lib.c</title>
<para>
SCSI queuing library.
</para>
!Edrivers/scsi/scsi_lib.c
</sect2>
<sect2 id="scsi_lib_dma.c">
<title>drivers/scsi/scsi_lib_dma.c</title>
<para>
SCSI library functions depending on DMA
(map and unmap scatter-gather lists).
</para>
!Edrivers/scsi/scsi_lib_dma.c
</sect2>
<sect2 id="scsi_module.c">
<title>drivers/scsi/scsi_module.c</title>
<para>
The file drivers/scsi/scsi_module.c contains legacy support for
old-style host templates. It should never be used by any new driver.
</para>
</sect2>
<sect2 id="scsi_proc.c">
<title>drivers/scsi/scsi_proc.c</title>
<para>
The functions in this file provide an interface between
the PROC file system and the SCSI device drivers
It is mainly used for debugging, statistics and to pass
information directly to the lowlevel driver.
I.E. plumbing to manage /proc/scsi/*
</para>
!Idrivers/scsi/scsi_proc.c
</sect2>
<sect2 id="scsi_netlink.c">
<title>drivers/scsi/scsi_netlink.c</title>
<para>
Infrastructure to provide async events from transports to userspace
via netlink, using a single NETLINK_SCSITRANSPORT protocol for all
transports.
See <ulink url='http://marc.info/?l=linux-scsi&amp;m=115507374832500&amp;w=2'>the
original patch submission</ulink> for more details.
</para>
!Idrivers/scsi/scsi_netlink.c
</sect2>
<sect2 id="scsi_scan.c">
<title>drivers/scsi/scsi_scan.c</title>
<para>
Scan a host to determine which (if any) devices are attached.
The general scanning/probing algorithm is as follows, exceptions are
made to it depending on device specific flags, compilation options,
and global variable (boot or module load time) settings.
A specific LUN is scanned via an INQUIRY command; if the LUN has a
device attached, a scsi_device is allocated and setup for it.
For every id of every channel on the given host, start by scanning
LUN 0. Skip hosts that don't respond at all to a scan of LUN 0.
Otherwise, if LUN 0 has a device attached, allocate and setup a
scsi_device for it. If target is SCSI-3 or up, issue a REPORT LUN,
and scan all of the LUNs returned by the REPORT LUN; else,
sequentially scan LUNs up until some maximum is reached, or a LUN is
seen that cannot have a device attached to it.
</para>
!Idrivers/scsi/scsi_scan.c
</sect2>
<sect2 id="scsi_sysctl.c">
<title>drivers/scsi/scsi_sysctl.c</title>
<para>
Set up the sysctl entry: "/dev/scsi/logging_level"
(DEV_SCSI_LOGGING_LEVEL) which sets/returns scsi_logging_level.
</para>
</sect2>
<sect2 id="scsi_sysfs.c">
<title>drivers/scsi/scsi_sysfs.c</title>
<para>
SCSI sysfs interface routines.
</para>
!Edrivers/scsi/scsi_sysfs.c
</sect2>
<sect2 id="hosts.c">
<title>drivers/scsi/hosts.c</title>
<para>
mid to lowlevel SCSI driver interface
</para>
!Edrivers/scsi/hosts.c
</sect2>
<sect2 id="constants.c">
<title>drivers/scsi/constants.c</title>
<para>
mid to lowlevel SCSI driver interface
</para>
!Edrivers/scsi/constants.c
</sect2>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="Transport_classes">
<title>Transport classes</title>
<para>
Transport classes are service libraries for drivers in the SCSI
lower layer, which expose transport attributes in sysfs.
</para>
<sect2 id="Fibre_Channel_transport">
<title>Fibre Channel transport</title>
<para>
The file drivers/scsi/scsi_transport_fc.c defines transport attributes
for Fibre Channel.
</para>
!Edrivers/scsi/scsi_transport_fc.c
</sect2>
<sect2 id="iSCSI_transport">
<title>iSCSI transport class</title>
<para>
The file drivers/scsi/scsi_transport_iscsi.c defines transport
attributes for the iSCSI class, which sends SCSI packets over TCP/IP
connections.
</para>
!Edrivers/scsi/scsi_transport_iscsi.c
</sect2>
<sect2 id="SAS_transport">
<title>Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) transport class</title>
<para>
The file drivers/scsi/scsi_transport_sas.c defines transport
attributes for Serial Attached SCSI, a variant of SATA aimed at
large high-end systems.
</para>
<para>
The SAS transport class contains common code to deal with SAS HBAs,
an aproximated representation of SAS topologies in the driver model,
and various sysfs attributes to expose these topologies and management
interfaces to userspace.
</para>
<para>
In addition to the basic SCSI core objects this transport class
introduces two additional intermediate objects: The SAS PHY
as represented by struct sas_phy defines an "outgoing" PHY on
a SAS HBA or Expander, and the SAS remote PHY represented by
struct sas_rphy defines an "incoming" PHY on a SAS Expander or
end device. Note that this is purely a software concept, the
underlying hardware for a PHY and a remote PHY is the exactly
the same.
</para>
<para>
There is no concept of a SAS port in this code, users can see
what PHYs form a wide port based on the port_identifier attribute,
which is the same for all PHYs in a port.
</para>
!Edrivers/scsi/scsi_transport_sas.c
</sect2>
<sect2 id="SATA_transport">
<title>SATA transport class</title>
<para>
The SATA transport is handled by libata, which has its own book of
documentation in this directory.
</para>
</sect2>
<sect2 id="SPI_transport">
<title>Parallel SCSI (SPI) transport class</title>
<para>
The file drivers/scsi/scsi_transport_spi.c defines transport
attributes for traditional (fast/wide/ultra) SCSI busses.
</para>
!Edrivers/scsi/scsi_transport_spi.c
</sect2>
<sect2 id="SRP_transport">
<title>SCSI RDMA (SRP) transport class</title>
<para>
The file drivers/scsi/scsi_transport_srp.c defines transport
attributes for SCSI over Remote Direct Memory Access.
</para>
!Edrivers/scsi/scsi_transport_srp.c
</sect2>
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="lower_layer">
<title>SCSI lower layer</title>
<sect1 id="hba_drivers">
<title>Host Bus Adapter transport types</title>
<para>
Many modern device controllers use the SCSI command set as a protocol to
communicate with their devices through many different types of physical
connections.
</para>
<para>
In SCSI language a bus capable of carrying SCSI commands is
called a "transport", and a controller connecting to such a bus is
called a "host bus adapter" (HBA).
</para>
<sect2 id="scsi_debug.c">
<title>Debug transport</title>
<para>
The file drivers/scsi/scsi_debug.c simulates a host adapter with a
variable number of disks (or disk like devices) attached, sharing a
common amount of RAM. Does a lot of checking to make sure that we are
not getting blocks mixed up, and panics the kernel if anything out of
the ordinary is seen.
</para>
<para>
To be more realistic, the simulated devices have the transport
attributes of SAS disks.
</para>
<para>
For documentation see
<ulink url='http://sg.danny.cz/sg/sdebug26.html'>http://sg.danny.cz/sg/sdebug26.html</ulink>
</para>
<!-- !Edrivers/scsi/scsi_debug.c -->
</sect2>
<sect2 id="todo">
<title>todo</title>
<para>Parallel (fast/wide/ultra) SCSI, USB, SATA,
SAS, Fibre Channel, FireWire, ATAPI devices, Infiniband,
I20, iSCSI, Parallel ports, netlink...
</para>
</sect2>
</sect1>
</chapter>
</book>

105
Documentation/DocBook/sh.tmpl
View File

@ -1,105 +0,0 @@
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
<book id="sh-drivers">
<bookinfo>
<title>SuperH Interfaces Guide</title>
<authorgroup>
<author>
<firstname>Paul</firstname>
<surname>Mundt</surname>
<affiliation>
<address>
<email>lethal@linux-sh.org</email>
</address>
</affiliation>
</author>
</authorgroup>
<copyright>
<year>2008-2010</year>
<holder>Paul Mundt</holder>
</copyright>
<copyright>
<year>2008-2010</year>
<holder>Renesas Technology Corp.</holder>
</copyright>
<copyright>
<year>2010</year>
<holder>Renesas Electronics Corp.</holder>
</copyright>
<legalnotice>
<para>
This documentation is free software; you can redistribute
it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License version 2 as published by the Free Software Foundation.
</para>
<para>
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
See the GNU General Public License for more details.
</para>
<para>
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
MA 02111-1307 USA
</para>
<para>
For more details see the file COPYING in the source
distribution of Linux.
</para>
</legalnotice>
</bookinfo>
<toc></toc>
<chapter id="mm">
<title>Memory Management</title>
<sect1 id="sh4">
<title>SH-4</title>
<sect2 id="sq">
<title>Store Queue API</title>
!Earch/sh/kernel/cpu/sh4/sq.c
</sect2>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="sh5">
<title>SH-5</title>
<sect2 id="tlb">
<title>TLB Interfaces</title>
!Iarch/sh/mm/tlb-sh5.c
!Iarch/sh/include/asm/tlb_64.h
</sect2>
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="mach">
<title>Machine Specific Interfaces</title>
<sect1 id="dreamcast">
<title>mach-dreamcast</title>
!Iarch/sh/boards/mach-dreamcast/rtc.c
</sect1>
<sect1 id="x3proto">
<title>mach-x3proto</title>
!Earch/sh/boards/mach-x3proto/ilsel.c
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="busses">
<title>Busses</title>
<sect1 id="superhyway">
<title>SuperHyway</title>
!Edrivers/sh/superhyway/superhyway.c
</sect1>
<sect1 id="maple">
<title>Maple</title>
!Edrivers/sh/maple/maple.c
</sect1>
</chapter>
</book>

11
Documentation/DocBook/stylesheet.xsl
View File

@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<stylesheet xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform" version="1.0">
<param name="chunk.quietly">1</param>
<param name="funcsynopsis.style">ansi</param>
<param name="funcsynopsis.tabular.threshold">80</param>
<param name="callout.graphics">0</param>
<!-- <param name="paper.type">A4</param> -->
<param name="generate.consistent.ids">1</param>
<param name="generate.section.toc.level">2</param>
<param name="use.id.as.filename">1</param>
</stylesheet>

101
Documentation/DocBook/w1.tmpl
View File

@ -1,101 +0,0 @@
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
<book id="w1id">
<bookinfo>
<title>W1: Dallas' 1-wire bus</title>
<authorgroup>
<author>
<firstname>David</firstname>
<surname>Fries</surname>
<affiliation>
<address>
<email>David@Fries.net</email>
</address>
</affiliation>
</author>
</authorgroup>
<copyright>
<year>2013</year>
<!--
<holder></holder>
-->
</copyright>
<legalnotice>
<para>
This documentation is free software; you can redistribute
it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License version 2.
</para>
<para>
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
For more details see the file COPYING in the source
distribution of Linux.
</para>
</legalnotice>
</bookinfo>
<toc></toc>
<chapter id="w1_internal">
<title>W1 API internal to the kernel</title>
<sect1 id="w1_internal_api">
<title>W1 API internal to the kernel</title>
<sect2 id="w1.h">
<title>drivers/w1/w1.h</title>
<para>W1 core functions.</para>
!Idrivers/w1/w1.h
</sect2>
<sect2 id="w1.c">
<title>drivers/w1/w1.c</title>
<para>W1 core functions.</para>
!Idrivers/w1/w1.c
</sect2>
<sect2 id="w1_family.h">
<title>drivers/w1/w1_family.h</title>
<para>Allows registering device family operations.</para>
!Idrivers/w1/w1_family.h
</sect2>
<sect2 id="w1_family.c">
<title>drivers/w1/w1_family.c</title>
<para>Allows registering device family operations.</para>
!Edrivers/w1/w1_family.c
</sect2>
<sect2 id="w1_int.c">
<title>drivers/w1/w1_int.c</title>
<para>W1 internal initialization for master devices.</para>
!Edrivers/w1/w1_int.c
</sect2>
<sect2 id="w1_netlink.h">
<title>drivers/w1/w1_netlink.h</title>
<para>W1 external netlink API structures and commands.</para>
!Idrivers/w1/w1_netlink.h
</sect2>
<sect2 id="w1_io.c">
<title>drivers/w1/w1_io.c</title>
<para>W1 input/output.</para>
!Edrivers/w1/w1_io.c
!Idrivers/w1/w1_io.c
</sect2>
</sect1>
</chapter>
</book>

371
Documentation/DocBook/z8530book.tmpl
View File

@ -1,371 +0,0 @@
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
<book id="Z85230Guide">
<bookinfo>
<title>Z8530 Programming Guide</title>
<authorgroup>
<author>
<firstname>Alan</firstname>
<surname>Cox</surname>
<affiliation>
<address>
<email>alan@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk</email>
</address>
</affiliation>
</author>
</authorgroup>
<copyright>
<year>2000</year>
<holder>Alan Cox</holder>
</copyright>
<legalnotice>
<para>
This documentation is free software; you can redistribute
it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later
version.
</para>
<para>
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
See the GNU General Public License for more details.
</para>
<para>
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
MA 02111-1307 USA
</para>
<para>
For more details see the file COPYING in the source
distribution of Linux.
</para>
</legalnotice>
</bookinfo>
<toc></toc>
<chapter id="intro">
<title>Introduction</title>
<para>
The Z85x30 family synchronous/asynchronous controller chips are
used on a large number of cheap network interface cards. The
kernel provides a core interface layer that is designed to make
it easy to provide WAN services using this chip.
</para>
<para>
The current driver only support synchronous operation. Merging the
asynchronous driver support into this code to allow any Z85x30
device to be used as both a tty interface and as a synchronous
controller is a project for Linux post the 2.4 release
</para>
</chapter>
<chapter id="Driver_Modes">
<title>Driver Modes</title>
<para>
The Z85230 driver layer can drive Z8530, Z85C30 and Z85230 devices
in three different modes. Each mode can be applied to an individual
channel on the chip (each chip has two channels).
</para>
<para>
The PIO synchronous mode supports the most common Z8530 wiring. Here
the chip is interface to the I/O and interrupt facilities of the
host machine but not to the DMA subsystem. When running PIO the
Z8530 has extremely tight timing requirements. Doing high speeds,
even with a Z85230 will be tricky. Typically you should expect to
achieve at best 9600 baud with a Z8C530 and 64Kbits with a Z85230.
</para>
<para>
The DMA mode supports the chip when it is configured to use dual DMA
channels on an ISA bus. The better cards tend to support this mode
of operation for a single channel. With DMA running the Z85230 tops
out when it starts to hit ISA DMA constraints at about 512Kbits. It
is worth noting here that many PC machines hang or crash when the
chip is driven fast enough to hold the ISA bus solid.
</para>
<para>
Transmit DMA mode uses a single DMA channel. The DMA channel is used
for transmission as the transmit FIFO is smaller than the receive
FIFO. it gives better performance than pure PIO mode but is nowhere
near as ideal as pure DMA mode.
</para>
</chapter>
<chapter id="Using_the_Z85230_driver">
<title>Using the Z85230 driver</title>
<para>
The Z85230 driver provides the back end interface to your board. To
configure a Z8530 interface you need to detect the board and to
identify its ports and interrupt resources. It is also your problem
to verify the resources are available.
</para>
<para>
Having identified the chip you need to fill in a struct z8530_dev,
which describes each chip. This object must exist until you finally
shutdown the board. Firstly zero the active field. This ensures
nothing goes off without you intending it. The irq field should
be set to the interrupt number of the chip. (Each chip has a single
interrupt source rather than each channel). You are responsible
for allocating the interrupt line. The interrupt handler should be
set to <function>z8530_interrupt</function>. The device id should
be set to the z8530_dev structure pointer. Whether the interrupt can
be shared or not is board dependent, and up to you to initialise.
</para>
<para>
The structure holds two channel structures.
Initialise chanA.ctrlio and chanA.dataio with the address of the
control and data ports. You can or this with Z8530_PORT_SLEEP to
indicate your interface needs the 5uS delay for chip settling done
in software. The PORT_SLEEP option is architecture specific. Other
flags may become available on future platforms, eg for MMIO.
Initialise the chanA.irqs to &amp;z8530_nop to start the chip up
as disabled and discarding interrupt events. This ensures that
stray interrupts will be mopped up and not hang the bus. Set
chanA.dev to point to the device structure itself. The
private and name field you may use as you wish. The private field
is unused by the Z85230 layer. The name is used for error reporting
and it may thus make sense to make it match the network name.
</para>
<para>
Repeat the same operation with the B channel if your chip has
both channels wired to something useful. This isn't always the
case. If it is not wired then the I/O values do not matter, but
you must initialise chanB.dev.
</para>
<para>
If your board has DMA facilities then initialise the txdma and
rxdma fields for the relevant channels. You must also allocate the
ISA DMA channels and do any necessary board level initialisation
to configure them. The low level driver will do the Z8530 and
DMA controller programming but not board specific magic.
</para>
<para>
Having initialised the device you can then call
<function>z8530_init</function>. This will probe the chip and
reset it into a known state. An identification sequence is then
run to identify the chip type. If the checks fail to pass the
function returns a non zero error code. Typically this indicates
that the port given is not valid. After this call the
type field of the z8530_dev structure is initialised to either
Z8530, Z85C30 or Z85230 according to the chip found.
</para>
<para>
Once you have called z8530_init you can also make use of the utility
function <function>z8530_describe</function>. This provides a
consistent reporting format for the Z8530 devices, and allows all
the drivers to provide consistent reporting.
</para>
</chapter>
<chapter id="Attaching_Network_Interfaces">
<title>Attaching Network Interfaces</title>
<para>
If you wish to use the network interface facilities of the driver,
then you need to attach a network device to each channel that is
present and in use. In addition to use the generic HDLC
you need to follow some additional plumbing rules. They may seem
complex but a look at the example hostess_sv11 driver should
reassure you.
</para>
<para>
The network device used for each channel should be pointed to by
the netdevice field of each channel. The hdlc-&gt; priv field of the
network device points to your private data - you will need to be
able to find your private data from this.
</para>
<para>
The way most drivers approach this particular problem is to
create a structure holding the Z8530 device definition and
put that into the private field of the network device. The
network device fields of the channels then point back to the
network devices.
</para>
<para>
If you wish to use the generic HDLC then you need to register
the HDLC device.
</para>
<para>
Before you register your network device you will also need to
provide suitable handlers for most of the network device callbacks.
See the network device documentation for more details on this.
</para>
</chapter>
<chapter id="Configuring_And_Activating_The_Port">
<title>Configuring And Activating The Port</title>
<para>
The Z85230 driver provides helper functions and tables to load the
port registers on the Z8530 chips. When programming the register
settings for a channel be aware that the documentation recommends
initialisation orders. Strange things happen when these are not
followed.
</para>
<para>
<function>z8530_channel_load</function> takes an array of
pairs of initialisation values in an array of u8 type. The first
value is the Z8530 register number. Add 16 to indicate the alternate
register bank on the later chips. The array is terminated by a 255.
</para>
<para>
The driver provides a pair of public tables. The
z8530_hdlc_kilostream table is for the UK 'Kilostream' service and
also happens to cover most other end host configurations. The
z8530_hdlc_kilostream_85230 table is the same configuration using
the enhancements of the 85230 chip. The configuration loaded is
standard NRZ encoded synchronous data with HDLC bitstuffing. All
of the timing is taken from the other end of the link.
</para>
<para>
When writing your own tables be aware that the driver internally
tracks register values. It may need to reload values. You should
therefore be sure to set registers 1-7, 9-11, 14 and 15 in all
configurations. Where the register settings depend on DMA selection
the driver will update the bits itself when you open or close.
Loading a new table with the interface open is not recommended.
</para>
<para>
There are three standard configurations supported by the core
code. In PIO mode the interface is programmed up to use
interrupt driven PIO. This places high demands on the host processor
to avoid latency. The driver is written to take account of latency
issues but it cannot avoid latencies caused by other drivers,
notably IDE in PIO mode. Because the drivers allocate buffers you
must also prevent MTU changes while the port is open.
</para>
<para>
Once the port is open it will call the rx_function of each channel
whenever a completed packet arrived. This is invoked from
interrupt context and passes you the channel and a network
buffer (struct sk_buff) holding the data. The data includes
the CRC bytes so most users will want to trim the last two
bytes before processing the data. This function is very timing
critical. When you wish to simply discard data the support
code provides the function <function>z8530_null_rx</function>
to discard the data.
</para>
<para>
To active PIO mode sending and receiving the <function>
z8530_sync_open</function> is called. This expects to be passed
the network device and the channel. Typically this is called from
your network device open callback. On a failure a non zero error
status is returned. The <function>z8530_sync_close</function>
function shuts down a PIO channel. This must be done before the
channel is opened again and before the driver shuts down
and unloads.
</para>
<para>
The ideal mode of operation is dual channel DMA mode. Here the
kernel driver will configure the board for DMA in both directions.
The driver also handles ISA DMA issues such as controller
programming and the memory range limit for you. This mode is
activated by calling the <function>z8530_sync_dma_open</function>
function. On failure a non zero error value is returned.
Once this mode is activated it can be shut down by calling the
<function>z8530_sync_dma_close</function>. You must call the close
function matching the open mode you used.
</para>
<para>
The final supported mode uses a single DMA channel to drive the
transmit side. As the Z85C30 has a larger FIFO on the receive
channel this tends to increase the maximum speed a little.
This is activated by calling the <function>z8530_sync_txdma_open
</function>. This returns a non zero error code on failure. The
<function>z8530_sync_txdma_close</function> function closes down
the Z8530 interface from this mode.
</para>
</chapter>
<chapter id="Network_Layer_Functions">
<title>Network Layer Functions</title>
<para>
The Z8530 layer provides functions to queue packets for
transmission. The driver internally buffers the frame currently
being transmitted and one further frame (in order to keep back
to back transmission running). Any further buffering is up to
the caller.
</para>
<para>
The function <function>z8530_queue_xmit</function> takes a network
buffer in sk_buff format and queues it for transmission. The
caller must provide the entire packet with the exception of the
bitstuffing and CRC. This is normally done by the caller via
the generic HDLC interface layer. It returns 0 if the buffer has been
queued and non zero values for queue full. If the function accepts
the buffer it becomes property of the Z8530 layer and the caller
should not free it.
</para>
<para>
The function <function>z8530_get_stats</function> returns a pointer
to an internally maintained per interface statistics block. This
provides most of the interface code needed to implement the network
layer get_stats callback.
</para>
</chapter>
<chapter id="Porting_The_Z8530_Driver">
<title>Porting The Z8530 Driver</title>
<para>
The Z8530 driver is written to be portable. In DMA mode it makes
assumptions about the use of ISA DMA. These are probably warranted
in most cases as the Z85230 in particular was designed to glue to PC
type machines. The PIO mode makes no real assumptions.
</para>
<para>
Should you need to retarget the Z8530 driver to another architecture
the only code that should need changing are the port I/O functions.
At the moment these assume PC I/O port accesses. This may not be
appropriate for all platforms. Replacing
<function>z8530_read_port</function> and <function>z8530_write_port
</function> is intended to be all that is required to port this
driver layer.
</para>
</chapter>
<chapter id="bugs">
<title>Known Bugs And Assumptions</title>
<para>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term>Interrupt Locking</term>
<listitem>
<para>
The locking in the driver is done via the global cli/sti lock. This
makes for relatively poor SMP performance. Switching this to use a
per device spin lock would probably materially improve performance.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>Occasional Failures</term>
<listitem>
<para>
We have reports of occasional failures when run for very long
periods of time and the driver starts to receive junk frames. At
the moment the cause of this is not clear.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry>
</variablelist>
</para>
</chapter>
<chapter id="pubfunctions">
<title>Public Functions Provided</title>
!Edrivers/net/wan/z85230.c
</chapter>
<chapter id="intfunctions">
<title>Internal Functions</title>
!Idrivers/net/wan/z85230.c
</chapter>
</book>

76
Documentation/IPMI.txt
View File

@ -1,9 +1,8 @@
=====================
The Linux IPMI Driver
=====================
The Linux IPMI Driver
---------------------
Corey Minyard
<minyard@mvista.com>
<minyard@acm.org>
:Author: Corey Minyard <minyard@mvista.com> / <minyard@acm.org>
The Intelligent Platform Management Interface, or IPMI, is a
standard for controlling intelligent devices that monitor a system.
@ -141,7 +140,7 @@ Addressing
----------
The IPMI addressing works much like IP addresses, you have an overlay
to handle the different address types. The overlay is:
to handle the different address types. The overlay is::
struct ipmi_addr
{
@ -153,7 +152,7 @@ to handle the different address types. The overlay is:
The addr_type determines what the address really is. The driver
currently understands two different types of addresses.
"System Interface" addresses are defined as:
"System Interface" addresses are defined as::
struct ipmi_system_interface_addr
{
@ -166,7 +165,7 @@ straight to the BMC on the current card. The channel must be
IPMI_BMC_CHANNEL.
Messages that are destined to go out on the IPMB bus use the
IPMI_IPMB_ADDR_TYPE address type. The format is
IPMI_IPMB_ADDR_TYPE address type. The format is::
struct ipmi_ipmb_addr
{
@ -184,16 +183,16 @@ spec.
Messages
--------
Messages are defined as:
Messages are defined as::
struct ipmi_msg
{
struct ipmi_msg
{
unsigned char netfn;
unsigned char lun;
unsigned char cmd;
unsigned char *data;
int data_len;
};
};
The driver takes care of adding/stripping the header information. The
data portion is just the data to be send (do NOT put addressing info
@ -208,7 +207,7 @@ block of data, even when receiving messages. Otherwise the driver
will have no place to put the message.
Messages coming up from the message handler in kernelland will come in
as:
as::
struct ipmi_recv_msg
{
@ -246,6 +245,7 @@ and the user should not have to care what type of SMI is below them.
Watching For Interfaces
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
When your code comes up, the IPMI driver may or may not have detected
if IPMI devices exist. So you might have to defer your setup until
@ -256,6 +256,7 @@ and tell you when they come and go.
Creating the User
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
To use the message handler, you must first create a user using
ipmi_create_user. The interface number specifies which SMI you want
@ -272,6 +273,7 @@ closing the device automatically destroys the user.
Messaging
^^^^^^^^^
To send a message from kernel-land, the ipmi_request_settime() call does
pretty much all message handling. Most of the parameter are
@ -321,6 +323,7 @@ though, since it is tricky to manage your own buffers.
Events and Incoming Commands
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The driver takes care of polling for IPMI events and receiving
commands (commands are messages that are not responses, they are
@ -367,7 +370,7 @@ in the system. It discovers interfaces through a host of different
methods, depending on the system.
You can specify up to four interfaces on the module load line and
control some module parameters:
control some module parameters::
modprobe ipmi_si.o type=<type1>,<type2>....
ports=<port1>,<port2>... addrs=<addr1>,<addr2>...
@ -437,7 +440,7 @@ default is one. Setting to 0 is useful with the hotmod, but is
obviously only useful for modules.
When compiled into the kernel, the parameters can be specified on the
kernel command line as:
kernel command line as::
ipmi_si.type=<type1>,<type2>...
ipmi_si.ports=<port1>,<port2>... ipmi_si.addrs=<addr1>,<addr2>...
@ -474,16 +477,22 @@ The driver supports a hot add and remove of interfaces. This way,
interfaces can be added or removed after the kernel is up and running.
This is done using /sys/modules/ipmi_si/parameters/hotmod, which is a
write-only parameter. You write a string to this interface. The string
has the format:
has the format::
<op1>[:op2[:op3...]]
The "op"s are:
The "op"s are::
add|remove,kcs|bt|smic,mem|i/o,<address>[,<opt1>[,<opt2>[,...]]]
You can specify more than one interface on the line. The "opt"s are:
You can specify more than one interface on the line. The "opt"s are::
rsp=<regspacing>
rsi=<regsize>
rsh=<regshift>
irq=<irq>
ipmb=<ipmb slave addr>
and these have the same meanings as discussed above. Note that you
can also use this on the kernel command line for a more compact format
for specifying an interface. Note that when removing an interface,
@ -496,7 +505,7 @@ The SMBus Driver (SSIF)
The SMBus driver allows up to 4 SMBus devices to be configured in the
system. By default, the driver will only register with something it
finds in DMI or ACPI tables. You can change this
at module load time (for a module) with:
at module load time (for a module) with::
modprobe ipmi_ssif.o
addr=<i2caddr1>[,<i2caddr2>[,...]]
@ -535,7 +544,7 @@ the smb_addr parameter unless you have DMI or ACPI data to tell the
driver what to use.
When compiled into the kernel, the addresses can be specified on the
kernel command line as:
kernel command line as::
ipmb_ssif.addr=<i2caddr1>[,<i2caddr2>[...]]
ipmi_ssif.adapter=<adapter1>[,<adapter2>[...]]
@ -565,9 +574,9 @@ Some users need more detailed information about a device, like where
the address came from or the raw base device for the IPMI interface.
You can use the IPMI smi_watcher to catch the IPMI interfaces as they
come or go, and to grab the information, you can use the function
ipmi_get_smi_info(), which returns the following structure:
ipmi_get_smi_info(), which returns the following structure::
struct ipmi_smi_info {
struct ipmi_smi_info {
enum ipmi_addr_src addr_src;
struct device *dev;
union {
@ -575,7 +584,7 @@ struct ipmi_smi_info {
void *acpi_handle;
} acpi_info;
} addr_info;
};
};
Currently special info for only for SI_ACPI address sources is
returned. Others may be added as necessary.
@ -590,7 +599,7 @@ Watchdog
A watchdog timer is provided that implements the Linux-standard
watchdog timer interface. It has three module parameters that can be
used to control it:
used to control it::
modprobe ipmi_watchdog timeout=<t> pretimeout=<t> action=<action type>
preaction=<preaction type> preop=<preop type> start_now=x
@ -635,7 +644,7 @@ watchdog device is closed. The default value of nowayout is true
if the CONFIG_WATCHDOG_NOWAYOUT option is enabled, or false if not.
When compiled into the kernel, the kernel command line is available
for configuring the watchdog:
for configuring the watchdog::
ipmi_watchdog.timeout=<t> ipmi_watchdog.pretimeout=<t>
ipmi_watchdog.action=<action type>
@ -675,6 +684,7 @@ also get a bunch of OEM events holding the panic string.
The field settings of the events are:
* Generator ID: 0x21 (kernel)
* EvM Rev: 0x03 (this event is formatting in IPMI 1.0 format)
* Sensor Type: 0x20 (OS critical stop sensor)
@ -683,18 +693,20 @@ The field settings of the events are:
* Event Data 1: 0xa1 (Runtime stop in OEM bytes 2 and 3)
* Event data 2: second byte of panic string
* Event data 3: third byte of panic string
See the IPMI spec for the details of the event layout. This event is
always sent to the local management controller. It will handle routing
the message to the right place
Other OEM events have the following format:
Record ID (bytes 0-1): Set by the SEL.
Record type (byte 2): 0xf0 (OEM non-timestamped)
byte 3: The slave address of the card saving the panic
byte 4: A sequence number (starting at zero)
The rest of the bytes (11 bytes) are the panic string. If the panic string
is longer than 11 bytes, multiple messages will be sent with increasing
sequence numbers.
* Record ID (bytes 0-1): Set by the SEL.
* Record type (byte 2): 0xf0 (OEM non-timestamped)
* byte 3: The slave address of the card saving the panic
* byte 4: A sequence number (starting at zero)
The rest of the bytes (11 bytes) are the panic string. If the panic string
is longer than 11 bytes, multiple messages will be sent with increasing
sequence numbers.
Because you cannot send OEM events using the standard interface, this
function will attempt to find an SEL and add the events there. It

77
Documentation/IRQ-affinity.txt
View File

@ -1,8 +1,11 @@
ChangeLog:
Started by Ingo Molnar <mingo@redhat.com>
Update by Max Krasnyansky <maxk@qualcomm.com>
================
SMP IRQ affinity
================
ChangeLog:
- Started by Ingo Molnar <mingo@redhat.com>
- Update by Max Krasnyansky <maxk@qualcomm.com>
/proc/irq/IRQ#/smp_affinity and /proc/irq/IRQ#/smp_affinity_list specify
which target CPUs are permitted for a given IRQ source. It's a bitmask
@ -16,50 +19,52 @@ will be set to the default mask. It can then be changed as described above.
Default mask is 0xffffffff.
Here is an example of restricting IRQ44 (eth1) to CPU0-3 then restricting
it to CPU4-7 (this is an 8-CPU SMP box):
it to CPU4-7 (this is an 8-CPU SMP box)::
[root@moon 44]# cd /proc/irq/44
[root@moon 44]# cat smp_affinity
ffffffff
[root@moon 44]# cd /proc/irq/44
[root@moon 44]# cat smp_affinity
ffffffff
[root@moon 44]# echo 0f > smp_affinity
[root@moon 44]# cat smp_affinity
0000000f
[root@moon 44]# ping -f h
PING hell (195.4.7.3): 56 data bytes
...
--- hell ping statistics ---
6029 packets transmitted, 6027 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 0.1/0.1/0.4 ms
[root@moon 44]# cat /proc/interrupts | grep 'CPU\|44:'
CPU0 CPU1 CPU2 CPU3 CPU4 CPU5 CPU6 CPU7
44: 1068 1785 1785 1783 0 0 0 0 IO-APIC-level eth1
[root@moon 44]# echo 0f > smp_affinity
[root@moon 44]# cat smp_affinity
0000000f
[root@moon 44]# ping -f h
PING hell (195.4.7.3): 56 data bytes
...
--- hell ping statistics ---
6029 packets transmitted, 6027 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 0.1/0.1/0.4 ms
[root@moon 44]# cat /proc/interrupts | grep 'CPU\|44:'
CPU0 CPU1 CPU2 CPU3 CPU4 CPU5 CPU6 CPU7
44: 1068 1785 1785 1783 0 0 0 0 IO-APIC-level eth1
As can be seen from the line above IRQ44 was delivered only to the first four
processors (0-3).
Now lets restrict that IRQ to CPU(4-7).
[root@moon 44]# echo f0 > smp_affinity
[root@moon 44]# cat smp_affinity
000000f0
[root@moon 44]# ping -f h
PING hell (195.4.7.3): 56 data bytes
..
--- hell ping statistics ---
2779 packets transmitted, 2777 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 0.1/0.5/585.4 ms
[root@moon 44]# cat /proc/interrupts | 'CPU\|44:'
CPU0 CPU1 CPU2 CPU3 CPU4 CPU5 CPU6 CPU7
44: 1068 1785 1785 1783 1784 1069 1070 1069 IO-APIC-level eth1
::
[root@moon 44]# echo f0 > smp_affinity
[root@moon 44]# cat smp_affinity
000000f0
[root@moon 44]# ping -f h
PING hell (195.4.7.3): 56 data bytes
..
--- hell ping statistics ---
2779 packets transmitted, 2777 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 0.1/0.5/585.4 ms
[root@moon 44]# cat /proc/interrupts | 'CPU\|44:'
CPU0 CPU1 CPU2 CPU3 CPU4 CPU5 CPU6 CPU7
44: 1068 1785 1785 1783 1784 1069 1070 1069 IO-APIC-level eth1
This time around IRQ44 was delivered only to the last four processors.
i.e counters for the CPU0-3 did not change.
Here is an example of limiting that same irq (44) to cpus 1024 to 1031:
Here is an example of limiting that same irq (44) to cpus 1024 to 1031::
[root@moon 44]# echo 1024-1031 > smp_affinity_list
[root@moon 44]# cat smp_affinity_list
1024-1031
[root@moon 44]# echo 1024-1031 > smp_affinity_list
[root@moon 44]# cat smp_affinity_list
1024-1031
Note that to do this with a bitmask would require 32 bitmasks of zero
to follow the pertinent one.

69
Documentation/IRQ-domain.txt
View File

@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
irq_domain interrupt number mapping library
===============================================
The irq_domain interrupt number mapping library
===============================================
The current design of the Linux kernel uses a single large number
space where each separate IRQ source is assigned a different number.
@ -36,7 +38,9 @@ irq_domain also implements translation from an abstract irq_fwspec
structure to hwirq numbers (Device Tree and ACPI GSI so far), and can
be easily extended to support other IRQ topology data sources.
=== irq_domain usage ===
irq_domain usage
================
An interrupt controller driver creates and registers an irq_domain by
calling one of the irq_domain_add_*() functions (each mapping method
has a different allocator function, more on that later). The function
@ -62,15 +66,21 @@ If the driver has the Linux IRQ number or the irq_data pointer, and
needs to know the associated hwirq number (such as in the irq_chip
callbacks) then it can be directly obtained from irq_data->hwirq.
=== Types of irq_domain mappings ===
Types of irq_domain mappings
============================
There are several mechanisms available for reverse mapping from hwirq
to Linux irq, and each mechanism uses a different allocation function.
Which reverse map type should be used depends on the use case. Each
of the reverse map types are described below:
==== Linear ====
irq_domain_add_linear()
irq_domain_create_linear()
Linear
------
::
irq_domain_add_linear()
irq_domain_create_linear()
The linear reverse map maintains a fixed size table indexed by the
hwirq number. When a hwirq is mapped, an irq_desc is allocated for
@ -89,9 +99,13 @@ accepts a more general abstraction 'struct fwnode_handle'.
The majority of drivers should use the linear map.
==== Tree ====
irq_domain_add_tree()
irq_domain_create_tree()
Tree
----
::
irq_domain_add_tree()
irq_domain_create_tree()
The irq_domain maintains a radix tree map from hwirq numbers to Linux
IRQs. When an hwirq is mapped, an irq_desc is allocated and the
@ -109,8 +123,12 @@ accepts a more general abstraction 'struct fwnode_handle'.
Very few drivers should need this mapping.
==== No Map ===-
irq_domain_add_nomap()
No Map
------
::
irq_domain_add_nomap()
The No Map mapping is to be used when the hwirq number is
programmable in the hardware. In this case it is best to program the
@ -121,10 +139,14 @@ Linux IRQ number into the hardware.
Most drivers cannot use this mapping.
==== Legacy ====
irq_domain_add_simple()
irq_domain_add_legacy()
irq_domain_add_legacy_isa()
Legacy
------
::
irq_domain_add_simple()
irq_domain_add_legacy()
irq_domain_add_legacy_isa()
The Legacy mapping is a special case for drivers that already have a
range of irq_descs allocated for the hwirqs. It is used when the
@ -163,14 +185,17 @@ that the driver using the simple domain call irq_create_mapping()
before any irq_find_mapping() since the latter will actually work
for the static IRQ assignment case.
==== Hierarchy IRQ domain ====
Hierarchy IRQ domain
--------------------
On some architectures, there may be multiple interrupt controllers
involved in delivering an interrupt from the device to the target CPU.
Let's look at a typical interrupt delivering path on x86 platforms:
Let's look at a typical interrupt delivering path on x86 platforms::
Device --> IOAPIC -> Interrupt remapping Controller -> Local APIC -> CPU
Device --> IOAPIC -> Interrupt remapping Controller -> Local APIC -> CPU
There are three interrupt controllers involved:
1) IOAPIC controller
2) Interrupt remapping controller
3) Local APIC controller
@ -180,7 +205,8 @@ hardware architecture, an irq_domain data structure is built for each
interrupt controller and those irq_domains are organized into hierarchy.
When building irq_domain hierarchy, the irq_domain near to the device is
child and the irq_domain near to CPU is parent. So a hierarchy structure
as below will be built for the example above.
as below will be built for the example above::
CPU Vector irq_domain (root irq_domain to manage CPU vectors)
^
|
@ -190,6 +216,7 @@ as below will be built for the example above.
IOAPIC irq_domain (manage IOAPIC delivery entries/pins)
There are four major interfaces to use hierarchy irq_domain:
1) irq_domain_alloc_irqs(): allocate IRQ descriptors and interrupt
controller related resources to deliver these interrupts.
2) irq_domain_free_irqs(): free IRQ descriptors and interrupt controller
@ -199,7 +226,8 @@ There are four major interfaces to use hierarchy irq_domain:
4) irq_domain_deactivate_irq(): deactivate interrupt controller hardware
to stop delivering the interrupt.
Following changes are needed to support hierarchy irq_domain.
Following changes are needed to support hierarchy irq_domain:
1) a new field 'parent' is added to struct irq_domain; it's used to
maintain irq_domain hierarchy information.
2) a new field 'parent_data' is added to struct irq_data; it's used to
@ -223,6 +251,7 @@ software architecture.
For an interrupt controller driver to support hierarchy irq_domain, it
needs to:
1) Implement irq_domain_ops.alloc and irq_domain_ops.free
2) Optionally implement irq_domain_ops.activate and
irq_domain_ops.deactivate.

2
Documentation/IRQ.txt
View File

@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
===============
What is an IRQ?
===============
An IRQ is an interrupt request from a device.
Currently they can come in over a pin, or over a packet.

37
Documentation/Intel-IOMMU.txt
View File

@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
===================
Linux IOMMU Support
===================
@ -9,11 +10,11 @@ This guide gives a quick cheat sheet for some basic understanding.
Some Keywords
DMAR - DMA remapping
DRHD - DMA Remapping Hardware Unit Definition
RMRR - Reserved memory Region Reporting Structure
ZLR - Zero length reads from PCI devices
IOVA - IO Virtual address.
- DMAR - DMA remapping
- DRHD - DMA Remapping Hardware Unit Definition
- RMRR - Reserved memory Region Reporting Structure
- ZLR - Zero length reads from PCI devices
- IOVA - IO Virtual address.
Basic stuff
-----------
@ -33,7 +34,7 @@ devices that need to access these regions. OS is expected to setup
unity mappings for these regions for these devices to access these regions.
How is IOVA generated?
---------------------
----------------------
Well behaved drivers call pci_map_*() calls before sending command to device
that needs to perform DMA. Once DMA is completed and mapping is no longer
@ -82,14 +83,14 @@ in ACPI.
ACPI: DMAR (v001 A M I OEMDMAR 0x00000001 MSFT 0x00000097) @ 0x000000007f5b5ef0
When DMAR is being processed and initialized by ACPI, prints DMAR locations
and any RMRR's processed.
and any RMRR's processed::
ACPI DMAR:Host address width 36
ACPI DMAR:DRHD (flags: 0x00000000)base: 0x00000000fed90000
ACPI DMAR:DRHD (flags: 0x00000000)base: 0x00000000fed91000
ACPI DMAR:DRHD (flags: 0x00000001)base: 0x00000000fed93000
ACPI DMAR:RMRR base: 0x00000000000ed000 end: 0x00000000000effff
ACPI DMAR:RMRR base: 0x000000007f600000 end: 0x000000007fffffff
ACPI DMAR:Host address width 36
ACPI DMAR:DRHD (flags: 0x00000000)base: 0x00000000fed90000
ACPI DMAR:DRHD (flags: 0x00000000)base: 0x00000000fed91000
ACPI DMAR:DRHD (flags: 0x00000001)base: 0x00000000fed93000
ACPI DMAR:RMRR base: 0x00000000000ed000 end: 0x00000000000effff
ACPI DMAR:RMRR base: 0x000000007f600000 end: 0x000000007fffffff
When DMAR is enabled for use, you will notice..
@ -98,10 +99,12 @@ PCI-DMA: Using DMAR IOMMU
Fault reporting
---------------
DMAR:[DMA Write] Request device [00:02.0] fault addr 6df084000
DMAR:[fault reason 05] PTE Write access is not set
DMAR:[DMA Write] Request device [00:02.0] fault addr 6df084000
DMAR:[fault reason 05] PTE Write access is not set
::
DMAR:[DMA Write] Request device [00:02.0] fault addr 6df084000
DMAR:[fault reason 05] PTE Write access is not set
DMAR:[DMA Write] Request device [00:02.0] fault addr 6df084000
DMAR:[fault reason 05] PTE Write access is not set
TBD
----

125
Documentation/Makefile
View File

@ -1 +1,126 @@
# -*- makefile -*-
# Makefile for Sphinx documentation
#
subdir-y :=
# You can set these variables from the command line.
SPHINXBUILD = sphinx-build
SPHINXOPTS =
SPHINXDIRS = .
_SPHINXDIRS = $(patsubst $(srctree)/Documentation/%/conf.py,%,$(wildcard $(srctree)/Documentation/*/conf.py))
SPHINX_CONF = conf.py
PAPER =
BUILDDIR = $(obj)/output
PDFLATEX = xelatex
LATEXOPTS = -interaction=batchmode
# User-friendly check for sphinx-build
HAVE_SPHINX := $(shell if which $(SPHINXBUILD) >/dev/null 2>&1; then echo 1; else echo 0; fi)
ifeq ($(HAVE_SPHINX),0)
.DEFAULT:
$(warning The '$(SPHINXBUILD)' command was not found. Make sure you have Sphinx installed and in PATH, or set the SPHINXBUILD make variable to point to the full path of the '$(SPHINXBUILD)' executable.)
@echo " SKIP Sphinx $@ target."
else # HAVE_SPHINX
# User-friendly check for pdflatex
HAVE_PDFLATEX := $(shell if which $(PDFLATEX) >/dev/null 2>&1; then echo 1; else echo 0; fi)
# Internal variables.
PAPEROPT_a4 = -D latex_paper_size=a4
PAPEROPT_letter = -D latex_paper_size=letter
KERNELDOC = $(srctree)/scripts/kernel-doc
KERNELDOC_CONF = -D kerneldoc_srctree=$(srctree) -D kerneldoc_bin=$(KERNELDOC)
ALLSPHINXOPTS = $(KERNELDOC_CONF) $(PAPEROPT_$(PAPER)) $(SPHINXOPTS)
# the i18n builder cannot share the environment and doctrees with the others
I18NSPHINXOPTS = $(PAPEROPT_$(PAPER)) $(SPHINXOPTS) .
# commands; the 'cmd' from scripts/Kbuild.include is not *loopable*
loop_cmd = $(echo-cmd) $(cmd_$(1)) || exit;
# $2 sphinx builder e.g. "html"
# $3 name of the build subfolder / e.g. "media", used as:
# * dest folder relative to $(BUILDDIR) and
# * cache folder relative to $(BUILDDIR)/.doctrees
# $4 dest subfolder e.g. "man" for man pages at media/man
# $5 reST source folder relative to $(srctree)/$(src),
# e.g. "media" for the linux-tv book-set at ./Documentation/media
quiet_cmd_sphinx = SPHINX $@ --> file://$(abspath $(BUILDDIR)/$3/$4)
cmd_sphinx = $(MAKE) BUILDDIR=$(abspath $(BUILDDIR)) $(build)=Documentation/media $2 && \
PYTHONDONTWRITEBYTECODE=1 \
BUILDDIR=$(abspath $(BUILDDIR)) SPHINX_CONF=$(abspath $(srctree)/$(src)/$5/$(SPHINX_CONF)) \
$(SPHINXBUILD) \
-b $2 \
-c $(abspath $(srctree)/$(src)) \
-d $(abspath $(BUILDDIR)/.doctrees/$3) \
-D version=$(KERNELVERSION) -D release=$(KERNELRELEASE) \
$(ALLSPHINXOPTS) \
$(abspath $(srctree)/$(src)/$5) \
$(abspath $(BUILDDIR)/$3/$4)
htmldocs:
@+$(foreach var,$(SPHINXDIRS),$(call loop_cmd,sphinx,html,$(var),,$(var)))
linkcheckdocs:
@$(foreach var,$(SPHINXDIRS),$(call loop_cmd,sphinx,linkcheck,$(var),,$(var)))
latexdocs:
@+$(foreach var,$(SPHINXDIRS),$(call loop_cmd,sphinx,latex,$(var),latex,$(var)))
ifeq ($(HAVE_PDFLATEX),0)
pdfdocs:
$(warning The '$(PDFLATEX)' command was not found. Make sure you have it installed and in PATH to produce PDF output.)
@echo " SKIP Sphinx $@ target."
else # HAVE_PDFLATEX
pdfdocs: latexdocs
$(foreach var,$(SPHINXDIRS), $(MAKE) PDFLATEX=$(PDFLATEX) LATEXOPTS="$(LATEXOPTS)" -C $(BUILDDIR)/$(var)/latex || exit;)
endif # HAVE_PDFLATEX
epubdocs:
@+$(foreach var,$(SPHINXDIRS),$(call loop_cmd,sphinx,epub,$(var),epub,$(var)))
xmldocs:
@+$(foreach var,$(SPHINXDIRS),$(call loop_cmd,sphinx,xml,$(var),xml,$(var)))
endif # HAVE_SPHINX
# The following targets are independent of HAVE_SPHINX, and the rules should
# work or silently pass without Sphinx.
# no-ops for the Sphinx toolchain
sgmldocs:
@:
psdocs:
@:
mandocs:
@:
installmandocs:
@:
cleandocs:
$(Q)rm -rf $(BUILDDIR)
$(Q)$(MAKE) BUILDDIR=$(abspath $(BUILDDIR)) $(build)=Documentation/media clean
dochelp:
@echo ' Linux kernel internal documentation in different formats from ReST:'
@echo ' htmldocs - HTML'
@echo ' latexdocs - LaTeX'
@echo ' pdfdocs - PDF'
@echo ' epubdocs - EPUB'
@echo ' xmldocs - XML'
@echo ' linkcheckdocs - check for broken external links (will connect to external hosts)'
@echo ' cleandocs - clean all generated files'
@echo
@echo ' make SPHINXDIRS="s1 s2" [target] Generate only docs of folder s1, s2'
@echo ' valid values for SPHINXDIRS are: $(_SPHINXDIRS)'
@echo
@echo ' make SPHINX_CONF={conf-file} [target] use *additional* sphinx-build'
@echo ' configuration. This is e.g. useful to build with nit-picking config.'

130
Documentation/Makefile.sphinx
View File

@ -1,130 +0,0 @@
# -*- makefile -*-
# Makefile for Sphinx documentation
#
# You can set these variables from the command line.
SPHINXBUILD = sphinx-build
SPHINXOPTS =
SPHINXDIRS = .
_SPHINXDIRS = $(patsubst $(srctree)/Documentation/%/conf.py,%,$(wildcard $(srctree)/Documentation/*/conf.py))
SPHINX_CONF = conf.py
PAPER =
BUILDDIR = $(obj)/output
PDFLATEX = xelatex
LATEXOPTS = -interaction=batchmode
# User-friendly check for sphinx-build
HAVE_SPHINX := $(shell if which $(SPHINXBUILD) >/dev/null 2>&1; then echo 1; else echo 0; fi)
ifeq ($(HAVE_SPHINX),0)
.DEFAULT:
$(warning The '$(SPHINXBUILD)' command was not found. Make sure you have Sphinx installed and in PATH, or set the SPHINXBUILD make variable to point to the full path of the '$(SPHINXBUILD)' executable.)
@echo " SKIP Sphinx $@ target."
else ifneq ($(DOCBOOKS),)
# Skip Sphinx build if the user explicitly requested DOCBOOKS.
.DEFAULT:
@echo " SKIP Sphinx $@ target (DOCBOOKS specified)."
else # HAVE_SPHINX
# User-friendly check for pdflatex
HAVE_PDFLATEX := $(shell if which $(PDFLATEX) >/dev/null 2>&1; then echo 1; else echo 0; fi)
# Internal variables.
PAPEROPT_a4 = -D latex_paper_size=a4
PAPEROPT_letter = -D latex_paper_size=letter
KERNELDOC = $(srctree)/scripts/kernel-doc
KERNELDOC_CONF = -D kerneldoc_srctree=$(srctree) -D kerneldoc_bin=$(KERNELDOC)
ALLSPHINXOPTS = $(KERNELDOC_CONF) $(PAPEROPT_$(PAPER)) $(SPHINXOPTS)
# the i18n builder cannot share the environment and doctrees with the others
I18NSPHINXOPTS = $(PAPEROPT_$(PAPER)) $(SPHINXOPTS) .
# commands; the 'cmd' from scripts/Kbuild.include is not *loopable*
loop_cmd = $(echo-cmd) $(cmd_$(1)) || exit;
# $2 sphinx builder e.g. "html"
# $3 name of the build subfolder / e.g. "media", used as:
# * dest folder relative to $(BUILDDIR) and
# * cache folder relative to $(BUILDDIR)/.doctrees
# $4 dest subfolder e.g. "man" for man pages at media/man
# $5 reST source folder relative to $(srctree)/$(src),
# e.g. "media" for the linux-tv book-set at ./Documentation/media
quiet_cmd_sphinx = SPHINX $@ --> file://$(abspath $(BUILDDIR)/$3/$4)
cmd_sphinx = $(MAKE) BUILDDIR=$(abspath $(BUILDDIR)) $(build)=Documentation/media $2 && \
PYTHONDONTWRITEBYTECODE=1 \
BUILDDIR=$(abspath $(BUILDDIR)) SPHINX_CONF=$(abspath $(srctree)/$(src)/$5/$(SPHINX_CONF)) \
$(SPHINXBUILD) \
-b $2 \
-c $(abspath $(srctree)/$(src)) \
-d $(abspath $(BUILDDIR)/.doctrees/$3) \
-D version=$(KERNELVERSION) -D release=$(KERNELRELEASE) \
$(ALLSPHINXOPTS) \
$(abspath $(srctree)/$(src)/$5) \
$(abspath $(BUILDDIR)/$3/$4)
htmldocs:
@+$(foreach var,$(SPHINXDIRS),$(call loop_cmd,sphinx,html,$(var),,$(var)))
linkcheckdocs:
@$(foreach var,$(SPHINXDIRS),$(call loop_cmd,sphinx,linkcheck,$(var),,$(var)))
latexdocs:
@+$(foreach var,$(SPHINXDIRS),$(call loop_cmd,sphinx,latex,$(var),latex,$(var)))
ifeq ($(HAVE_PDFLATEX),0)
pdfdocs:
$(warning The '$(PDFLATEX)' command was not found. Make sure you have it installed and in PATH to produce PDF output.)
@echo " SKIP Sphinx $@ target."
else # HAVE_PDFLATEX
pdfdocs: latexdocs
$(foreach var,$(SPHINXDIRS), $(MAKE) PDFLATEX=$(PDFLATEX) LATEXOPTS="$(LATEXOPTS)" -C $(BUILDDIR)/$(var)/latex || exit;)
endif # HAVE_PDFLATEX
epubdocs:
@+$(foreach var,$(SPHINXDIRS),$(call loop_cmd,sphinx,epub,$(var),epub,$(var)))
xmldocs:
@+$(foreach var,$(SPHINXDIRS),$(call loop_cmd,sphinx,xml,$(var),xml,$(var)))
endif # HAVE_SPHINX
# The following targets are independent of HAVE_SPHINX, and the rules should
# work or silently pass without Sphinx.
# no-ops for the Sphinx toolchain
sgmldocs:
@:
psdocs:
@:
mandocs:
@:
installmandocs:
@:
cleandocs:
$(Q)rm -rf $(BUILDDIR)
$(Q)$(MAKE) BUILDDIR=$(abspath $(BUILDDIR)) $(build)=Documentation/media clean
dochelp:
@echo ' Linux kernel internal documentation in different formats (Sphinx):'
@echo ' htmldocs - HTML'
@echo ' latexdocs - LaTeX'
@echo ' pdfdocs - PDF'
@echo ' epubdocs - EPUB'
@echo ' xmldocs - XML'
@echo ' linkcheckdocs - check for broken external links (will connect to external hosts)'
@echo ' cleandocs - clean all generated files'
@echo
@echo ' make SPHINXDIRS="s1 s2" [target] Generate only docs of folder s1, s2'
@echo ' valid values for SPHINXDIRS are: $(_SPHINXDIRS)'
@echo
@echo ' make SPHINX_CONF={conf-file} [target] use *additional* sphinx-build'
@echo ' configuration. This is e.g. useful to build with nit-picking config.'

2
Documentation/PCI/MSI-HOWTO.txt
View File

@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ must disable interrupts while the lock is held. If the device sends
a different interrupt, the driver will deadlock trying to recursively
acquire the spinlock. Such deadlocks can be avoided by using
spin_lock_irqsave() or spin_lock_irq() which disable local interrupts
and acquire the lock (see Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking).
and acquire the lock (see Documentation/kernel-hacking/locking.rst).
4.5 How to tell whether MSI/MSI-X is enabled on a device

65
Documentation/SAK.txt
View File

@ -1,5 +1,9 @@
Linux 2.4.2 Secure Attention Key (SAK) handling
18 March 2001, Andrew Morton
=========================================
Linux Secure Attention Key (SAK) handling
=========================================
:Date: 18 March 2001
:Author: Andrew Morton
An operating system's Secure Attention Key is a security tool which is
provided as protection against trojan password capturing programs. It
@ -13,7 +17,7 @@ this sequence. It is only available if the kernel was compiled with
sysrq support.
The proper way of generating a SAK is to define the key sequence using
`loadkeys'. This will work whether or not sysrq support is compiled
``loadkeys``. This will work whether or not sysrq support is compiled
into the kernel.
SAK works correctly when the keyboard is in raw mode. This means that
@ -25,64 +29,63 @@ What key sequence should you use? Well, CTRL-ALT-DEL is used to reboot
the machine. CTRL-ALT-BACKSPACE is magical to the X server. We'll
choose CTRL-ALT-PAUSE.
In your rc.sysinit (or rc.local) file, add the command
In your rc.sysinit (or rc.local) file, add the command::
echo "control alt keycode 101 = SAK" | /bin/loadkeys
And that's it! Only the superuser may reprogram the SAK key.
NOTES
=====
.. note::
1: Linux SAK is said to be not a "true SAK" as is required by
systems which implement C2 level security. This author does not
know why.
1. Linux SAK is said to be not a "true SAK" as is required by
systems which implement C2 level security. This author does not
know why.
2: On the PC keyboard, SAK kills all applications which have
/dev/console opened.
2. On the PC keyboard, SAK kills all applications which have
/dev/console opened.
Unfortunately this includes a number of things which you don't
actually want killed. This is because these applications are
incorrectly holding /dev/console open. Be sure to complain to your
Linux distributor about this!
Unfortunately this includes a number of things which you don't
actually want killed. This is because these applications are
incorrectly holding /dev/console open. Be sure to complain to your
Linux distributor about this!
You can identify processes which will be killed by SAK with the
command
You can identify processes which will be killed by SAK with the
command::
# ls -l /proc/[0-9]*/fd/* | grep console
l-wx------ 1 root root 64 Mar 18 00:46 /proc/579/fd/0 -> /dev/console
Then:
Then::
# ps aux|grep 579
root 579 0.0 0.1 1088 436 ? S 00:43 0:00 gpm -t ps/2
So `gpm' will be killed by SAK. This is a bug in gpm. It should
be closing standard input. You can work around this by finding the
initscript which launches gpm and changing it thusly:
So ``gpm`` will be killed by SAK. This is a bug in gpm. It should
be closing standard input. You can work around this by finding the
initscript which launches gpm and changing it thusly:
Old:
Old::
daemon gpm
New:
New::
daemon gpm < /dev/null
Vixie cron also seems to have this problem, and needs the same treatment.
Vixie cron also seems to have this problem, and needs the same treatment.
Also, one prominent Linux distribution has the following three
lines in its rc.sysinit and rc scripts:
Also, one prominent Linux distribution has the following three
lines in its rc.sysinit and rc scripts::
exec 3<&0
exec 4>&1
exec 5>&2
These commands cause *all* daemons which are launched by the
initscripts to have file descriptors 3, 4 and 5 attached to
/dev/console. So SAK kills them all. A workaround is to simply
delete these lines, but this may cause system management
applications to malfunction - test everything well.
These commands cause **all** daemons which are launched by the
initscripts to have file descriptors 3, 4 and 5 attached to
/dev/console. So SAK kills them all. A workaround is to simply
delete these lines, but this may cause system management
applications to malfunction - test everything well.

9
Documentation/SM501.txt
View File

@ -1,7 +1,10 @@
SM501 Driver
============
.. include:: <isonum.txt>
Copyright 2006, 2007 Simtec Electronics
============
SM501 Driver
============
:Copyright: |copy| 2006, 2007 Simtec Electronics
The Silicon Motion SM501 multimedia companion chip is a multifunction device
which may provide numerous interfaces including USB host controller USB gadget,

65
Documentation/acpi/gpio-properties.txt
View File

@ -156,3 +156,68 @@ pointed to by its first argument. That should be done in the driver's .probe()
routine. On removal, the driver should unregister its GPIO mapping table by
calling acpi_dev_remove_driver_gpios() on the ACPI device object where that
table was previously registered.
Using the _CRS fallback
-----------------------
If a device does not have _DSD or the driver does not create ACPI GPIO
mapping, the Linux GPIO framework refuses to return any GPIOs. This is
because the driver does not know what it actually gets. For example if we
have a device like below:
Device (BTH)
{
Name (_HID, ...)
Name (_CRS, ResourceTemplate () {
GpioIo (Exclusive, PullNone, 0, 0, IoRestrictionNone,
"\\_SB.GPO0", 0, ResourceConsumer) {15}
GpioIo (Exclusive, PullNone, 0, 0, IoRestrictionNone,
"\\_SB.GPO0", 0, ResourceConsumer) {27}
})
}
The driver might expect to get the right GPIO when it does:
desc = gpiod_get(dev, "reset", GPIOD_OUT_LOW);
but since there is no way to know the mapping between "reset" and
the GpioIo() in _CRS desc will hold ERR_PTR(-ENOENT).
The driver author can solve this by passing the mapping explictly
(the recommended way and documented in the above chapter).
The ACPI GPIO mapping tables should not contaminate drivers that are not
knowing about which exact device they are servicing on. It implies that
the ACPI GPIO mapping tables are hardly linked to ACPI ID and certain
objects, as listed in the above chapter, of the device in question.
Getting GPIO descriptor
-----------------------
There are two main approaches to get GPIO resource from ACPI:
desc = gpiod_get(dev, connection_id, flags);
desc = gpiod_get_index(dev, connection_id, index, flags);
We may consider two different cases here, i.e. when connection ID is
provided and otherwise.
Case 1:
desc = gpiod_get(dev, "non-null-connection-id", flags);
desc = gpiod_get_index(dev, "non-null-connection-id", index, flags);
Case 2:
desc = gpiod_get(dev, NULL, flags);
desc = gpiod_get_index(dev, NULL, index, flags);
Case 1 assumes that corresponding ACPI device description must have
defined device properties and will prevent to getting any GPIO resources
otherwise.
Case 2 explicitly tells GPIO core to look for resources in _CRS.
Be aware that gpiod_get_index() in cases 1 and 2, assuming that there
are two versions of ACPI device description provided and no mapping is
present in the driver, will return different resources. That's why a
certain driver has to handle them carefully as explained in previous
chapter.

12
Documentation/security/LoadPin.txt → Documentation/admin-guide/LSM/LoadPin.rst
View File

@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
=======
LoadPin
=======
LoadPin is a Linux Security Module that ensures all kernel-loaded files
(modules, firmware, etc) all originate from the same filesystem, with
the expectation that such a filesystem is backed by a read-only device
@ -5,13 +9,13 @@ such as dm-verity or CDROM. This allows systems that have a verified
and/or unchangeable filesystem to enforce module and firmware loading
restrictions without needing to sign the files individually.
The LSM is selectable at build-time with CONFIG_SECURITY_LOADPIN, and
The LSM is selectable at build-time with ``CONFIG_SECURITY_LOADPIN``, and
can be controlled at boot-time with the kernel command line option
"loadpin.enabled". By default, it is enabled, but can be disabled at
boot ("loadpin.enabled=0").
"``loadpin.enabled``". By default, it is enabled, but can be disabled at
boot ("``loadpin.enabled=0``").
LoadPin starts pinning when it sees the first file loaded. If the
block device backing the filesystem is not read-only, a sysctl is
created to toggle pinning: /proc/sys/kernel/loadpin/enabled. (Having
created to toggle pinning: ``/proc/sys/kernel/loadpin/enabled``. (Having
a mutable filesystem means pinning is mutable too, but having the
sysctl allows for easy testing on systems with a mutable filesystem.)

18
Documentation/security/SELinux.txt → Documentation/admin-guide/LSM/SELinux.rst
View File

@ -1,27 +1,33 @@
=======
SELinux
=======
If you want to use SELinux, chances are you will want
to use the distro-provided policies, or install the
latest reference policy release from
http://oss.tresys.com/projects/refpolicy
However, if you want to install a dummy policy for
testing, you can do using 'mdp' provided under
testing, you can do using ``mdp`` provided under
scripts/selinux. Note that this requires the selinux
userspace to be installed - in particular you will
need checkpolicy to compile a kernel, and setfiles and
fixfiles to label the filesystem.
1. Compile the kernel with selinux enabled.
2. Type 'make' to compile mdp.
2. Type ``make`` to compile ``mdp``.
3. Make sure that you are not running with
SELinux enabled and a real policy. If
you are, reboot with selinux disabled
before continuing.
4. Run install_policy.sh:
4. Run install_policy.sh::
cd scripts/selinux
sh install_policy.sh
Step 4 will create a new dummy policy valid for your
kernel, with a single selinux user, role, and type.
It will compile the policy, will set your SELINUXTYPE to
dummy in /etc/selinux/config, install the compiled policy
as 'dummy', and relabel your filesystem.
It will compile the policy, will set your ``SELINUXTYPE`` to
``dummy`` in ``/etc/selinux/config``, install the compiled policy
as ``dummy``, and relabel your filesystem.

273
Documentation/security/Smack.txt → Documentation/admin-guide/LSM/Smack.rst
View File

@ -1,3 +1,6 @@
=====
Smack
=====
"Good for you, you've decided to clean the elevator!"
@ -14,6 +17,7 @@ available to determine which is best suited to the problem
at hand.
Smack consists of three major components:
- The kernel
- Basic utilities, which are helpful but not required
- Configuration data
@ -39,16 +43,24 @@ The current git repository for Smack user space is:
This should make and install on most modern distributions.
There are five commands included in smackutil:
chsmack - display or set Smack extended attribute values
smackctl - load the Smack access rules
smackaccess - report if a process with one label has access
to an object with another
chsmack:
display or set Smack extended attribute values
smackctl:
load the Smack access rules
smackaccess:
report if a process with one label has access
to an object with another
These two commands are obsolete with the introduction of
the smackfs/load2 and smackfs/cipso2 interfaces.
smackload - properly formats data for writing to smackfs/load
smackcipso - properly formats data for writing to smackfs/cipso
smackload:
properly formats data for writing to smackfs/load
smackcipso:
properly formats data for writing to smackfs/cipso
In keeping with the intent of Smack, configuration data is
minimal and not strictly required. The most important
@ -56,15 +68,15 @@ configuration step is mounting the smackfs pseudo filesystem.
If smackutil is installed the startup script will take care
of this, but it can be manually as well.
Add this line to /etc/fstab:
Add this line to ``/etc/fstab``::
smackfs /sys/fs/smackfs smackfs defaults 0 0
The /sys/fs/smackfs directory is created by the kernel.
The ``/sys/fs/smackfs`` directory is created by the kernel.
Smack uses extended attributes (xattrs) to store labels on filesystem
objects. The attributes are stored in the extended attribute security
name space. A process must have CAP_MAC_ADMIN to change any of these
name space. A process must have ``CAP_MAC_ADMIN`` to change any of these
attributes.
The extended attributes that Smack uses are:
@ -73,14 +85,17 @@ SMACK64
Used to make access control decisions. In almost all cases
the label given to a new filesystem object will be the label
of the process that created it.
SMACK64EXEC
The Smack label of a process that execs a program file with
this attribute set will run with this attribute's value.
SMACK64MMAP
Don't allow the file to be mmapped by a process whose Smack
label does not allow all of the access permitted to a process
with the label contained in this attribute. This is a very
specific use case for shared libraries.
SMACK64TRANSMUTE
Can only have the value "TRUE". If this attribute is present
on a directory when an object is created in the directory and
@ -89,27 +104,29 @@ SMACK64TRANSMUTE
gets the label of the directory instead of the label of the
creating process. If the object being created is a directory
the SMACK64TRANSMUTE attribute is set as well.
SMACK64IPIN
This attribute is only available on file descriptors for sockets.
Use the Smack label in this attribute for access control
decisions on packets being delivered to this socket.
SMACK64IPOUT
This attribute is only available on file descriptors for sockets.
Use the Smack label in this attribute for access control
decisions on packets coming from this socket.
There are multiple ways to set a Smack label on a file:
There are multiple ways to set a Smack label on a file::
# attr -S -s SMACK64 -V "value" path
# chsmack -a value path
A process can see the Smack label it is running with by
reading /proc/self/attr/current. A process with CAP_MAC_ADMIN
reading ``/proc/self/attr/current``. A process with ``CAP_MAC_ADMIN``
can set the process Smack by writing there.
Most Smack configuration is accomplished by writing to files
in the smackfs filesystem. This pseudo-filesystem is mounted
on /sys/fs/smackfs.
on ``/sys/fs/smackfs``.
access
Provided for backward compatibility. The access2 interface
@ -120,6 +137,7 @@ access
this file. The next read will indicate whether the access
would be permitted. The text will be either "1" indicating
access, or "0" indicating denial.
access2
This interface reports whether a subject with the specified
Smack label has a particular access to an object with a
@ -127,13 +145,17 @@ access2
this file. The next read will indicate whether the access
would be permitted. The text will be either "1" indicating
access, or "0" indicating denial.
ambient
This contains the Smack label applied to unlabeled network
packets.
change-rule
This interface allows modification of existing access control rules.
The format accepted on write is:
The format accepted on write is::
"%s %s %s %s"
where the first string is the subject label, the second the
object label, the third the access to allow and the fourth the
access to deny. The access strings may contain only the characters
@ -141,47 +163,63 @@ change-rule
modified by enabling the permissions in the third string and disabling
those in the fourth string. If there is no such rule it will be
created using the access specified in the third and the fourth strings.
cipso
Provided for backward compatibility. The cipso2 interface
is preferred and should be used instead.
This interface allows a specific CIPSO header to be assigned
to a Smack label. The format accepted on write is:
to a Smack label. The format accepted on write is::
"%24s%4d%4d"["%4d"]...
The first string is a fixed Smack label. The first number is
the level to use. The second number is the number of categories.
The following numbers are the categories.
"level-3-cats-5-19 3 2 5 19"
The following numbers are the categories::
"level-3-cats-5-19 3 2 5 19"
cipso2
This interface allows a specific CIPSO header to be assigned
to a Smack label. The format accepted on write is:
"%s%4d%4d"["%4d"]...
to a Smack label. The format accepted on write is::
"%s%4d%4d"["%4d"]...
The first string is a long Smack label. The first number is
the level to use. The second number is the number of categories.
The following numbers are the categories.
"level-3-cats-5-19 3 2 5 19"
The following numbers are the categories::
"level-3-cats-5-19 3 2 5 19"
direct
This contains the CIPSO level used for Smack direct label
representation in network packets.
doi
This contains the CIPSO domain of interpretation used in
network packets.
ipv6host
This interface allows specific IPv6 internet addresses to be
treated as single label hosts. Packets are sent to single
label hosts only from processes that have Smack write access
to the host label. All packets received from single label hosts
are given the specified label. The format accepted on write is:
are given the specified label. The format accepted on write is::
"%h:%h:%h:%h:%h:%h:%h:%h label" or
"%h:%h:%h:%h:%h:%h:%h:%h/%d label".
The "::" address shortcut is not supported.
If label is "-DELETE" a matched entry will be deleted.
load
Provided for backward compatibility. The load2 interface
is preferred and should be used instead.
This interface allows access control rules in addition to
the system defined rules to be specified. The format accepted
on write is:
on write is::
"%24s%24s%5s"
where the first string is the subject label, the second the
object label, and the third the requested access. The access
string may contain only the characters "rwxat-", and specifies
@ -189,17 +227,21 @@ load
permissions that are not allowed. The string "r-x--" would
specify read and execute access. Labels are limited to 23
characters in length.
load2
This interface allows access control rules in addition to
the system defined rules to be specified. The format accepted
on write is:
on write is::
"%s %s %s"
where the first string is the subject label, the second the
object label, and the third the requested access. The access
string may contain only the characters "rwxat-", and specifies
which sort of access is allowed. The "-" is a placeholder for
permissions that are not allowed. The string "r-x--" would
specify read and execute access.
load-self
Provided for backward compatibility. The load-self2 interface
is preferred and should be used instead.
@ -208,66 +250,83 @@ load-self
otherwise be permitted, and are intended to provide additional
restrictions on the process. The format is the same as for
the load interface.
load-self2
This interface allows process specific access rules to be
defined. These rules are only consulted if access would
otherwise be permitted, and are intended to provide additional
restrictions on the process. The format is the same as for
the load2 interface.
logging
This contains the Smack logging state.
mapped
This contains the CIPSO level used for Smack mapped label
representation in network packets.
netlabel
This interface allows specific internet addresses to be
treated as single label hosts. Packets are sent to single
label hosts without CIPSO headers, but only from processes
that have Smack write access to the host label. All packets
received from single label hosts are given the specified
label. The format accepted on write is:
label. The format accepted on write is::
"%d.%d.%d.%d label" or "%d.%d.%d.%d/%d label".
If the label specified is "-CIPSO" the address is treated
as a host that supports CIPSO headers.
onlycap
This contains labels processes must have for CAP_MAC_ADMIN
and CAP_MAC_OVERRIDE to be effective. If this file is empty
and ``CAP_MAC_OVERRIDE`` to be effective. If this file is empty
these capabilities are effective at for processes with any
label. The values are set by writing the desired labels, separated
by spaces, to the file or cleared by writing "-" to the file.
ptrace
This is used to define the current ptrace policy
0 - default: this is the policy that relies on Smack access rules.
For the PTRACE_READ a subject needs to have a read access on
object. For the PTRACE_ATTACH a read-write access is required.
1 - exact: this is the policy that limits PTRACE_ATTACH. Attach is
0 - default:
this is the policy that relies on Smack access rules.
For the ``PTRACE_READ`` a subject needs to have a read access on
object. For the ``PTRACE_ATTACH`` a read-write access is required.
1 - exact:
this is the policy that limits ``PTRACE_ATTACH``. Attach is
only allowed when subject's and object's labels are equal.
PTRACE_READ is not affected. Can be overridden with CAP_SYS_PTRACE.
2 - draconian: this policy behaves like the 'exact' above with an
exception that it can't be overridden with CAP_SYS_PTRACE.
``PTRACE_READ`` is not affected. Can be overridden with ``CAP_SYS_PTRACE``.
2 - draconian:
this policy behaves like the 'exact' above with an
exception that it can't be overridden with ``CAP_SYS_PTRACE``.
revoke-subject
Writing a Smack label here sets the access to '-' for all access
rules with that subject label.
unconfined
If the kernel is configured with CONFIG_SECURITY_SMACK_BRINGUP
a process with CAP_MAC_ADMIN can write a label into this interface.
If the kernel is configured with ``CONFIG_SECURITY_SMACK_BRINGUP``
a process with ``CAP_MAC_ADMIN`` can write a label into this interface.
Thereafter, accesses that involve that label will be logged and
the access permitted if it wouldn't be otherwise. Note that this
is dangerous and can ruin the proper labeling of your system.
It should never be used in production.
relabel-self
This interface contains a list of labels to which the process can
transition to, by writing to /proc/self/attr/current.
transition to, by writing to ``/proc/self/attr/current``.
Normally a process can change its own label to any legal value, but only
if it has CAP_MAC_ADMIN. This interface allows a process without
CAP_MAC_ADMIN to relabel itself to one of labels from predefined list.
A process without CAP_MAC_ADMIN can change its label only once. When it
if it has ``CAP_MAC_ADMIN``. This interface allows a process without
``CAP_MAC_ADMIN`` to relabel itself to one of labels from predefined list.
A process without ``CAP_MAC_ADMIN`` can change its label only once. When it
does, this list will be cleared.
The values are set by writing the desired labels, separated
by spaces, to the file or cleared by writing "-" to the file.
If you are using the smackload utility
you can add access rules in /etc/smack/accesses. They take the form:
you can add access rules in ``/etc/smack/accesses``. They take the form::
subjectlabel objectlabel access
@ -277,14 +336,14 @@ object with objectlabel. If there is no rule no access is allowed.
Look for additional programs on http://schaufler-ca.com
From the Smack Whitepaper:
The Simplified Mandatory Access Control Kernel
The Simplified Mandatory Access Control Kernel (Whitepaper)
===========================================================
Casey Schaufler
casey@schaufler-ca.com
Mandatory Access Control
------------------------
Computer systems employ a variety of schemes to constrain how information is
shared among the people and services using the machine. Some of these schemes
@ -297,6 +356,7 @@ access control mechanisms because you don't have a choice regarding the users
or programs that have access to pieces of data.
Bell & LaPadula
---------------
From the middle of the 1980's until the turn of the century Mandatory Access
Control (MAC) was very closely associated with the Bell & LaPadula security
@ -306,6 +366,7 @@ within the Capital Beltway and Scandinavian supercomputer centers but was
often sited as failing to address general needs.
Domain Type Enforcement
-----------------------
Around the turn of the century Domain Type Enforcement (DTE) became popular.
This scheme organizes users, programs, and data into domains that are
@ -316,6 +377,7 @@ necessary to provide a secure domain mapping leads to the scheme being
disabled or used in limited ways in the majority of cases.
Smack
-----
Smack is a Mandatory Access Control mechanism designed to provide useful MAC
while avoiding the pitfalls of its predecessors. The limitations of Bell &
@ -326,46 +388,55 @@ Enforcement and avoided by defining access controls in terms of the access
modes already in use.
Smack Terminology
-----------------
The jargon used to talk about Smack will be familiar to those who have dealt
with other MAC systems and shouldn't be too difficult for the uninitiated to
pick up. There are four terms that are used in a specific way and that are
especially important:
Subject: A subject is an active entity on the computer system.
Subject:
A subject is an active entity on the computer system.
On Smack a subject is a task, which is in turn the basic unit
of execution.
Object: An object is a passive entity on the computer system.
Object:
An object is a passive entity on the computer system.
On Smack files of all types, IPC, and tasks can be objects.
Access: Any attempt by a subject to put information into or get
Access:
Any attempt by a subject to put information into or get
information from an object is an access.
Label: Data that identifies the Mandatory Access Control
Label:
Data that identifies the Mandatory Access Control
characteristics of a subject or an object.
These definitions are consistent with the traditional use in the security
community. There are also some terms from Linux that are likely to crop up:
Capability: A task that possesses a capability has permission to
Capability:
A task that possesses a capability has permission to
violate an aspect of the system security policy, as identified by
the specific capability. A task that possesses one or more
capabilities is a privileged task, whereas a task with no
capabilities is an unprivileged task.
Privilege: A task that is allowed to violate the system security
Privilege:
A task that is allowed to violate the system security
policy is said to have privilege. As of this writing a task can
have privilege either by possessing capabilities or by having an
effective user of root.
Smack Basics
------------
Smack is an extension to a Linux system. It enforces additional restrictions
on what subjects can access which objects, based on the labels attached to
each of the subject and the object.
Labels
~~~~~~
Smack labels are ASCII character strings. They can be up to 255 characters
long, but keeping them to twenty-three characters is recommended.
@ -377,7 +448,7 @@ contain unprintable characters, the "/" (slash), the "\" (backslash), the "'"
(quote) and '"' (double-quote) characters.
Smack labels cannot begin with a '-'. This is reserved for special options.
There are some predefined labels:
There are some predefined labels::
_ Pronounced "floor", a single underscore character.
^ Pronounced "hat", a single circumflex character.
@ -390,14 +461,18 @@ of a process will usually be assigned by the system initialization
mechanism.
Access Rules
~~~~~~~~~~~~
Smack uses the traditional access modes of Linux. These modes are read,
execute, write, and occasionally append. There are a few cases where the
access mode may not be obvious. These include:
Signals: A signal is a write operation from the subject task to
Signals:
A signal is a write operation from the subject task to
the object task.
Internet Domain IPC: Transmission of a packet is considered a
Internet Domain IPC:
Transmission of a packet is considered a
write operation from the source task to the destination task.
Smack restricts access based on the label attached to a subject and the label
@ -417,6 +492,7 @@ order:
7. Any other access is denied.
Smack Access Rules
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
With the isolation provided by Smack access separation is simple. There are
many interesting cases where limited access by subjects to objects with
@ -427,8 +503,9 @@ be "born" highly classified. To accommodate such schemes Smack includes a
mechanism for specifying rules allowing access between labels.
Access Rule Format
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The format of an access rule is:
The format of an access rule is::
subject-label object-label access
@ -446,7 +523,7 @@ describe access modes:
Uppercase values for the specification letters are allowed as well.
Access mode specifications can be in any order. Examples of acceptable rules
are:
are::
TopSecret Secret rx
Secret Unclass R
@ -456,7 +533,7 @@ are:
New Old rRrRr
Closed Off -
Examples of unacceptable rules are:
Examples of unacceptable rules are::
Top Secret Secret rx
Ace Ace r
@ -469,6 +546,7 @@ access specifications. The dash is a placeholder, so "a-r" is the same
as "ar". A lone dash is used to specify that no access should be allowed.
Applying Access Rules
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The developers of Linux rarely define new sorts of things, usually importing
schemes and concepts from other systems. Most often, the other systems are
@ -511,6 +589,7 @@ one process to another requires that the sender have write access to the
receiver. The receiver is not required to have read access to the sender.
Setting Access Rules
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The configuration file /etc/smack/accesses contains the rules to be set at
system startup. The contents are written to the special file
@ -520,6 +599,7 @@ one rule, with the most recently specified overriding any earlier
specification.
Task Attribute
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The Smack label of a process can be read from /proc/<pid>/attr/current. A
process can read its own Smack label from /proc/self/attr/current. A
@ -527,12 +607,14 @@ privileged process can change its own Smack label by writing to
/proc/self/attr/current but not the label of another process.
File Attribute
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The Smack label of a filesystem object is stored as an extended attribute
named SMACK64 on the file. This attribute is in the security namespace. It can
only be changed by a process with privilege.
Privilege
~~~~~~~~~
A process with CAP_MAC_OVERRIDE or CAP_MAC_ADMIN is privileged.
CAP_MAC_OVERRIDE allows the process access to objects it would
@ -540,6 +622,7 @@ be denied otherwise. CAP_MAC_ADMIN allows a process to change
Smack data, including rules and attributes.
Smack Networking
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
As mentioned before, Smack enforces access control on network protocol
transmissions. Every packet sent by a Smack process is tagged with its Smack
@ -551,6 +634,7 @@ packet has write access to the receiving process and if that is not the case
the packet is dropped.
CIPSO Configuration
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
It is normally unnecessary to specify the CIPSO configuration. The default
values used by the system handle all internal cases. Smack will compose CIPSO
@ -571,13 +655,13 @@ discarded. The DOI is 3 by default. The value can be read from
The label and category set are mapped to a Smack label as defined in
/etc/smack/cipso.
A Smack/CIPSO mapping has the form:
A Smack/CIPSO mapping has the form::
smack level [category [category]*]
Smack does not expect the level or category sets to be related in any
particular way and does not assume or assign accesses based on them. Some
examples of mappings:
examples of mappings::
TopSecret 7
TS:A,B 7 1 2
@ -597,25 +681,30 @@ value can be read from /sys/fs/smackfs/direct and changed by writing to
/sys/fs/smackfs/direct.
Socket Attributes
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
There are two attributes that are associated with sockets. These attributes
can only be set by privileged tasks, but any task can read them for their own
sockets.
SMACK64IPIN: The Smack label of the task object. A privileged
SMACK64IPIN:
The Smack label of the task object. A privileged
program that will enforce policy may set this to the star label.
SMACK64IPOUT: The Smack label transmitted with outgoing packets.
SMACK64IPOUT:
The Smack label transmitted with outgoing packets.
A privileged program may set this to match the label of another
task with which it hopes to communicate.
Smack Netlabel Exceptions
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
You will often find that your labeled application has to talk to the outside,
unlabeled world. To do this there's a special file /sys/fs/smackfs/netlabel
where you can add some exceptions in the form of :
@IP1 LABEL1 or
@IP2/MASK LABEL2
where you can add some exceptions in the form of::
@IP1 LABEL1 or
@IP2/MASK LABEL2
It means that your application will have unlabeled access to @IP1 if it has
write access on LABEL1, and access to the subnet @IP2/MASK if it has write
@ -624,28 +713,32 @@ access on LABEL2.
Entries in the /sys/fs/smackfs/netlabel file are matched by longest mask
first, like in classless IPv4 routing.
A special label '@' and an option '-CIPSO' can be used there :
@ means Internet, any application with any label has access to it
-CIPSO means standard CIPSO networking
A special label '@' and an option '-CIPSO' can be used there::
If you don't know what CIPSO is and don't plan to use it, you can just do :
echo 127.0.0.1 -CIPSO > /sys/fs/smackfs/netlabel
echo 0.0.0.0/0 @ > /sys/fs/smackfs/netlabel
@ means Internet, any application with any label has access to it
-CIPSO means standard CIPSO networking
If you don't know what CIPSO is and don't plan to use it, you can just do::
echo 127.0.0.1 -CIPSO > /sys/fs/smackfs/netlabel
echo 0.0.0.0/0 @ > /sys/fs/smackfs/netlabel
If you use CIPSO on your 192.168.0.0/16 local network and need also unlabeled
Internet access, you can have :
echo 127.0.0.1 -CIPSO > /sys/fs/smackfs/netlabel
echo 192.168.0.0/16 -CIPSO > /sys/fs/smackfs/netlabel
echo 0.0.0.0/0 @ > /sys/fs/smackfs/netlabel
Internet access, you can have::
echo 127.0.0.1 -CIPSO > /sys/fs/smackfs/netlabel
echo 192.168.0.0/16 -CIPSO > /sys/fs/smackfs/netlabel
echo 0.0.0.0/0 @ > /sys/fs/smackfs/netlabel
Writing Applications for Smack
------------------------------
There are three sorts of applications that will run on a Smack system. How an
application interacts with Smack will determine what it will have to do to
work properly under Smack.
Smack Ignorant Applications
---------------------------
By far the majority of applications have no reason whatever to care about the
unique properties of Smack. Since invoking a program has no impact on the
@ -653,12 +746,14 @@ Smack label associated with the process the only concern likely to arise is
whether the process has execute access to the program.
Smack Relevant Applications
---------------------------
Some programs can be improved by teaching them about Smack, but do not make
any security decisions themselves. The utility ls(1) is one example of such a
program.
Smack Enforcing Applications
----------------------------
These are special programs that not only know about Smack, but participate in
the enforcement of system policy. In most cases these are the programs that
@ -666,15 +761,16 @@ set up user sessions. There are also network services that provide information
to processes running with various labels.
File System Interfaces
----------------------
Smack maintains labels on file system objects using extended attributes. The
Smack label of a file, directory, or other file system object can be obtained
using getxattr(2).
using getxattr(2)::
len = getxattr("/", "security.SMACK64", value, sizeof (value));
will put the Smack label of the root directory into value. A privileged
process can set the Smack label of a file system object with setxattr(2).
process can set the Smack label of a file system object with setxattr(2)::
len = strlen("Rubble");
rc = setxattr("/foo", "security.SMACK64", "Rubble", len, 0);
@ -683,17 +779,18 @@ will set the Smack label of /foo to "Rubble" if the program has appropriate
privilege.
Socket Interfaces
-----------------
The socket attributes can be read using fgetxattr(2).
A privileged process can set the Smack label of outgoing packets with
fsetxattr(2).
fsetxattr(2)::
len = strlen("Rubble");
rc = fsetxattr(fd, "security.SMACK64IPOUT", "Rubble", len, 0);
will set the Smack label "Rubble" on packets going out from the socket if the
program has appropriate privilege.
program has appropriate privilege::
rc = fsetxattr(fd, "security.SMACK64IPIN, "*", strlen("*"), 0);
@ -701,33 +798,40 @@ will set the Smack label "*" as the object label against which incoming
packets will be checked if the program has appropriate privilege.
Administration
--------------
Smack supports some mount options:
smackfsdef=label: specifies the label to give files that lack
smackfsdef=label:
specifies the label to give files that lack
the Smack label extended attribute.
smackfsroot=label: specifies the label to assign the root of the
smackfsroot=label:
specifies the label to assign the root of the
file system if it lacks the Smack extended attribute.
smackfshat=label: specifies a label that must have read access to
smackfshat=label:
specifies a label that must have read access to
all labels set on the filesystem. Not yet enforced.
smackfsfloor=label: specifies a label to which all labels set on the
smackfsfloor=label:
specifies a label to which all labels set on the
filesystem must have read access. Not yet enforced.
These mount options apply to all file system types.
Smack auditing
--------------
If you want Smack auditing of security events, you need to set CONFIG_AUDIT
in your kernel configuration.
By default, all denied events will be audited. You can change this behavior by
writing a single character to the /sys/fs/smackfs/logging file :
0 : no logging
1 : log denied (default)
2 : log accepted
3 : log denied & accepted
writing a single character to the /sys/fs/smackfs/logging file::
0 : no logging
1 : log denied (default)
2 : log accepted
3 : log denied & accepted
Events are logged as 'key=value' pairs, for each event you at least will get
the subject, the object, the rights requested, the action, the kernel function
@ -735,6 +839,7 @@ that triggered the event, plus other pairs depending on the type of event
audited.
Bringup Mode
------------
Bringup mode provides logging features that can make application
configuration and system bringup easier. Configure the kernel with

55
Documentation/security/Yama.txt → Documentation/admin-guide/LSM/Yama.rst
View File

@ -1,13 +1,14 @@
====
Yama
====
Yama is a Linux Security Module that collects system-wide DAC security
protections that are not handled by the core kernel itself. This is
selectable at build-time with CONFIG_SECURITY_YAMA, and can be controlled
at run-time through sysctls in /proc/sys/kernel/yama:
selectable at build-time with ``CONFIG_SECURITY_YAMA``, and can be controlled
at run-time through sysctls in ``/proc/sys/kernel/yama``:
- ptrace_scope
==============================================================
ptrace_scope:
ptrace_scope
============
As Linux grows in popularity, it will become a larger target for
malware. One particularly troubling weakness of the Linux process
@ -25,47 +26,49 @@ exist and remain possible if ptrace is allowed to operate as before.
Since ptrace is not commonly used by non-developers and non-admins, system
builders should be allowed the option to disable this debugging system.
For a solution, some applications use prctl(PR_SET_DUMPABLE, ...) to
For a solution, some applications use ``prctl(PR_SET_DUMPABLE, ...)`` to
specifically disallow such ptrace attachment (e.g. ssh-agent), but many
do not. A more general solution is to only allow ptrace directly from a
parent to a child process (i.e. direct "gdb EXE" and "strace EXE" still
work), or with CAP_SYS_PTRACE (i.e. "gdb --pid=PID", and "strace -p PID"
work), or with ``CAP_SYS_PTRACE`` (i.e. "gdb --pid=PID", and "strace -p PID"
still work as root).
In mode 1, software that has defined application-specific relationships
between a debugging process and its inferior (crash handlers, etc),
prctl(PR_SET_PTRACER, pid, ...) can be used. An inferior can declare which
other process (and its descendants) are allowed to call PTRACE_ATTACH
``prctl(PR_SET_PTRACER, pid, ...)`` can be used. An inferior can declare which
other process (and its descendants) are allowed to call ``PTRACE_ATTACH``
against it. Only one such declared debugging process can exists for
each inferior at a time. For example, this is used by KDE, Chromium, and
Firefox's crash handlers, and by Wine for allowing only Wine processes
to ptrace each other. If a process wishes to entirely disable these ptrace
restrictions, it can call prctl(PR_SET_PTRACER, PR_SET_PTRACER_ANY, ...)
restrictions, it can call ``prctl(PR_SET_PTRACER, PR_SET_PTRACER_ANY, ...)``
so that any otherwise allowed process (even those in external pid namespaces)
may attach.
The sysctl settings (writable only with CAP_SYS_PTRACE) are:
The sysctl settings (writable only with ``CAP_SYS_PTRACE``) are:
0 - classic ptrace permissions: a process can PTRACE_ATTACH to any other
0 - classic ptrace permissions:
a process can ``PTRACE_ATTACH`` to any other
process running under the same uid, as long as it is dumpable (i.e.
did not transition uids, start privileged, or have called
prctl(PR_SET_DUMPABLE...) already). Similarly, PTRACE_TRACEME is
``prctl(PR_SET_DUMPABLE...)`` already). Similarly, ``PTRACE_TRACEME`` is
unchanged.
1 - restricted ptrace: a process must have a predefined relationship
with the inferior it wants to call PTRACE_ATTACH on. By default,
1 - restricted ptrace:
a process must have a predefined relationship
with the inferior it wants to call ``PTRACE_ATTACH`` on. By default,
this relationship is that of only its descendants when the above
classic criteria is also met. To change the relationship, an
inferior can call prctl(PR_SET_PTRACER, debugger, ...) to declare
an allowed debugger PID to call PTRACE_ATTACH on the inferior.
Using PTRACE_TRACEME is unchanged.
inferior can call ``prctl(PR_SET_PTRACER, debugger, ...)`` to declare
an allowed debugger PID to call ``PTRACE_ATTACH`` on the inferior.
Using ``PTRACE_TRACEME`` is unchanged.
2 - admin-only attach: only processes with CAP_SYS_PTRACE may use ptrace
with PTRACE_ATTACH, or through children calling PTRACE_TRACEME.
2 - admin-only attach:
only processes with ``CAP_SYS_PTRACE`` may use ptrace
with ``PTRACE_ATTACH``, or through children calling ``PTRACE_TRACEME``.
3 - no attach: no processes may use ptrace with PTRACE_ATTACH nor via
PTRACE_TRACEME. Once set, this sysctl value cannot be changed.
3 - no attach:
no processes may use ptrace with ``PTRACE_ATTACH`` nor via
``PTRACE_TRACEME``. Once set, this sysctl value cannot be changed.
The original children-only logic was based on the restrictions in grsecurity.
==============================================================

36
Documentation/security/apparmor.txt → Documentation/admin-guide/LSM/apparmor.rst
View File

@ -1,4 +1,9 @@
--- What is AppArmor? ---
========
AppArmor
========
What is AppArmor?
=================
AppArmor is MAC style security extension for the Linux kernel. It implements
a task centered policy, with task "profiles" being created and loaded
@ -6,34 +11,41 @@ from user space. Tasks on the system that do not have a profile defined for
them run in an unconfined state which is equivalent to standard Linux DAC
permissions.
--- How to enable/disable ---
How to enable/disable
=====================
set CONFIG_SECURITY_APPARMOR=y
set ``CONFIG_SECURITY_APPARMOR=y``
If AppArmor should be selected as the default security module then
set CONFIG_DEFAULT_SECURITY="apparmor"
and CONFIG_SECURITY_APPARMOR_BOOTPARAM_VALUE=1
If AppArmor should be selected as the default security module then set::
CONFIG_DEFAULT_SECURITY="apparmor"
CONFIG_SECURITY_APPARMOR_BOOTPARAM_VALUE=1
Build the kernel
If AppArmor is not the default security module it can be enabled by passing
security=apparmor on the kernel's command line.
``security=apparmor`` on the kernel's command line.
If AppArmor is the default security module it can be disabled by passing
apparmor=0, security=XXXX (where XXX is valid security module), on the
kernel's command line
``apparmor=0, security=XXXX`` (where ``XXXX`` is valid security module), on the
kernel's command line.
For AppArmor to enforce any restrictions beyond standard Linux DAC permissions
policy must be loaded into the kernel from user space (see the Documentation
and tools links).
--- Documentation ---
Documentation
=============
Documentation can be found on the wiki.
Documentation can be found on the wiki, linked below.
--- Links ---
Links
=====
Mailing List - apparmor@lists.ubuntu.com
Wiki - http://apparmor.wiki.kernel.org/
User space tools - https://launchpad.net/apparmor
Kernel module - git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jj/apparmor-dev.git

28
Documentation/security/LSM.txt → Documentation/admin-guide/LSM/index.rst
View File

@ -1,12 +1,13 @@
Linux Security Module framework
-------------------------------
===========================
Linux Security Module Usage
===========================
The Linux Security Module (LSM) framework provides a mechanism for
various security checks to be hooked by new kernel extensions. The name
"module" is a bit of a misnomer since these extensions are not actually
loadable kernel modules. Instead, they are selectable at build-time via
CONFIG_DEFAULT_SECURITY and can be overridden at boot-time via the
"security=..." kernel command line argument, in the case where multiple
``"security=..."`` kernel command line argument, in the case where multiple
LSMs were built into a given kernel.
The primary users of the LSM interface are Mandatory Access Control
@ -19,23 +20,22 @@ in the core functionality of Linux itself.
Without a specific LSM built into the kernel, the default LSM will be the
Linux capabilities system. Most LSMs choose to extend the capabilities
system, building their checks on top of the defined capability hooks.
For more details on capabilities, see capabilities(7) in the Linux
For more details on capabilities, see ``capabilities(7)`` in the Linux
man-pages project.
A list of the active security modules can be found by reading
/sys/kernel/security/lsm. This is a comma separated list, and
``/sys/kernel/security/lsm``. This is a comma separated list, and
will always include the capability module. The list reflects the
order in which checks are made. The capability module will always
be first, followed by any "minor" modules (e.g. Yama) and then
the one "major" module (e.g. SELinux) if there is one configured.
Based on https://lkml.org/lkml/2007/10/26/215,
a new LSM is accepted into the kernel when its intent (a description of
what it tries to protect against and in what cases one would expect to
use it) has been appropriately documented in Documentation/security/.
This allows an LSM's code to be easily compared to its goals, and so
that end users and distros can make a more informed decision about which
LSMs suit their requirements.
.. toctree::
:maxdepth: 1
For extensive documentation on the available LSM hook interfaces, please
see include/linux/security.h.
apparmor
LoadPin
SELinux
Smack
tomoyo
Yama

22
Documentation/security/tomoyo.txt → Documentation/admin-guide/LSM/tomoyo.rst
View File

@ -1,21 +1,30 @@
--- What is TOMOYO? ---
======
TOMOYO
======
What is TOMOYO?
===============
TOMOYO is a name-based MAC extension (LSM module) for the Linux kernel.
LiveCD-based tutorials are available at
http://tomoyo.sourceforge.jp/1.7/1st-step/ubuntu10.04-live/
http://tomoyo.sourceforge.jp/1.7/1st-step/centos5-live/ .
http://tomoyo.sourceforge.jp/1.7/1st-step/centos5-live/
Though these tutorials use non-LSM version of TOMOYO, they are useful for you
to know what TOMOYO is.
--- How to enable TOMOYO? ---
How to enable TOMOYO?
=====================
Build the kernel with CONFIG_SECURITY_TOMOYO=y and pass "security=tomoyo" on
Build the kernel with ``CONFIG_SECURITY_TOMOYO=y`` and pass ``security=tomoyo`` on
kernel's command line.
Please see http://tomoyo.sourceforge.jp/2.3/ for details.
--- Where is documentation? ---
Where is documentation?
=======================
User <-> Kernel interface documentation is available at
http://tomoyo.sourceforge.jp/2.3/policy-reference.html .
@ -42,7 +51,8 @@ History of TOMOYO?
Realities of Mainlining
http://sourceforge.jp/projects/tomoyo/docs/lfj2008.pdf
--- What is future plan? ---
What is future plan?
====================
We believe that inode based security and name based security are complementary
and both should be used together. But unfortunately, so far, we cannot enable

6
Documentation/admin-guide/README.rst
View File

@ -55,12 +55,6 @@ Documentation
contains information about the problems, which may result by upgrading
your kernel.
- The Documentation/DocBook/ subdirectory contains several guides for
kernel developers and users. These guides can be rendered in a
number of formats: PostScript (.ps), PDF, HTML, & man-pages, among others.
After installation, ``make psdocs``, ``make pdfdocs``, ``make htmldocs``,
or ``make mandocs`` will render the documentation in the requested format.
Installing the kernel source
----------------------------

4
Documentation/admin-guide/devices.txt
View File

@ -369,8 +369,10 @@
237 = /dev/loop-control Loopback control device
238 = /dev/vhost-net Host kernel accelerator for virtio net
239 = /dev/uhid User-space I/O driver support for HID subsystem
240 = /dev/userio Serio driver testing device
241 = /dev/vhost-vsock Host kernel driver for virtio vsock
240-254 Reserved for local use
242-254 Reserved for local use
255 Reserved for MISC_DYNAMIC_MINOR
11 char Raw keyboard device (Linux/SPARC only)

2
Documentation/admin-guide/index.rst
View File

@ -61,6 +61,8 @@ configure specific aspects of kernel behavior to your liking.
java
ras
pm/index
thunderbolt
LSM/index
.. only:: subproject and html

69
Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt
View File

@ -649,6 +649,13 @@
/proc/<pid>/coredump_filter.
See also Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt.
coresight_cpu_debug.enable
[ARM,ARM64]
Format: <bool>
Enable/disable the CPU sampling based debugging.
0: default value, disable debugging
1: enable debugging at boot time
cpuidle.off=1 [CPU_IDLE]
disable the cpuidle sub-system
@ -720,7 +727,8 @@
See also Documentation/input/joystick-parport.txt
ddebug_query= [KNL,DYNAMIC_DEBUG] Enable debug messages at early boot
time. See Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt for
time. See
Documentation/admin-guide/dynamic-debug-howto.rst for
details. Deprecated, see dyndbg.
debug [KNL] Enable kernel debugging (events log level).
@ -883,7 +891,8 @@
dyndbg[="val"] [KNL,DYNAMIC_DEBUG]
module.dyndbg[="val"]
Enable debug messages at boot time. See
Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt for details.
Documentation/admin-guide/dynamic-debug-howto.rst
for details.
nompx [X86] Disables Intel Memory Protection Extensions.
See Documentation/x86/intel_mpx.txt for more
@ -954,6 +963,12 @@
must already be setup and configured. Options are not
yet supported.
owl,<addr>
Start an early, polled-mode console on a serial port
of an Actions Semi SoC, such as S500 or S900, at the
specified address. The serial port must already be
setup and configured. Options are not yet supported.
smh Use ARM semihosting calls for early console.
s3c2410,<addr>
@ -1486,12 +1501,21 @@
in crypto/hash_info.h.
ima_policy= [IMA]
The builtin measurement policy to load during IMA
setup. Specyfing "tcb" as the value, measures all
programs exec'd, files mmap'd for exec, and all files
opened with the read mode bit set by either the
effective uid (euid=0) or uid=0.
Format: "tcb"
The builtin policies to load during IMA setup.
Format: "tcb | appraise_tcb | secure_boot"
The "tcb" policy measures all programs exec'd, files
mmap'd for exec, and all files opened with the read
mode bit set by either the effective uid (euid=0) or
uid=0.
The "appraise_tcb" policy appraises the integrity of
all files owned by root. (This is the equivalent
of ima_appraise_tcb.)
The "secure_boot" policy appraises the integrity
of files (eg. kexec kernel image, kernel modules,
firmware, policy, etc) based on file signatures.
ima_tcb [IMA] Deprecated. Use ima_policy= instead.
Load a policy which meets the needs of the Trusted
@ -1838,6 +1862,18 @@
for all guests.
Default is 1 (enabled) if in 64-bit or 32-bit PAE mode.
kvm-arm.vgic_v3_group0_trap=
[KVM,ARM] Trap guest accesses to GICv3 group-0
system registers
kvm-arm.vgic_v3_group1_trap=
[KVM,ARM] Trap guest accesses to GICv3 group-1
system registers
kvm-arm.vgic_v3_common_trap=
[KVM,ARM] Trap guest accesses to GICv3 common
system registers
kvm-intel.ept= [KVM,Intel] Disable extended page tables
(virtualized MMU) support on capable Intel chips.
Default is 1 (enabled)
@ -2279,8 +2315,11 @@
that the amount of memory usable for all allocations
is not too small.
movable_node [KNL] Boot-time switch to enable the effects
of CONFIG_MOVABLE_NODE=y. See mm/Kconfig for details.
movable_node [KNL] Boot-time switch to make hotplugable memory
NUMA nodes to be movable. This means that the memory
of such nodes will be usable only for movable
allocations which rules out almost all kernel
allocations. Use with caution!
MTD_Partition= [MTD]
Format: <name>,<region-number>,<size>,<offset>
@ -3738,8 +3777,14 @@
slab_nomerge [MM]
Disable merging of slabs with similar size. May be
necessary if there is some reason to distinguish
allocs to different slabs. Debug options disable
merging on their own.
allocs to different slabs, especially in hardened
environments where the risk of heap overflows and
layout control by attackers can usually be
frustrated by disabling merging. This will reduce
most of the exposure of a heap attack to a single
cache (risks via metadata attacks are mostly
unchanged). Debug options disable merging on their
own.
For more information see Documentation/vm/slub.txt.
slab_max_order= [MM, SLAB]

12
Documentation/admin-guide/pm/cpufreq.rst
View File

@ -269,16 +269,16 @@ are the following:
``scaling_cur_freq``
Current frequency of all of the CPUs belonging to this policy (in kHz).
For the majority of scaling drivers, this is the frequency of the last
P-state requested by the driver from the hardware using the scaling
In the majority of cases, this is the frequency of the last P-state
requested by the scaling driver from the hardware using the scaling
interface provided by it, which may or may not reflect the frequency
the CPU is actually running at (due to hardware design and other
limitations).
Some scaling drivers (e.g. |intel_pstate|) attempt to provide
information more precisely reflecting the current CPU frequency through
this attribute, but that still may not be the exact current CPU
frequency as seen by the hardware at the moment.
Some architectures (e.g. ``x86``) may attempt to provide information
more precisely reflecting the current CPU frequency through this
attribute, but that still may not be the exact current CPU frequency as
seen by the hardware at the moment.
``scaling_driver``
The scaling driver currently in use.

6
Documentation/admin-guide/pm/intel_pstate.rst
View File

@ -157,10 +157,8 @@ Without HWP, this P-state selection algorithm is always the same regardless of
the processor model and platform configuration.
It selects the maximum P-state it is allowed to use, subject to limits set via
``sysfs``, every time the P-state selection computations are carried out by the
driver's utilization update callback for the given CPU (that does not happen
more often than every 10 ms), but the hardware configuration will not be changed
if the new P-state is the same as the current one.
``sysfs``, every time the driver configuration for the given CPU is updated
(e.g. via ``sysfs``).
This is the default P-state selection algorithm if the
:c:macro:`CONFIG_CPU_FREQ_DEFAULT_GOV_PERFORMANCE` kernel configuration option

10
Documentation/admin-guide/ras.rst
View File

@ -344,9 +344,9 @@ for more than 2 channels, like Fully Buffered DIMMs (FB-DIMMs) memory
controllers. The following example will assume 2 channels:
+------------+-----------------------+
| Chip | Channels |
| Select +-----------+-----------+
| rows | ``ch0`` | ``ch1`` |
| CS Rows | Channels |
+------------+-----------+-----------+
| | ``ch0`` | ``ch1`` |
+============+===========+===========+
| ``csrow0`` | DIMM_A0 | DIMM_B0 |
+------------+ | |
@ -698,7 +698,7 @@ information indicating that errors have been detected::
The structure of the message is:
+---------------------------------------+-------------+
| Content + Example |
| Content | Example |
+=======================================+=============+
| The memory controller | MC0 |
+---------------------------------------+-------------+
@ -713,7 +713,7 @@ The structure of the message is:
+---------------------------------------+-------------+
| The error syndrome | 0xb741 |
+---------------------------------------+-------------+
| Memory row | row 0 +
| Memory row | row 0 |
+---------------------------------------+-------------+
| Memory channel | channel 1 |
+---------------------------------------+-------------+

199
Documentation/admin-guide/thunderbolt.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,199 @@
=============
Thunderbolt
=============
The interface presented here is not meant for end users. Instead there
should be a userspace tool that handles all the low-level details, keeps
database of the authorized devices and prompts user for new connections.
More details about the sysfs interface for Thunderbolt devices can be
found in ``Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-thunderbolt``.
Those users who just want to connect any device without any sort of
manual work, can add following line to
``/etc/udev/rules.d/99-local.rules``::
ACTION=="add", SUBSYSTEM=="thunderbolt", ATTR{authorized}=="0", ATTR{authorized}="1"
This will authorize all devices automatically when they appear. However,
keep in mind that this bypasses the security levels and makes the system
vulnerable to DMA attacks.
Security levels and how to use them
-----------------------------------
Starting from Intel Falcon Ridge Thunderbolt controller there are 4
security levels available. The reason for these is the fact that the
connected devices can be DMA masters and thus read contents of the host
memory without CPU and OS knowing about it. There are ways to prevent
this by setting up an IOMMU but it is not always available for various
reasons.
The security levels are as follows:
none
All devices are automatically connected by the firmware. No user
approval is needed. In BIOS settings this is typically called
*Legacy mode*.
user
User is asked whether the device is allowed to be connected.
Based on the device identification information available through
``/sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices``. user then can do the decision.
In BIOS settings this is typically called *Unique ID*.
secure
User is asked whether the device is allowed to be connected. In
addition to UUID the device (if it supports secure connect) is sent
a challenge that should match the expected one based on a random key
written to ``key`` sysfs attribute. In BIOS settings this is
typically called *One time saved key*.
dponly
The firmware automatically creates tunnels for Display Port and
USB. No PCIe tunneling is done. In BIOS settings this is
typically called *Display Port Only*.
The current security level can be read from
``/sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/domainX/security`` where ``domainX`` is
the Thunderbolt domain the host controller manages. There is typically
one domain per Thunderbolt host controller.
If the security level reads as ``user`` or ``secure`` the connected
device must be authorized by the user before PCIe tunnels are created
(e.g the PCIe device appears).
Each Thunderbolt device plugged in will appear in sysfs under
``/sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices``. The device directory carries
information that can be used to identify the particular device,
including its name and UUID.
Authorizing devices when security level is ``user`` or ``secure``
-----------------------------------------------------------------
When a device is plugged in it will appear in sysfs as follows::
/sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/0-1/authorized - 0
/sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/0-1/device - 0x8004
/sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/0-1/device_name - Thunderbolt to FireWire Adapter
/sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/0-1/vendor - 0x1
/sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/0-1/vendor_name - Apple, Inc.
/sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/0-1/unique_id - e0376f00-0300-0100-ffff-ffffffffffff
The ``authorized`` attribute reads 0 which means no PCIe tunnels are
created yet. The user can authorize the device by simply::
# echo 1 > /sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/0-1/authorized
This will create the PCIe tunnels and the device is now connected.
If the device supports secure connect, and the domain security level is
set to ``secure``, it has an additional attribute ``key`` which can hold
a random 32 byte value used for authorization and challenging the device in
future connects::
/sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/0-3/authorized - 0
/sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/0-3/device - 0x305
/sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/0-3/device_name - AKiTiO Thunder3 PCIe Box
/sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/0-3/key -
/sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/0-3/vendor - 0x41
/sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/0-3/vendor_name - inXtron
/sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/0-3/unique_id - dc010000-0000-8508-a22d-32ca6421cb16
Notice the key is empty by default.
If the user does not want to use secure connect it can just ``echo 1``
to the ``authorized`` attribute and the PCIe tunnels will be created in
the same way than in ``user`` security level.
If the user wants to use secure connect, the first time the device is
plugged a key needs to be created and send to the device::
# key=$(openssl rand -hex 32)
# echo $key > /sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/0-3/key
# echo 1 > /sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/0-3/authorized
Now the device is connected (PCIe tunnels are created) and in addition
the key is stored on the device NVM.
Next time the device is plugged in the user can verify (challenge) the
device using the same key::
# echo $key > /sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/0-3/key
# echo 2 > /sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/0-3/authorized
If the challenge the device returns back matches the one we expect based
on the key, the device is connected and the PCIe tunnels are created.
However, if the challenge failed no tunnels are created and error is
returned to the user.
If the user still wants to connect the device it can either approve
the device without a key or write new key and write 1 to the
``authorized`` file to get the new key stored on the device NVM.
Upgrading NVM on Thunderbolt device or host
-------------------------------------------
Since most of the functionality is handled in a firmware running on a
host controller or a device, it is important that the firmware can be
upgraded to the latest where possible bugs in it have been fixed.
Typically OEMs provide this firmware from their support site.
There is also a central site which has links where to download firmwares
for some machines:
`Thunderbolt Updates <https://thunderbolttechnology.net/updates>`_
Before you upgrade firmware on a device or host, please make sure it is
the suitable. Failing to do that may render the device (or host) in a
state where it cannot be used properly anymore without special tools!
Host NVM upgrade on Apple Macs is not supported.
Once the NVM image has been downloaded, you need to plug in a
Thunderbolt device so that the host controller appears. It does not
matter which device is connected (unless you are upgrading NVM on a
device - then you need to connect that particular device).
Note OEM-specific method to power the controller up ("force power") may
be available for your system in which case there is no need to plug in a
Thunderbolt device.
After that we can write the firmware to the non-active parts of the NVM
of the host or device. As an example here is how Intel NUC6i7KYK (Skull
Canyon) Thunderbolt controller NVM is upgraded::
# dd if=KYK_TBT_FW_0018.bin of=/sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/0-0/nvm_non_active0/nvmem
Once the operation completes we can trigger NVM authentication and
upgrade process as follows::
# echo 1 > /sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/0-0/nvm_authenticate
If no errors are returned, the host controller shortly disappears. Once
it comes back the driver notices it and initiates a full power cycle.
After a while the host controller appears again and this time it should
be fully functional.
We can verify that the new NVM firmware is active by running following
commands::
# cat /sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/0-0/nvm_authenticate
0x0
# cat /sys/bus/thunderbolt/devices/0-0/nvm_version
18.0
If ``nvm_authenticate`` contains anything else than 0x0 it is the error
code from the last authentication cycle, which means the authentication
of the NVM image failed.
Note names of the NVMem devices ``nvm_activeN`` and ``nvm_non_activeN``
depends on the order they are registered in the NVMem subsystem. N in
the name is the identifier added by the NVMem subsystem.
Upgrading NVM when host controller is in safe mode
--------------------------------------------------
If the existing NVM is not properly authenticated (or is missing) the
host controller goes into safe mode which means that only available
functionality is flashing new NVM image. When in this mode the reading
``nvm_version`` fails with ``ENODATA`` and the device identification
information is missing.
To recover from this mode, one needs to flash a valid NVM image to the
host host controller in the same way it is done in the previous chapter.

38
Documentation/arm/Atmel/README
View File

@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ git branches/tags and email subject always contain this "at91" sub-string.
AT91 SoCs
---------
Documentation and detailled datasheet for each product are available on
Documentation and detailed datasheet for each product are available on
the Atmel website: http://www.atmel.com.
Flavors:
@ -101,6 +101,42 @@ the Atmel website: http://www.atmel.com.
+ Datasheet
http://www.atmel.com/Images/Atmel-11267-32-bit-Cortex-A5-Microcontroller-SAMA5D2_Datasheet.pdf
* ARM Cortex-M7 MCUs
- sams70 family
- sams70j19
- sams70j20
- sams70j21
- sams70n19
- sams70n20
- sams70n21
- sams70q19
- sams70q20
- sams70q21
+ Datasheet
http://www.atmel.com/Images/Atmel-11242-32-bit-Cortex-M7-Microcontroller-SAM-S70Q-SAM-S70N-SAM-S70J_Datasheet.pdf
- samv70 family
- samv70j19
- samv70j20
- samv70n19
- samv70n20
- samv70q19
- samv70q20
+ Datasheet
http://www.atmel.com/Images/Atmel-11297-32-bit-Cortex-M7-Microcontroller-SAM-V70Q-SAM-V70N-SAM-V70J_Datasheet.pdf
- samv71 family
- samv71j19
- samv71j20
- samv71j21
- samv71n19
- samv71n20
- samv71n21
- samv71q19
- samv71q20
- samv71q21
+ Datasheet
http://www.atmel.com/Images/Atmel-44003-32-bit-Cortex-M7-Microcontroller-SAM-V71Q-SAM-V71N-SAM-V71J_Datasheet.pdf
Linux kernel information
------------------------

4
Documentation/arm64/silicon-errata.txt
View File

@ -61,11 +61,15 @@ stable kernels.
| Cavium | ThunderX ITS | #23144 | CAVIUM_ERRATUM_23144 |
| Cavium | ThunderX GICv3 | #23154 | CAVIUM_ERRATUM_23154 |
| Cavium | ThunderX Core | #27456 | CAVIUM_ERRATUM_27456 |
| Cavium | ThunderX Core | #30115 | CAVIUM_ERRATUM_30115 |
| Cavium | ThunderX SMMUv2 | #27704 | N/A |
| Cavium | ThunderX2 SMMUv3| #74 | N/A |
| Cavium | ThunderX2 SMMUv3| #126 | N/A |
| | | | |
| Freescale/NXP | LS2080A/LS1043A | A-008585 | FSL_ERRATUM_A008585 |
| | | | |
| Hisilicon | Hip0{5,6,7} | #161010101 | HISILICON_ERRATUM_161010101 |
| Hisilicon | Hip0{6,7} | #161010701 | N/A |
| | | | |
| Qualcomm Tech. | Falkor v1 | E1003 | QCOM_FALKOR_ERRATUM_1003 |
| Qualcomm Tech. | Falkor v1 | E1009 | QCOM_FALKOR_ERRATUM_1009 |

190
Documentation/bcache.txt
View File

@ -1,10 +1,15 @@
============================
A block layer cache (bcache)
============================
Say you've got a big slow raid 6, and an ssd or three. Wouldn't it be
nice if you could use them as cache... Hence bcache.
Wiki and git repositories are at:
http://bcache.evilpiepirate.org
http://evilpiepirate.org/git/linux-bcache.git
http://evilpiepirate.org/git/bcache-tools.git
- http://bcache.evilpiepirate.org
- http://evilpiepirate.org/git/linux-bcache.git
- http://evilpiepirate.org/git/bcache-tools.git
It's designed around the performance characteristics of SSDs - it only allocates
in erase block sized buckets, and it uses a hybrid btree/log to track cached
@ -37,17 +42,19 @@ to be flushed.
Getting started:
You'll need make-bcache from the bcache-tools repository. Both the cache device
and backing device must be formatted before use.
and backing device must be formatted before use::
make-bcache -B /dev/sdb
make-bcache -C /dev/sdc
make-bcache has the ability to format multiple devices at the same time - if
you format your backing devices and cache device at the same time, you won't
have to manually attach:
have to manually attach::
make-bcache -B /dev/sda /dev/sdb -C /dev/sdc
bcache-tools now ships udev rules, and bcache devices are known to the kernel
immediately. Without udev, you can manually register devices like this:
immediately. Without udev, you can manually register devices like this::
echo /dev/sdb > /sys/fs/bcache/register
echo /dev/sdc > /sys/fs/bcache/register
@ -60,16 +67,16 @@ slow devices as bcache backing devices without a cache, and you can choose to ad
a caching device later.
See 'ATTACHING' section below.
The devices show up as:
The devices show up as::
/dev/bcache<N>
As well as (with udev):
As well as (with udev)::
/dev/bcache/by-uuid/<uuid>
/dev/bcache/by-label/<label>
To get started:
To get started::
mkfs.ext4 /dev/bcache0
mount /dev/bcache0 /mnt
@ -81,13 +88,13 @@ Cache devices are managed as sets; multiple caches per set isn't supported yet
but will allow for mirroring of metadata and dirty data in the future. Your new
cache set shows up as /sys/fs/bcache/<UUID>
ATTACHING
Attaching
---------
After your cache device and backing device are registered, the backing device
must be attached to your cache set to enable caching. Attaching a backing
device to a cache set is done thusly, with the UUID of the cache set in
/sys/fs/bcache:
/sys/fs/bcache::
echo <CSET-UUID> > /sys/block/bcache0/bcache/attach
@ -97,7 +104,7 @@ your bcache devices. If a backing device has data in a cache somewhere, the
important if you have writeback caching turned on.
If you're booting up and your cache device is gone and never coming back, you
can force run the backing device:
can force run the backing device::
echo 1 > /sys/block/sdb/bcache/running
@ -110,7 +117,7 @@ but all the cached data will be invalidated. If there was dirty data in the
cache, don't expect the filesystem to be recoverable - you will have massive
filesystem corruption, though ext4's fsck does work miracles.
ERROR HANDLING
Error Handling
--------------
Bcache tries to transparently handle IO errors to/from the cache device without
@ -134,25 +141,27 @@ the backing devices to passthrough mode.
read some of the dirty data, though.
HOWTO/COOKBOOK
Howto/cookbook
--------------
A) Starting a bcache with a missing caching device
If registering the backing device doesn't help, it's already there, you just need
to force it to run without the cache:
to force it to run without the cache::
host:~# echo /dev/sdb1 > /sys/fs/bcache/register
[ 119.844831] bcache: register_bcache() error opening /dev/sdb1: device already registered
Next, you try to register your caching device if it's present. However
if it's absent, or registration fails for some reason, you can still
start your bcache without its cache, like so:
start your bcache without its cache, like so::
host:/sys/block/sdb/sdb1/bcache# echo 1 > running
Note that this may cause data loss if you were running in writeback mode.
B) Bcache does not find its cache
B) Bcache does not find its cache::
host:/sys/block/md5/bcache# echo 0226553a-37cf-41d5-b3ce-8b1e944543a8 > attach
[ 1933.455082] bcache: bch_cached_dev_attach() Couldn't find uuid for md5 in set
@ -160,7 +169,8 @@ B) Bcache does not find its cache
[ 1933.478179] : cache set not found
In this case, the caching device was simply not registered at boot
or disappeared and came back, and needs to be (re-)registered:
or disappeared and came back, and needs to be (re-)registered::
host:/sys/block/md5/bcache# echo /dev/sdh2 > /sys/fs/bcache/register
@ -180,7 +190,8 @@ device is still available at an 8KiB offset. So either via a loopdev
of the backing device created with --offset 8K, or any value defined by
--data-offset when you originally formatted bcache with `make-bcache`.
For example:
For example::
losetup -o 8192 /dev/loop0 /dev/your_bcache_backing_dev
This should present your unmodified backing device data in /dev/loop0
@ -191,33 +202,38 @@ cache device without loosing data.
E) Wiping a cache device
host:~# wipefs -a /dev/sdh2
16 bytes were erased at offset 0x1018 (bcache)
they were: c6 85 73 f6 4e 1a 45 ca 82 65 f5 7f 48 ba 6d 81
::
After you boot back with bcache enabled, you recreate the cache and attach it:
host:~# make-bcache -C /dev/sdh2
UUID: 7be7e175-8f4c-4f99-94b2-9c904d227045
Set UUID: 5bc072a8-ab17-446d-9744-e247949913c1
version: 0
nbuckets: 106874
block_size: 1
bucket_size: 1024
nr_in_set: 1
nr_this_dev: 0
first_bucket: 1
[ 650.511912] bcache: run_cache_set() invalidating existing data
[ 650.549228] bcache: register_cache() registered cache device sdh2
host:~# wipefs -a /dev/sdh2
16 bytes were erased at offset 0x1018 (bcache)
they were: c6 85 73 f6 4e 1a 45 ca 82 65 f5 7f 48 ba 6d 81
start backing device with missing cache:
host:/sys/block/md5/bcache# echo 1 > running
After you boot back with bcache enabled, you recreate the cache and attach it::
attach new cache:
host:/sys/block/md5/bcache# echo 5bc072a8-ab17-446d-9744-e247949913c1 > attach
[ 865.276616] bcache: bch_cached_dev_attach() Caching md5 as bcache0 on set 5bc072a8-ab17-446d-9744-e247949913c1
host:~# make-bcache -C /dev/sdh2
UUID: 7be7e175-8f4c-4f99-94b2-9c904d227045
Set UUID: 5bc072a8-ab17-446d-9744-e247949913c1
version: 0
nbuckets: 106874
block_size: 1
bucket_size: 1024
nr_in_set: 1
nr_this_dev: 0
first_bucket: 1
[ 650.511912] bcache: run_cache_set() invalidating existing data
[ 650.549228] bcache: register_cache() registered cache device sdh2
start backing device with missing cache::
host:/sys/block/md5/bcache# echo 1 > running
attach new cache::
host:/sys/block/md5/bcache# echo 5bc072a8-ab17-446d-9744-e247949913c1 > attach
[ 865.276616] bcache: bch_cached_dev_attach() Caching md5 as bcache0 on set 5bc072a8-ab17-446d-9744-e247949913c1
F) Remove or replace a caching device
F) Remove or replace a caching device::
host:/sys/block/sda/sda7/bcache# echo 1 > detach
[ 695.872542] bcache: cached_dev_detach_finish() Caching disabled for sda7
@ -226,13 +242,15 @@ F) Remove or replace a caching device
wipefs: error: /dev/nvme0n1p4: probing initialization failed: Device or resource busy
Ooops, it's disabled, but not unregistered, so it's still protected
We need to go and unregister it:
We need to go and unregister it::
host:/sys/fs/bcache/b7ba27a1-2398-4649-8ae3-0959f57ba128# ls -l cache0
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Feb 25 18:33 cache0 -> ../../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.0/0000:70:00.0/nvme/nvme0/nvme0n1/nvme0n1p4/bcache/
host:/sys/fs/bcache/b7ba27a1-2398-4649-8ae3-0959f57ba128# echo 1 > stop
kernel: [ 917.041908] bcache: cache_set_free() Cache set b7ba27a1-2398-4649-8ae3-0959f57ba128 unregistered
Now we can wipe it:
Now we can wipe it::
host:~# wipefs -a /dev/nvme0n1p4
/dev/nvme0n1p4: 16 bytes were erased at offset 0x00001018 (bcache): c6 85 73 f6 4e 1a 45 ca 82 65 f5 7f 48 ba 6d 81
@ -252,40 +270,44 @@ if there are any active backing or caching devices left on it:
1) Is it present in /dev/bcache* ? (there are times where it won't be)
If so, it's easy:
If so, it's easy::
host:/sys/block/bcache0/bcache# echo 1 > stop
2) But if your backing device is gone, this won't work:
2) But if your backing device is gone, this won't work::
host:/sys/block/bcache0# cd bcache
bash: cd: bcache: No such file or directory
In this case, you may have to unregister the dmcrypt block device that
references this bcache to free it up:
In this case, you may have to unregister the dmcrypt block device that
references this bcache to free it up::
host:~# dmsetup remove oldds1
bcache: bcache_device_free() bcache0 stopped
bcache: cache_set_free() Cache set 5bc072a8-ab17-446d-9744-e247949913c1 unregistered
This causes the backing bcache to be removed from /sys/fs/bcache and
then it can be reused. This would be true of any block device stacking
where bcache is a lower device.
This causes the backing bcache to be removed from /sys/fs/bcache and
then it can be reused. This would be true of any block device stacking
where bcache is a lower device.
3) In other cases, you can also look in /sys/fs/bcache/:
3) In other cases, you can also look in /sys/fs/bcache/::
host:/sys/fs/bcache# ls -l */{cache?,bdev?}
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Mar 5 09:39 0226553a-37cf-41d5-b3ce-8b1e944543a8/bdev1 -> ../../../devices/virtual/block/dm-1/bcache/
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Mar 5 09:39 0226553a-37cf-41d5-b3ce-8b1e944543a8/cache0 -> ../../../devices/virtual/block/dm-4/bcache/
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Mar 5 09:39 5bc072a8-ab17-446d-9744-e247949913c1/cache0 -> ../../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/ata10/host9/target9:0:0/9:0:0:0/block/sdl/sdl2/bcache/
host:/sys/fs/bcache# ls -l */{cache?,bdev?}
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Mar 5 09:39 0226553a-37cf-41d5-b3ce-8b1e944543a8/bdev1 -> ../../../devices/virtual/block/dm-1/bcache/
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Mar 5 09:39 0226553a-37cf-41d5-b3ce-8b1e944543a8/cache0 -> ../../../devices/virtual/block/dm-4/bcache/
lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 Mar 5 09:39 5bc072a8-ab17-446d-9744-e247949913c1/cache0 -> ../../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/ata10/host9/target9:0:0/9:0:0:0/block/sdl/sdl2/bcache/
The device names will show which UUID is relevant, cd in that directory
and stop the cache::
The device names will show which UUID is relevant, cd in that directory
and stop the cache:
host:/sys/fs/bcache/5bc072a8-ab17-446d-9744-e247949913c1# echo 1 > stop
This will free up bcache references and let you reuse the partition for
other purposes.
This will free up bcache references and let you reuse the partition for
other purposes.
TROUBLESHOOTING PERFORMANCE
Troubleshooting performance
---------------------------
Bcache has a bunch of config options and tunables. The defaults are intended to
@ -301,11 +323,13 @@ want for getting the best possible numbers when benchmarking.
raid stripe size to get the disk multiples that you would like.
For example: If you have a 64k stripe size, then the following offset
would provide alignment for many common RAID5 data spindle counts:
would provide alignment for many common RAID5 data spindle counts::
64k * 2*2*2*3*3*5*7 bytes = 161280k
That space is wasted, but for only 157.5MB you can grow your RAID 5
volume to the following data-spindle counts without re-aligning:
volume to the following data-spindle counts without re-aligning::
3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,12,14,15,18,20,21 ...
- Bad write performance
@ -313,9 +337,9 @@ want for getting the best possible numbers when benchmarking.
If write performance is not what you expected, you probably wanted to be
running in writeback mode, which isn't the default (not due to a lack of
maturity, but simply because in writeback mode you'll lose data if something
happens to your SSD)
happens to your SSD)::
# echo writeback > /sys/block/bcache0/bcache/cache_mode
# echo writeback > /sys/block/bcache0/bcache/cache_mode
- Bad performance, or traffic not going to the SSD that you'd expect
@ -325,13 +349,13 @@ want for getting the best possible numbers when benchmarking.
accessed data out of your cache.
But if you want to benchmark reads from cache, and you start out with fio
writing an 8 gigabyte test file - so you want to disable that.
writing an 8 gigabyte test file - so you want to disable that::
# echo 0 > /sys/block/bcache0/bcache/sequential_cutoff
# echo 0 > /sys/block/bcache0/bcache/sequential_cutoff
To set it back to the default (4 mb), do
To set it back to the default (4 mb), do::
# echo 4M > /sys/block/bcache0/bcache/sequential_cutoff
# echo 4M > /sys/block/bcache0/bcache/sequential_cutoff
- Traffic's still going to the spindle/still getting cache misses
@ -344,10 +368,10 @@ want for getting the best possible numbers when benchmarking.
throttles traffic if the latency exceeds a threshold (it does this by
cranking down the sequential bypass).
You can disable this if you need to by setting the thresholds to 0:
You can disable this if you need to by setting the thresholds to 0::
# echo 0 > /sys/fs/bcache/<cache set>/congested_read_threshold_us
# echo 0 > /sys/fs/bcache/<cache set>/congested_write_threshold_us
# echo 0 > /sys/fs/bcache/<cache set>/congested_read_threshold_us
# echo 0 > /sys/fs/bcache/<cache set>/congested_write_threshold_us
The default is 2000 us (2 milliseconds) for reads, and 20000 for writes.
@ -369,7 +393,7 @@ want for getting the best possible numbers when benchmarking.
a fix for the issue there).
SYSFS - BACKING DEVICE
Sysfs - backing device
----------------------
Available at /sys/block/<bdev>/bcache, /sys/block/bcache*/bcache and
@ -454,7 +478,8 @@ writeback_running
still be added to the cache until it is mostly full; only meant for
benchmarking. Defaults to on.
SYSFS - BACKING DEVICE STATS:
Sysfs - backing device stats
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
There are directories with these numbers for a running total, as well as
versions that decay over the past day, hour and 5 minutes; they're also
@ -463,14 +488,11 @@ aggregated in the cache set directory as well.
bypassed
Amount of IO (both reads and writes) that has bypassed the cache
cache_hits
cache_misses
cache_hit_ratio
cache_hits, cache_misses, cache_hit_ratio
Hits and misses are counted per individual IO as bcache sees them; a
partial hit is counted as a miss.
cache_bypass_hits
cache_bypass_misses
cache_bypass_hits, cache_bypass_misses
Hits and misses for IO that is intended to skip the cache are still counted,
but broken out here.
@ -482,7 +504,8 @@ cache_miss_collisions
cache_readaheads
Count of times readahead occurred.
SYSFS - CACHE SET:
Sysfs - cache set
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Available at /sys/fs/bcache/<cset-uuid>
@ -520,8 +543,7 @@ flash_vol_create
Echoing a size to this file (in human readable units, k/M/G) creates a thinly
provisioned volume backed by the cache set.
io_error_halflife
io_error_limit
io_error_halflife, io_error_limit
These determines how many errors we accept before disabling the cache.
Each error is decayed by the half life (in # ios). If the decaying count
reaches io_error_limit dirty data is written out and the cache is disabled.
@ -545,7 +567,8 @@ unregister
Detaches all backing devices and closes the cache devices; if dirty data is
present it will disable writeback caching and wait for it to be flushed.
SYSFS - CACHE SET INTERNAL:
Sysfs - cache set internal
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This directory also exposes timings for a number of internal operations, with
separate files for average duration, average frequency, last occurrence and max
@ -574,7 +597,8 @@ cache_read_races
trigger_gc
Writing to this file forces garbage collection to run.
SYSFS - CACHE DEVICE:
Sysfs - Cache device
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Available at /sys/block/<cdev>/bcache

6
Documentation/block/data-integrity.txt
View File

@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ will require extra work due to the application tag.
supported by the block device.
int bio_integrity_prep(bio);
bool bio_integrity_prep(bio);
To generate IMD for WRITE and to set up buffers for READ, the
filesystem must call bio_integrity_prep(bio).
@ -201,9 +201,7 @@ will require extra work due to the application tag.
sector must be set, and the bio should have all data pages
added. It is up to the caller to ensure that the bio does not
change while I/O is in progress.
bio_integrity_prep() should only be called if
bio_integrity_enabled() returned 1.
Complete bio with error if prepare failed for some reson.
5.3 PASSING EXISTING INTEGRITY METADATA

19
Documentation/bt8xxgpio.txt
View File

@ -1,12 +1,8 @@
===============================================================
== BT8XXGPIO driver ==
== ==
== A driver for a selfmade cheap BT8xx based PCI GPIO-card ==
== ==
== For advanced documentation, see ==
== http://www.bu3sch.de/btgpio.php ==
===============================================================
===================================================================
A driver for a selfmade cheap BT8xx based PCI GPIO-card (bt8xxgpio)
===================================================================
For advanced documentation, see http://www.bu3sch.de/btgpio.php
A generic digital 24-port PCI GPIO card can be built out of an ordinary
Brooktree bt848, bt849, bt878 or bt879 based analog TV tuner card. The
@ -17,9 +13,8 @@ The bt8xx chip does have 24 digital GPIO ports.
These ports are accessible via 24 pins on the SMD chip package.
==============================================
== How to physically access the GPIO pins ==
==============================================
How to physically access the GPIO pins
======================================
The are several ways to access these pins. One might unsolder the whole chip
and put it on a custom PCI board, or one might only unsolder each individual
@ -27,7 +22,7 @@ GPIO pin and solder that to some tiny wire. As the chip package really is tiny
there are some advanced soldering skills needed in any case.
The physical pinouts are drawn in the following ASCII art.
The GPIO pins are marked with G00-G23
The GPIO pins are marked with G00-G23::
G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

65
Documentation/btmrvl.txt
View File

@ -1,18 +1,16 @@
=======================================================================
README for btmrvl driver
=======================================================================
=============
btmrvl driver
=============
All commands are used via debugfs interface.
=====================
Set/get driver configurations:
Set/get driver configurations
=============================
Path: /debug/btmrvl/config/
gpiogap=[n]
hscfgcmd
These commands are used to configure the host sleep parameters.
gpiogap=[n], hscfgcmd
These commands are used to configure the host sleep parameters::
bit 8:0 -- Gap
bit 16:8 -- GPIO
@ -23,7 +21,8 @@ hscfgcmd
where Gap is the gap in milli seconds between wakeup signal and
wakeup event, or 0xff for special host sleep setting.
Usage:
Usage::
# Use SDIO interface to wake up the host and set GAP to 0x80:
echo 0xff80 > /debug/btmrvl/config/gpiogap
echo 1 > /debug/btmrvl/config/hscfgcmd
@ -32,15 +31,16 @@ hscfgcmd
echo 0x03ff > /debug/btmrvl/config/gpiogap
echo 1 > /debug/btmrvl/config/hscfgcmd
psmode=[n]
pscmd
psmode=[n], pscmd
These commands are used to enable/disable auto sleep mode
where the option is:
where the option is::
1 -- Enable auto sleep mode
0 -- Disable auto sleep mode
Usage:
Usage::
# Enable auto sleep mode
echo 1 > /debug/btmrvl/config/psmode
echo 1 > /debug/btmrvl/config/pscmd
@ -50,15 +50,16 @@ pscmd
echo 1 > /debug/btmrvl/config/pscmd
hsmode=[n]
hscmd
hsmode=[n], hscmd
These commands are used to enable host sleep or wake up firmware
where the option is:
where the option is::
1 -- Enable host sleep
0 -- Wake up firmware
Usage:
Usage::
# Enable host sleep
echo 1 > /debug/btmrvl/config/hsmode
echo 1 > /debug/btmrvl/config/hscmd
@ -68,12 +69,13 @@ hscmd
echo 1 > /debug/btmrvl/config/hscmd
======================
Get driver status:
Get driver status
=================
Path: /debug/btmrvl/status/
Usage:
Usage::
cat /debug/btmrvl/status/<args>
where the args are:
@ -90,14 +92,17 @@ hsstate
txdnldrdy
This command displays the value of Tx download ready flag.
=====================
Issuing a raw hci command
=========================
Use hcitool to issue raw hci command, refer to hcitool manual
Usage: Hcitool cmd <ogf> <ocf> [Parameters]
Usage::
Hcitool cmd <ogf> <ocf> [Parameters]
Interface Control Command::
Interface Control Command
hcitool cmd 0x3f 0x5b 0xf5 0x01 0x00 --Enable All interface
hcitool cmd 0x3f 0x5b 0xf5 0x01 0x01 --Enable Wlan interface
hcitool cmd 0x3f 0x5b 0xf5 0x01 0x02 --Enable BT interface
@ -105,13 +110,13 @@ Use hcitool to issue raw hci command, refer to hcitool manual
hcitool cmd 0x3f 0x5b 0xf5 0x00 0x01 --Disable Wlan interface
hcitool cmd 0x3f 0x5b 0xf5 0x00 0x02 --Disable BT interface
=======================================================================
SD8688 firmware
===============
Images:
SD8688 firmware:
/lib/firmware/sd8688_helper.bin
/lib/firmware/sd8688.bin
- /lib/firmware/sd8688_helper.bin
- /lib/firmware/sd8688.bin
The images can be downloaded from:

64
Documentation/bus-virt-phys-mapping.txt
View File

@ -1,17 +1,27 @@
[ NOTE: The virt_to_bus() and bus_to_virt() functions have been
==========================================================
How to access I/O mapped memory from within device drivers
==========================================================
:Author: Linus
.. warning::
The virt_to_bus() and bus_to_virt() functions have been
superseded by the functionality provided by the PCI DMA interface
(see Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt). They continue
to be documented below for historical purposes, but new code
must not use them. --davidm 00/12/12 ]
must not use them. --davidm 00/12/12
[ This is a mail message in response to a query on IO mapping, thus the
strange format for a "document" ]
::
[ This is a mail message in response to a query on IO mapping, thus the
strange format for a "document" ]
The AHA-1542 is a bus-master device, and your patch makes the driver give the
controller the physical address of the buffers, which is correct on x86
(because all bus master devices see the physical memory mappings directly).
However, on many setups, there are actually _three_ different ways of looking
However, on many setups, there are actually **three** different ways of looking
at memory addresses, and in this case we actually want the third, the
so-called "bus address".
@ -38,7 +48,7 @@ because the memory and the devices share the same address space, and that is
not generally necessarily true on other PCI/ISA setups.
Now, just as an example, on the PReP (PowerPC Reference Platform), the
CPU sees a memory map something like this (this is from memory):
CPU sees a memory map something like this (this is from memory)::
0-2 GB "real memory"
2 GB-3 GB "system IO" (inb/out and similar accesses on x86)
@ -52,7 +62,7 @@ So when the CPU wants any bus master to write to physical memory 0, it
has to give the master address 0x80000000 as the memory address.
So, for example, depending on how the kernel is actually mapped on the
PPC, you can end up with a setup like this:
PPC, you can end up with a setup like this::
physical address: 0
virtual address: 0xC0000000
@ -61,7 +71,7 @@ PPC, you can end up with a setup like this:
where all the addresses actually point to the same thing. It's just seen
through different translations..
Similarly, on the Alpha, the normal translation is
Similarly, on the Alpha, the normal translation is::
physical address: 0
virtual address: 0xfffffc0000000000
@ -70,7 +80,7 @@ Similarly, on the Alpha, the normal translation is
(but there are also Alphas where the physical address and the bus address
are the same).
Anyway, the way to look up all these translations, you do
Anyway, the way to look up all these translations, you do::
#include <asm/io.h>
@ -81,8 +91,8 @@ Anyway, the way to look up all these translations, you do
Now, when do you need these?
You want the _virtual_ address when you are actually going to access that
pointer from the kernel. So you can have something like this:
You want the **virtual** address when you are actually going to access that
pointer from the kernel. So you can have something like this::
/*
* this is the hardware "mailbox" we use to communicate with
@ -104,7 +114,7 @@ pointer from the kernel. So you can have something like this:
...
on the other hand, you want the bus address when you have a buffer that
you want to give to the controller:
you want to give to the controller::
/* ask the controller to read the sense status into "sense_buffer" */
mbox.bufstart = virt_to_bus(&sense_buffer);
@ -112,7 +122,7 @@ you want to give to the controller:
mbox.status = 0;
notify_controller(&mbox);
And you generally _never_ want to use the physical address, because you can't
And you generally **never** want to use the physical address, because you can't
use that from the CPU (the CPU only uses translated virtual addresses), and
you can't use it from the bus master.
@ -124,8 +134,10 @@ be remapped as measured in units of pages, a.k.a. the pfn (the memory
management layer doesn't know about devices outside the CPU, so it
shouldn't need to know about "bus addresses" etc).
NOTE NOTE NOTE! The above is only one part of the whole equation. The above
only talks about "real memory", that is, CPU memory (RAM).
.. note::
The above is only one part of the whole equation. The above
only talks about "real memory", that is, CPU memory (RAM).
There is a completely different type of memory too, and that's the "shared
memory" on the PCI or ISA bus. That's generally not RAM (although in the case
@ -137,20 +149,22 @@ whatever, and there is only one way to access it: the readb/writeb and
related functions. You should never take the address of such memory, because
there is really nothing you can do with such an address: it's not
conceptually in the same memory space as "real memory" at all, so you cannot
just dereference a pointer. (Sadly, on x86 it _is_ in the same memory space,
just dereference a pointer. (Sadly, on x86 it **is** in the same memory space,
so on x86 it actually works to just deference a pointer, but it's not
portable).
For such memory, you can do things like
For such memory, you can do things like:
- reading::
- reading:
/*
* read first 32 bits from ISA memory at 0xC0000, aka
* C000:0000 in DOS terms
*/
unsigned int signature = isa_readl(0xC0000);
- remapping and writing:
- remapping and writing::
/*
* remap framebuffer PCI memory area at 0xFC000000,
* size 1MB, so that we can access it: We can directly
@ -165,7 +179,8 @@ For such memory, you can do things like
/* unmap when we unload the driver */
iounmap(baseptr);
- copying and clearing:
- copying and clearing::
/* get the 6-byte Ethernet address at ISA address E000:0040 */
memcpy_fromio(kernel_buffer, 0xE0040, 6);
/* write a packet to the driver */
@ -181,10 +196,10 @@ happy that your driver works ;)
Note that kernel versions 2.0.x (and earlier) mistakenly called the
ioremap() function "vremap()". ioremap() is the proper name, but I
didn't think straight when I wrote it originally. People who have to
support both can do something like:
support both can do something like::
/* support old naming silliness */
#if LINUX_VERSION_CODE < 0x020100
#if LINUX_VERSION_CODE < 0x020100
#define ioremap vremap
#define iounmap vfree
#endif
@ -196,13 +211,10 @@ And the above sounds worse than it really is. Most real drivers really
don't do all that complex things (or rather: the complexity is not so
much in the actual IO accesses as in error handling and timeouts etc).
It's generally not hard to fix drivers, and in many cases the code
actually looks better afterwards:
actually looks better afterwards::
unsigned long signature = *(unsigned int *) 0xC0000;
vs
unsigned long signature = readl(0xC0000);
I think the second version actually is more readable, no?
Linus

92
Documentation/cachetlb.txt
View File

@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
Cache and TLB Flushing
Under Linux
==================================
Cache and TLB Flushing Under Linux
==================================
David S. Miller <davem@redhat.com>
:Author: David S. Miller <davem@redhat.com>
This document describes the cache/tlb flushing interfaces called
by the Linux VM subsystem. It enumerates over each interface,
@ -28,7 +29,7 @@ Therefore when software page table changes occur, the kernel will
invoke one of the following flush methods _after_ the page table
changes occur:
1) void flush_tlb_all(void)
1) ``void flush_tlb_all(void)``
The most severe flush of all. After this interface runs,
any previous page table modification whatsoever will be
@ -37,7 +38,7 @@ changes occur:
This is usually invoked when the kernel page tables are
changed, since such translations are "global" in nature.
2) void flush_tlb_mm(struct mm_struct *mm)
2) ``void flush_tlb_mm(struct mm_struct *mm)``
This interface flushes an entire user address space from
the TLB. After running, this interface must make sure that
@ -49,8 +50,8 @@ changes occur:
page table operations such as what happens during
fork, and exec.
3) void flush_tlb_range(struct vm_area_struct *vma,
unsigned long start, unsigned long end)
3) ``void flush_tlb_range(struct vm_area_struct *vma,
unsigned long start, unsigned long end)``
Here we are flushing a specific range of (user) virtual
address translations from the TLB. After running, this
@ -69,7 +70,7 @@ changes occur:
call flush_tlb_page (see below) for each entry which may be
modified.
4) void flush_tlb_page(struct vm_area_struct *vma, unsigned long addr)
4) ``void flush_tlb_page(struct vm_area_struct *vma, unsigned long addr)``
This time we need to remove the PAGE_SIZE sized translation
from the TLB. The 'vma' is the backing structure used by
@ -87,8 +88,8 @@ changes occur:
This is used primarily during fault processing.
5) void update_mmu_cache(struct vm_area_struct *vma,
unsigned long address, pte_t *ptep)
5) ``void update_mmu_cache(struct vm_area_struct *vma,
unsigned long address, pte_t *ptep)``
At the end of every page fault, this routine is invoked to
tell the architecture specific code that a translation
@ -100,7 +101,7 @@ changes occur:
translations for software managed TLB configurations.
The sparc64 port currently does this.
6) void tlb_migrate_finish(struct mm_struct *mm)
6) ``void tlb_migrate_finish(struct mm_struct *mm)``
This interface is called at the end of an explicit
process migration. This interface provides a hook
@ -112,7 +113,7 @@ changes occur:
Next, we have the cache flushing interfaces. In general, when Linux
is changing an existing virtual-->physical mapping to a new value,
the sequence will be in one of the following forms:
the sequence will be in one of the following forms::
1) flush_cache_mm(mm);
change_all_page_tables_of(mm);
@ -143,7 +144,7 @@ and have no dependency on translation information.
Here are the routines, one by one:
1) void flush_cache_mm(struct mm_struct *mm)
1) ``void flush_cache_mm(struct mm_struct *mm)``
This interface flushes an entire user address space from
the caches. That is, after running, there will be no cache
@ -152,7 +153,7 @@ Here are the routines, one by one:
This interface is used to handle whole address space
page table operations such as what happens during exit and exec.
2) void flush_cache_dup_mm(struct mm_struct *mm)
2) ``void flush_cache_dup_mm(struct mm_struct *mm)``
This interface flushes an entire user address space from
the caches. That is, after running, there will be no cache
@ -164,8 +165,8 @@ Here are the routines, one by one:
This option is separate from flush_cache_mm to allow some
optimizations for VIPT caches.
3) void flush_cache_range(struct vm_area_struct *vma,
unsigned long start, unsigned long end)
3) ``void flush_cache_range(struct vm_area_struct *vma,
unsigned long start, unsigned long end)``
Here we are flushing a specific range of (user) virtual
addresses from the cache. After running, there will be no
@ -181,7 +182,7 @@ Here are the routines, one by one:
call flush_cache_page (see below) for each entry which may be
modified.
4) void flush_cache_page(struct vm_area_struct *vma, unsigned long addr, unsigned long pfn)
4) ``void flush_cache_page(struct vm_area_struct *vma, unsigned long addr, unsigned long pfn)``
This time we need to remove a PAGE_SIZE sized range
from the cache. The 'vma' is the backing structure used by
@ -202,7 +203,7 @@ Here are the routines, one by one:
This is used primarily during fault processing.
5) void flush_cache_kmaps(void)
5) ``void flush_cache_kmaps(void)``
This routine need only be implemented if the platform utilizes
highmem. It will be called right before all of the kmaps
@ -214,8 +215,8 @@ Here are the routines, one by one:
This routing should be implemented in asm/highmem.h
6) void flush_cache_vmap(unsigned long start, unsigned long end)
void flush_cache_vunmap(unsigned long start, unsigned long end)
6) ``void flush_cache_vmap(unsigned long start, unsigned long end)``
``void flush_cache_vunmap(unsigned long start, unsigned long end)``
Here in these two interfaces we are flushing a specific range
of (kernel) virtual addresses from the cache. After running,
@ -243,8 +244,10 @@ size). This setting will force the SYSv IPC layer to only allow user
processes to mmap shared memory at address which are a multiple of
this value.
NOTE: This does not fix shared mmaps, check out the sparc64 port for
one way to solve this (in particular SPARC_FLAG_MMAPSHARED).
.. note::
This does not fix shared mmaps, check out the sparc64 port for
one way to solve this (in particular SPARC_FLAG_MMAPSHARED).
Next, you have to solve the D-cache aliasing issue for all
other cases. Please keep in mind that fact that, for a given page
@ -255,8 +258,8 @@ physical page into its address space, by implication the D-cache
aliasing problem has the potential to exist since the kernel already
maps this page at its virtual address.
void copy_user_page(void *to, void *from, unsigned long addr, struct page *page)
void clear_user_page(void *to, unsigned long addr, struct page *page)
``void copy_user_page(void *to, void *from, unsigned long addr, struct page *page)``
``void clear_user_page(void *to, unsigned long addr, struct page *page)``
These two routines store data in user anonymous or COW
pages. It allows a port to efficiently avoid D-cache alias
@ -276,14 +279,16 @@ maps this page at its virtual address.
If D-cache aliasing is not an issue, these two routines may
simply call memcpy/memset directly and do nothing more.
void flush_dcache_page(struct page *page)
``void flush_dcache_page(struct page *page)``
Any time the kernel writes to a page cache page, _OR_
the kernel is about to read from a page cache page and
user space shared/writable mappings of this page potentially
exist, this routine is called.
NOTE: This routine need only be called for page cache pages
.. note::
This routine need only be called for page cache pages
which can potentially ever be mapped into the address
space of a user process. So for example, VFS layer code
handling vfs symlinks in the page cache need not call
@ -322,18 +327,19 @@ maps this page at its virtual address.
made of this flag bit, and if set the flush is done and the flag
bit is cleared.
IMPORTANT NOTE: It is often important, if you defer the flush,
.. important::
It is often important, if you defer the flush,
that the actual flush occurs on the same CPU
as did the cpu stores into the page to make it
dirty. Again, see sparc64 for examples of how
to deal with this.
void copy_to_user_page(struct vm_area_struct *vma, struct page *page,
unsigned long user_vaddr,
void *dst, void *src, int len)
void copy_from_user_page(struct vm_area_struct *vma, struct page *page,
unsigned long user_vaddr,
void *dst, void *src, int len)
``void copy_to_user_page(struct vm_area_struct *vma, struct page *page,
unsigned long user_vaddr, void *dst, void *src, int len)``
``void copy_from_user_page(struct vm_area_struct *vma, struct page *page,
unsigned long user_vaddr, void *dst, void *src, int len)``
When the kernel needs to copy arbitrary data in and out
of arbitrary user pages (f.e. for ptrace()) it will use
these two routines.
@ -344,8 +350,9 @@ maps this page at its virtual address.
likely that you will need to flush the instruction cache
for copy_to_user_page().
void flush_anon_page(struct vm_area_struct *vma, struct page *page,
unsigned long vmaddr)
``void flush_anon_page(struct vm_area_struct *vma, struct page *page,
unsigned long vmaddr)``
When the kernel needs to access the contents of an anonymous
page, it calls this function (currently only
get_user_pages()). Note: flush_dcache_page() deliberately
@ -354,7 +361,8 @@ maps this page at its virtual address.
architectures). For incoherent architectures, it should flush
the cache of the page at vmaddr.
void flush_kernel_dcache_page(struct page *page)
``void flush_kernel_dcache_page(struct page *page)``
When the kernel needs to modify a user page is has obtained
with kmap, it calls this function after all modifications are
complete (but before kunmapping it) to bring the underlying
@ -366,14 +374,16 @@ maps this page at its virtual address.
the kernel cache for page (using page_address(page)).
void flush_icache_range(unsigned long start, unsigned long end)
``void flush_icache_range(unsigned long start, unsigned long end)``
When the kernel stores into addresses that it will execute
out of (eg when loading modules), this function is called.
If the icache does not snoop stores then this routine will need
to flush it.
void flush_icache_page(struct vm_area_struct *vma, struct page *page)
``void flush_icache_page(struct vm_area_struct *vma, struct page *page)``
All the functionality of flush_icache_page can be implemented in
flush_dcache_page and update_mmu_cache. In the future, the hope
is to remove this interface completely.
@ -387,7 +397,8 @@ the kernel trying to do I/O to vmap areas must manually manage
coherency. It must do this by flushing the vmap range before doing
I/O and invalidating it after the I/O returns.
void flush_kernel_vmap_range(void *vaddr, int size)
``void flush_kernel_vmap_range(void *vaddr, int size)``
flushes the kernel cache for a given virtual address range in
the vmap area. This is to make sure that any data the kernel
modified in the vmap range is made visible to the physical
@ -395,7 +406,8 @@ I/O and invalidating it after the I/O returns.
Note that this API does *not* also flush the offset map alias
of the area.
void invalidate_kernel_vmap_range(void *vaddr, int size) invalidates
``void invalidate_kernel_vmap_range(void *vaddr, int size) invalidates``
the cache for a given virtual address range in the vmap area
which prevents the processor from making the cache stale by
speculatively reading data while the I/O was occurring to the

47
Documentation/cgroup-v1/memory.txt
View File

@ -789,23 +789,46 @@ way to trigger. Applications should do whatever they can to help the
system. It might be too late to consult with vmstat or any other
statistics, so it's advisable to take an immediate action.
The events are propagated upward until the event is handled, i.e. the
events are not pass-through. Here is what this means: for example you have
three cgroups: A->B->C. Now you set up an event listener on cgroups A, B
and C, and suppose group C experiences some pressure. In this situation,
only group C will receive the notification, i.e. groups A and B will not
receive it. This is done to avoid excessive "broadcasting" of messages,
which disturbs the system and which is especially bad if we are low on
memory or thrashing. So, organize the cgroups wisely, or propagate the
events manually (or, ask us to implement the pass-through events,
explaining why would you need them.)
By default, events are propagated upward until the event is handled, i.e. the
events are not pass-through. For example, you have three cgroups: A->B->C. Now
you set up an event listener on cgroups A, B and C, and suppose group C
experiences some pressure. In this situation, only group C will receive the
notification, i.e. groups A and B will not receive it. This is done to avoid
excessive "broadcasting" of messages, which disturbs the system and which is
especially bad if we are low on memory or thrashing. Group B, will receive
notification only if there are no event listers for group C.
There are three optional modes that specify different propagation behavior:
- "default": this is the default behavior specified above. This mode is the
same as omitting the optional mode parameter, preserved by backwards
compatibility.
- "hierarchy": events always propagate up to the root, similar to the default
behavior, except that propagation continues regardless of whether there are
event listeners at each level, with the "hierarchy" mode. In the above
example, groups A, B, and C will receive notification of memory pressure.
- "local": events are pass-through, i.e. they only receive notifications when
memory pressure is experienced in the memcg for which the notification is
registered. In the above example, group C will receive notification if
registered for "local" notification and the group experiences memory
pressure. However, group B will never receive notification, regardless if
there is an event listener for group C or not, if group B is registered for
local notification.
The level and event notification mode ("hierarchy" or "local", if necessary) are
specified by a comma-delimited string, i.e. "low,hierarchy" specifies
hierarchical, pass-through, notification for all ancestor memcgs. Notification
that is the default, non pass-through behavior, does not specify a mode.
"medium,local" specifies pass-through notification for the medium level.
The file memory.pressure_level is only used to setup an eventfd. To
register a notification, an application must:
- create an eventfd using eventfd(2);
- open memory.pressure_level;
- write string like "<event_fd> <fd of memory.pressure_level> <level>"
- write string as "<event_fd> <fd of memory.pressure_level> <level[,mode]>"
to cgroup.event_control.
Application will be notified through eventfd when memory pressure is at
@ -821,7 +844,7 @@ Test:
# cd /sys/fs/cgroup/memory/
# mkdir foo
# cd foo
# cgroup_event_listener memory.pressure_level low &
# cgroup_event_listener memory.pressure_level low,hierarchy &
# echo 8000000 > memory.limit_in_bytes
# echo 8000000 > memory.memsw.limit_in_bytes
# echo $$ > tasks

552
Documentation/cgroup-v2.txt
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

51
Documentation/circular-buffers.txt
View File

@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
================
CIRCULAR BUFFERS
================
================
Circular Buffers
================
By: David Howells <dhowells@redhat.com>
Paul E. McKenney <paulmck@linux.vnet.ibm.com>
:Author: David Howells <dhowells@redhat.com>
:Author: Paul E. McKenney <paulmck@linux.vnet.ibm.com>
Linux provides a number of features that can be used to implement circular
@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ producer and just one consumer. It is possible to handle multiple producers by
serialising them, and to handle multiple consumers by serialising them.
Contents:
.. Contents:
(*) What is a circular buffer?
@ -31,8 +31,8 @@ Contents:
- The consumer.
==========================
WHAT IS A CIRCULAR BUFFER?
What is a circular buffer?
==========================
First of all, what is a circular buffer? A circular buffer is a buffer of
@ -60,9 +60,7 @@ buffer, provided that neither index overtakes the other. The implementer must
be careful, however, as a region more than one unit in size may wrap the end of
the buffer and be broken into two segments.
============================
MEASURING POWER-OF-2 BUFFERS
Measuring power-of-2 buffers
============================
Calculation of the occupancy or the remaining capacity of an arbitrarily sized
@ -71,13 +69,13 @@ modulus (divide) instruction. However, if the buffer is of a power-of-2 size,
then a much quicker bitwise-AND instruction can be used instead.
Linux provides a set of macros for handling power-of-2 circular buffers. These
can be made use of by:
can be made use of by::
#include <linux/circ_buf.h>
The macros are:
(*) Measure the remaining capacity of a buffer:
(#) Measure the remaining capacity of a buffer::
CIRC_SPACE(head_index, tail_index, buffer_size);
@ -85,7 +83,7 @@ The macros are:
can be inserted.
(*) Measure the maximum consecutive immediate space in a buffer:
(#) Measure the maximum consecutive immediate space in a buffer::
CIRC_SPACE_TO_END(head_index, tail_index, buffer_size);
@ -94,14 +92,14 @@ The macros are:
beginning of the buffer.
(*) Measure the occupancy of a buffer:
(#) Measure the occupancy of a buffer::
CIRC_CNT(head_index, tail_index, buffer_size);
This returns the number of items currently occupying a buffer[2].
(*) Measure the non-wrapping occupancy of a buffer:
(#) Measure the non-wrapping occupancy of a buffer::
CIRC_CNT_TO_END(head_index, tail_index, buffer_size);
@ -112,7 +110,7 @@ The macros are:
Each of these macros will nominally return a value between 0 and buffer_size-1,
however:
[1] CIRC_SPACE*() are intended to be used in the producer. To the producer
(1) CIRC_SPACE*() are intended to be used in the producer. To the producer
they will return a lower bound as the producer controls the head index,
but the consumer may still be depleting the buffer on another CPU and
moving the tail index.
@ -120,7 +118,7 @@ however:
To the consumer it will show an upper bound as the producer may be busy
depleting the space.
[2] CIRC_CNT*() are intended to be used in the consumer. To the consumer they
(2) CIRC_CNT*() are intended to be used in the consumer. To the consumer they
will return a lower bound as the consumer controls the tail index, but the
producer may still be filling the buffer on another CPU and moving the
head index.
@ -128,14 +126,12 @@ however:
To the producer it will show an upper bound as the consumer may be busy
emptying the buffer.
[3] To a third party, the order in which the writes to the indices by the
(3) To a third party, the order in which the writes to the indices by the
producer and consumer become visible cannot be guaranteed as they are
independent and may be made on different CPUs - so the result in such a
situation will merely be a guess, and may even be negative.
===========================================
USING MEMORY BARRIERS WITH CIRCULAR BUFFERS
Using memory barriers with circular buffers
===========================================
By using memory barriers in conjunction with circular buffers, you can avoid
@ -152,10 +148,10 @@ time, and only one thing should be emptying a buffer at any one time, but the
two sides can operate simultaneously.
THE PRODUCER
The producer
------------
The producer will look something like this:
The producer will look something like this::
spin_lock(&producer_lock);
@ -193,10 +189,10 @@ ordering between the read of the index indicating that the consumer has
vacated a given element and the write by the producer to that same element.
THE CONSUMER
The Consumer
------------
The consumer will look something like this:
The consumer will look something like this::
spin_lock(&consumer_lock);
@ -235,8 +231,7 @@ prevents the compiler from tearing the store, and enforces ordering
against previous accesses.
===============
FURTHER READING
Further reading
===============
See also Documentation/memory-barriers.txt for a description of Linux's memory

189
Documentation/clk.txt
View File

@ -1,12 +1,16 @@
The Common Clk Framework
Mike Turquette <mturquette@ti.com>
========================
The Common Clk Framework
========================
:Author: Mike Turquette <mturquette@ti.com>
This document endeavours to explain the common clk framework details,
and how to port a platform over to this framework. It is not yet a
detailed explanation of the clock api in include/linux/clk.h, but
perhaps someday it will include that information.
Part 1 - introduction and interface split
Introduction and interface split
================================
The common clk framework is an interface to control the clock nodes
available on various devices today. This may come in the form of clock
@ -35,10 +39,11 @@ is defined in struct clk_foo and pointed to within struct clk_core. This
allows for easy navigation between the two discrete halves of the common
clock interface.
Part 2 - common data structures and api
Common data structures and api
==============================
Below is the common struct clk_core definition from
drivers/clk/clk.c, modified for brevity:
drivers/clk/clk.c, modified for brevity::
struct clk_core {
const char *name;
@ -59,7 +64,7 @@ struct clk. That api is documented in include/linux/clk.h.
Platforms and devices utilizing the common struct clk_core use the struct
clk_ops pointer in struct clk_core to perform the hardware-specific parts of
the operations defined in clk-provider.h:
the operations defined in clk-provider.h::
struct clk_ops {
int (*prepare)(struct clk_hw *hw);
@ -95,19 +100,20 @@ the operations defined in clk-provider.h:
struct dentry *dentry);
};
Part 3 - hardware clk implementations
Hardware clk implementations
============================
The strength of the common struct clk_core comes from its .ops and .hw pointers
which abstract the details of struct clk from the hardware-specific bits, and
vice versa. To illustrate consider the simple gateable clk implementation in
drivers/clk/clk-gate.c:
drivers/clk/clk-gate.c::
struct clk_gate {
struct clk_hw hw;
void __iomem *reg;
u8 bit_idx;
...
};
struct clk_gate {
struct clk_hw hw;
void __iomem *reg;
u8 bit_idx;
...
};
struct clk_gate contains struct clk_hw hw as well as hardware-specific
knowledge about which register and bit controls this clk's gating.
@ -115,7 +121,7 @@ Nothing about clock topology or accounting, such as enable_count or
notifier_count, is needed here. That is all handled by the common
framework code and struct clk_core.
Let's walk through enabling this clk from driver code:
Let's walk through enabling this clk from driver code::
struct clk *clk;
clk = clk_get(NULL, "my_gateable_clk");
@ -123,70 +129,71 @@ Let's walk through enabling this clk from driver code:
clk_prepare(clk);
clk_enable(clk);
The call graph for clk_enable is very simple:
The call graph for clk_enable is very simple::
clk_enable(clk);
clk->ops->enable(clk->hw);
[resolves to...]
clk_gate_enable(hw);
[resolves struct clk gate with to_clk_gate(hw)]
clk_gate_set_bit(gate);
clk_enable(clk);
clk->ops->enable(clk->hw);
[resolves to...]
clk_gate_enable(hw);
[resolves struct clk gate with to_clk_gate(hw)]
clk_gate_set_bit(gate);
And the definition of clk_gate_set_bit:
And the definition of clk_gate_set_bit::
static void clk_gate_set_bit(struct clk_gate *gate)
{
u32 reg;
static void clk_gate_set_bit(struct clk_gate *gate)
{
u32 reg;
reg = __raw_readl(gate->reg);
reg |= BIT(gate->bit_idx);
writel(reg, gate->reg);
}
reg = __raw_readl(gate->reg);
reg |= BIT(gate->bit_idx);
writel(reg, gate->reg);
}
Note that to_clk_gate is defined as:
Note that to_clk_gate is defined as::
#define to_clk_gate(_hw) container_of(_hw, struct clk_gate, hw)
#define to_clk_gate(_hw) container_of(_hw, struct clk_gate, hw)
This pattern of abstraction is used for every clock hardware
representation.
Part 4 - supporting your own clk hardware
Supporting your own clk hardware
================================
When implementing support for a new type of clock it is only necessary to
include the following header:
include the following header::
#include <linux/clk-provider.h>
#include <linux/clk-provider.h>
To construct a clk hardware structure for your platform you must define
the following:
the following::
struct clk_foo {
struct clk_hw hw;
... hardware specific data goes here ...
};
struct clk_foo {
struct clk_hw hw;
... hardware specific data goes here ...
};
To take advantage of your data you'll need to support valid operations
for your clk:
for your clk::
struct clk_ops clk_foo_ops {
.enable = &clk_foo_enable;
.disable = &clk_foo_disable;
};
struct clk_ops clk_foo_ops {
.enable = &clk_foo_enable;
.disable = &clk_foo_disable;
};
Implement the above functions using container_of:
Implement the above functions using container_of::
#define to_clk_foo(_hw) container_of(_hw, struct clk_foo, hw)
#define to_clk_foo(_hw) container_of(_hw, struct clk_foo, hw)
int clk_foo_enable(struct clk_hw *hw)
{
struct clk_foo *foo;
int clk_foo_enable(struct clk_hw *hw)
{
struct clk_foo *foo;
foo = to_clk_foo(hw);
foo = to_clk_foo(hw);
... perform magic on foo ...
... perform magic on foo ...
return 0;
};
return 0;
};
Below is a matrix detailing which clk_ops are mandatory based upon the
hardware capabilities of that clock. A cell marked as "y" means
@ -194,41 +201,56 @@ mandatory, a cell marked as "n" implies that either including that
callback is invalid or otherwise unnecessary. Empty cells are either
optional or must be evaluated on a case-by-case basis.
clock hardware characteristics
-----------------------------------------------------------
| gate | change rate | single parent | multiplexer | root |
|------|-------------|---------------|-------------|------|
.prepare | | | | | |
.unprepare | | | | | |
| | | | | |
.enable | y | | | | |
.disable | y | | | | |
.is_enabled | y | | | | |
| | | | | |
.recalc_rate | | y | | | |
.round_rate | | y [1] | | | |
.determine_rate | | y [1] | | | |
.set_rate | | y | | | |
| | | | | |
.set_parent | | | n | y | n |
.get_parent | | | n | y | n |
| | | | | |
.recalc_accuracy| | | | | |
| | | | | |
.init | | | | | |
-----------------------------------------------------------
[1] either one of round_rate or determine_rate is required.
.. table:: clock hardware characteristics
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
| | gate | change rate | single parent | multiplexer | root |
+================+======+=============+===============+=============+======+
|.prepare | | | | | |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
|.unprepare | | | | | |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
|.enable | y | | | | |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
|.disable | y | | | | |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
|.is_enabled | y | | | | |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
|.recalc_rate | | y | | | |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
|.round_rate | | y [1]_ | | | |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
|.determine_rate | | y [1]_ | | | |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
|.set_rate | | y | | | |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
|.set_parent | | | n | y | n |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
|.get_parent | | | n | y | n |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
|.recalc_accuracy| | | | | |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
|.init | | | | | |
+----------------+------+-------------+---------------+-------------+------+
.. [1] either one of round_rate or determine_rate is required.
Finally, register your clock at run-time with a hardware-specific
registration function. This function simply populates struct clk_foo's
data and then passes the common struct clk parameters to the framework
with a call to:
with a call to::
clk_register(...)
clk_register(...)
See the basic clock types in drivers/clk/clk-*.c for examples.
See the basic clock types in ``drivers/clk/clk-*.c`` for examples.
Part 5 - Disabling clock gating of unused clocks
Disabling clock gating of unused clocks
=======================================
Sometimes during development it can be useful to be able to bypass the
default disabling of unused clocks. For example, if drivers aren't enabling
@ -239,7 +261,8 @@ are sorted out.
To bypass this disabling, include "clk_ignore_unused" in the bootargs to the
kernel.
Part 6 - Locking
Locking
=======
The common clock framework uses two global locks, the prepare lock and the
enable lock.

46
Documentation/conf.py
View File

@ -271,8 +271,7 @@ latex_elements = {
# Additional stuff for the LaTeX preamble.
'preamble': '''
% Adjust margins
\\usepackage[margin=0.5in, top=1in, bottom=1in]{geometry}
\\usepackage{ifthen}
% Allow generate some pages in landscape
\\usepackage{lscape}
@ -281,6 +280,7 @@ latex_elements = {
\\definecolor{NoteColor}{RGB}{204,255,255}
\\definecolor{WarningColor}{RGB}{255,204,204}
\\definecolor{AttentionColor}{RGB}{255,255,204}
\\definecolor{ImportantColor}{RGB}{192,255,204}
\\definecolor{OtherColor}{RGB}{204,204,204}
\\newlength{\\mynoticelength}
\\makeatletter\\newenvironment{coloredbox}[1]{%
@ -301,7 +301,12 @@ latex_elements = {
\\ifthenelse%
{\\equal{\\py@noticetype}{attention}}%
{\\colorbox{AttentionColor}{\\usebox{\\@tempboxa}}}%
{\\colorbox{OtherColor}{\\usebox{\\@tempboxa}}}%
{%
\\ifthenelse%
{\\equal{\\py@noticetype}{important}}%
{\\colorbox{ImportantColor}{\\usebox{\\@tempboxa}}}%
{\\colorbox{OtherColor}{\\usebox{\\@tempboxa}}}%
}%
}%
}%
}\\makeatother
@ -336,30 +341,51 @@ latex_elements = {
if major == 1 and minor > 3:
latex_elements['preamble'] += '\\renewcommand*{\\DUrole}[2]{ #2 }\n'
if major == 1 and minor <= 4:
latex_elements['preamble'] += '\\usepackage[margin=0.5in, top=1in, bottom=1in]{geometry}'
elif major == 1 and (minor > 5 or (minor == 5 and patch >= 3)):
latex_elements['sphinxsetup'] = 'hmargin=0.5in, vmargin=0.5in'
# Grouping the document tree into LaTeX files. List of tuples
# (source start file, target name, title,
# author, documentclass [howto, manual, or own class]).
# Sorted in alphabetical order
latex_documents = [
('doc-guide/index', 'kernel-doc-guide.tex', 'Linux Kernel Documentation Guide',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('admin-guide/index', 'linux-user.tex', 'Linux Kernel User Documentation',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('core-api/index', 'core-api.tex', 'The kernel core API manual',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('crypto/index', 'crypto-api.tex', 'Linux Kernel Crypto API manual',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('dev-tools/index', 'dev-tools.tex', 'Development tools for the Kernel',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('doc-guide/index', 'kernel-doc-guide.tex', 'Linux Kernel Documentation Guide',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('driver-api/index', 'driver-api.tex', 'The kernel driver API manual',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('input/index', 'linux-input.tex', 'The Linux input driver subsystem',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('kernel-documentation', 'kernel-documentation.tex', 'The Linux Kernel Documentation',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('process/index', 'development-process.tex', 'Linux Kernel Development Documentation',
('filesystems/index', 'filesystems.tex', 'Linux Filesystems API',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('gpu/index', 'gpu.tex', 'Linux GPU Driver Developer\'s Guide',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('input/index', 'linux-input.tex', 'The Linux input driver subsystem',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('kernel-hacking/index', 'kernel-hacking.tex', 'Unreliable Guide To Hacking The Linux Kernel',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('media/index', 'media.tex', 'Linux Media Subsystem Documentation',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('networking/index', 'networking.tex', 'Linux Networking Documentation',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('process/index', 'development-process.tex', 'Linux Kernel Development Documentation',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('security/index', 'security.tex', 'The kernel security subsystem manual',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('sh/index', 'sh.tex', 'SuperH architecture implementation manual',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('sound/index', 'sound.tex', 'Linux Sound Subsystem Documentation',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('userspace-api/index', 'userspace-api.tex', 'The Linux kernel user-space API guide',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
]
# The name of an image file (relative to this directory) to place at the top of

5
Documentation/core-api/assoc_array.rst
View File

@ -10,7 +10,10 @@ properties:
1. Objects are opaque pointers. The implementation does not care where they
point (if anywhere) or what they point to (if anything).
.. note:: Pointers to objects _must_ be zero in the least significant bit.
.. note::
Pointers to objects _must_ be zero in the least significant bit.
2. Objects do not need to contain linkage blocks for use by the array. This
permits an object to be located in multiple arrays simultaneously.

1
Documentation/core-api/index.rst
View File

@ -19,6 +19,7 @@ Core utilities
workqueue
genericirq
flexible-arrays
librs
Interfaces for kernel debugging
===============================

2
Documentation/core-api/kernel-api.rst
View File

@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ The Slab Cache
User Space Memory Access
------------------------
.. kernel-doc:: arch/x86/include/asm/uaccess_32.h
.. kernel-doc:: arch/x86/include/asm/uaccess.h
:internal:
.. kernel-doc:: arch/x86/lib/usercopy_32.c

212
Documentation/core-api/librs.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,212 @@
==========================================
Reed-Solomon Library Programming Interface
==========================================
:Author: Thomas Gleixner
Introduction
============
The generic Reed-Solomon Library provides encoding, decoding and error
correction functions.
Reed-Solomon codes are used in communication and storage applications to
ensure data integrity.
This documentation is provided for developers who want to utilize the
functions provided by the library.
Known Bugs And Assumptions
==========================
None.
Usage
=====
This chapter provides examples of how to use the library.
Initializing
------------
The init function init_rs returns a pointer to an rs decoder structure,
which holds the necessary information for encoding, decoding and error
correction with the given polynomial. It either uses an existing
matching decoder or creates a new one. On creation all the lookup tables
for fast en/decoding are created. The function may take a while, so make
sure not to call it in critical code paths.
::
/* the Reed Solomon control structure */
static struct rs_control *rs_decoder;
/* Symbolsize is 10 (bits)
* Primitive polynomial is x^10+x^3+1
* first consecutive root is 0
* primitive element to generate roots = 1
* generator polynomial degree (number of roots) = 6
*/
rs_decoder = init_rs (10, 0x409, 0, 1, 6);
Encoding
--------
The encoder calculates the Reed-Solomon code over the given data length
and stores the result in the parity buffer. Note that the parity buffer
must be initialized before calling the encoder.
The expanded data can be inverted on the fly by providing a non-zero
inversion mask. The expanded data is XOR'ed with the mask. This is used
e.g. for FLASH ECC, where the all 0xFF is inverted to an all 0x00. The
Reed-Solomon code for all 0x00 is all 0x00. The code is inverted before
storing to FLASH so it is 0xFF too. This prevents that reading from an
erased FLASH results in ECC errors.
The databytes are expanded to the given symbol size on the fly. There is
no support for encoding continuous bitstreams with a symbol size != 8 at
the moment. If it is necessary it should be not a big deal to implement
such functionality.
::
/* Parity buffer. Size = number of roots */
uint16_t par[6];
/* Initialize the parity buffer */
memset(par, 0, sizeof(par));
/* Encode 512 byte in data8. Store parity in buffer par */
encode_rs8 (rs_decoder, data8, 512, par, 0);
Decoding
--------
The decoder calculates the syndrome over the given data length and the
received parity symbols and corrects errors in the data.
If a syndrome is available from a hardware decoder then the syndrome
calculation is skipped.
The correction of the data buffer can be suppressed by providing a
correction pattern buffer and an error location buffer to the decoder.
The decoder stores the calculated error location and the correction
bitmask in the given buffers. This is useful for hardware decoders which
use a weird bit ordering scheme.
The databytes are expanded to the given symbol size on the fly. There is
no support for decoding continuous bitstreams with a symbolsize != 8 at
the moment. If it is necessary it should be not a big deal to implement
such functionality.
Decoding with syndrome calculation, direct data correction
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
::
/* Parity buffer. Size = number of roots */
uint16_t par[6];
uint8_t data[512];
int numerr;
/* Receive data */
.....
/* Receive parity */
.....
/* Decode 512 byte in data8.*/
numerr = decode_rs8 (rs_decoder, data8, par, 512, NULL, 0, NULL, 0, NULL);
Decoding with syndrome given by hardware decoder, direct data correction
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
::
/* Parity buffer. Size = number of roots */
uint16_t par[6], syn[6];
uint8_t data[512];
int numerr;
/* Receive data */
.....
/* Receive parity */
.....
/* Get syndrome from hardware decoder */
.....
/* Decode 512 byte in data8.*/
numerr = decode_rs8 (rs_decoder, data8, par, 512, syn, 0, NULL, 0, NULL);
Decoding with syndrome given by hardware decoder, no direct data correction.
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Note: It's not necessary to give data and received parity to the
decoder.
::
/* Parity buffer. Size = number of roots */
uint16_t par[6], syn[6], corr[8];
uint8_t data[512];
int numerr, errpos[8];
/* Receive data */
.....
/* Receive parity */
.....
/* Get syndrome from hardware decoder */
.....
/* Decode 512 byte in data8.*/
numerr = decode_rs8 (rs_decoder, NULL, NULL, 512, syn, 0, errpos, 0, corr);
for (i = 0; i < numerr; i++) {
do_error_correction_in_your_buffer(errpos[i], corr[i]);
}
Cleanup
-------
The function free_rs frees the allocated resources, if the caller is
the last user of the decoder.
::
/* Release resources */
free_rs(rs_decoder);
Structures
==========
This chapter contains the autogenerated documentation of the structures
which are used in the Reed-Solomon Library and are relevant for a
developer.
.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/rslib.h
:internal:
Public Functions Provided
=========================
This chapter contains the autogenerated documentation of the
Reed-Solomon functions which are exported.
.. kernel-doc:: lib/reed_solomon/reed_solomon.c
:export:
Credits
=======
The library code for encoding and decoding was written by Phil Karn.
::
Copyright 2002, Phil Karn, KA9Q
May be used under the terms of the GNU General Public License (GPL)
The wrapper functions and interfaces are written by Thomas Gleixner.
Many users have provided bugfixes, improvements and helping hands for
testing. Thanks a lot.
The following people have contributed to this document:
Thomas Gleixner\ tglx@linutronix.de

117
Documentation/cpu-load.txt
View File

@ -1,9 +1,10 @@
========
CPU load
--------
========
Linux exports various bits of information via `/proc/stat' and
`/proc/uptime' that userland tools, such as top(1), use to calculate
the average time system spent in a particular state, for example:
Linux exports various bits of information via ``/proc/stat`` and
``/proc/uptime`` that userland tools, such as top(1), use to calculate
the average time system spent in a particular state, for example::
$ iostat
Linux 2.6.18.3-exp (linmac) 02/20/2007
@ -17,7 +18,7 @@ Here the system thinks that over the default sampling period the
system spent 10.01% of the time doing work in user space, 2.92% in the
kernel, and was overall 81.63% of the time idle.
In most cases the `/proc/stat' information reflects the reality quite
In most cases the ``/proc/stat`` information reflects the reality quite
closely, however due to the nature of how/when the kernel collects
this data sometimes it can not be trusted at all.
@ -33,78 +34,78 @@ Example
-------
If we imagine the system with one task that periodically burns cycles
in the following manner:
in the following manner::
time line between two timer interrupts
|--------------------------------------|
^ ^
|_ something begins working |
|_ something goes to sleep
(only to be awaken quite soon)
time line between two timer interrupts
|--------------------------------------|
^ ^
|_ something begins working |
|_ something goes to sleep
(only to be awaken quite soon)
In the above situation the system will be 0% loaded according to the
`/proc/stat' (since the timer interrupt will always happen when the
``/proc/stat`` (since the timer interrupt will always happen when the
system is executing the idle handler), but in reality the load is
closer to 99%.
One can imagine many more situations where this behavior of the kernel
will lead to quite erratic information inside `/proc/stat'.
will lead to quite erratic information inside ``/proc/stat``::
/* gcc -o hog smallhog.c */
#include <time.h>
#include <limits.h>
#include <signal.h>
#include <sys/time.h>
#define HIST 10
/* gcc -o hog smallhog.c */
#include <time.h>
#include <limits.h>
#include <signal.h>
#include <sys/time.h>
#define HIST 10
static volatile sig_atomic_t stop;
static volatile sig_atomic_t stop;
static void sighandler (int signr)
{
(void) signr;
stop = 1;
}
static unsigned long hog (unsigned long niters)
{
stop = 0;
while (!stop && --niters);
return niters;
}
int main (void)
{
int i;
struct itimerval it = { .it_interval = { .tv_sec = 0, .tv_usec = 1 },
.it_value = { .tv_sec = 0, .tv_usec = 1 } };
sigset_t set;
unsigned long v[HIST];
double tmp = 0.0;
unsigned long n;
signal (SIGALRM, &sighandler);
setitimer (ITIMER_REAL, &it, NULL);
static void sighandler (int signr)
{
(void) signr;
stop = 1;
}
static unsigned long hog (unsigned long niters)
{
stop = 0;
while (!stop && --niters);
return niters;
}
int main (void)
{
int i;
struct itimerval it = { .it_interval = { .tv_sec = 0, .tv_usec = 1 },
.it_value = { .tv_sec = 0, .tv_usec = 1 } };
sigset_t set;
unsigned long v[HIST];
double tmp = 0.0;
unsigned long n;
signal (SIGALRM, &sighandler);
setitimer (ITIMER_REAL, &it, NULL);
hog (ULONG_MAX);
for (i = 0; i < HIST; ++i) v[i] = ULONG_MAX - hog (ULONG_MAX);
for (i = 0; i < HIST; ++i) tmp += v[i];
tmp /= HIST;
n = tmp - (tmp / 3.0);
hog (ULONG_MAX);
for (i = 0; i < HIST; ++i) v[i] = ULONG_MAX - hog (ULONG_MAX);
for (i = 0; i < HIST; ++i) tmp += v[i];
tmp /= HIST;
n = tmp - (tmp / 3.0);
sigemptyset (&set);
sigaddset (&set, SIGALRM);
sigemptyset (&set);
sigaddset (&set, SIGALRM);
for (;;) {
hog (n);
sigwait (&set, &i);
}
return 0;
}
for (;;) {
hog (n);
sigwait (&set, &i);
}
return 0;
}
References
----------
http://lkml.org/lkml/2007/2/12/6
Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt (1.8)
- http://lkml.org/lkml/2007/2/12/6
- Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt (1.8)
Thanks

35
Documentation/cputopology.txt
View File

@ -1,3 +1,6 @@
===========================================
How CPU topology info is exported via sysfs
===========================================
Export CPU topology info via sysfs. Items (attributes) are similar
to /proc/cpuinfo output of some architectures:
@ -75,24 +78,26 @@ CONFIG_SCHED_BOOK and CONFIG_DRAWER are currently only used on s390, where
they reflect the cpu and cache hierarchy.
For an architecture to support this feature, it must define some of
these macros in include/asm-XXX/topology.h:
#define topology_physical_package_id(cpu)
#define topology_core_id(cpu)
#define topology_book_id(cpu)
#define topology_drawer_id(cpu)
#define topology_sibling_cpumask(cpu)
#define topology_core_cpumask(cpu)
#define topology_book_cpumask(cpu)
#define topology_drawer_cpumask(cpu)
these macros in include/asm-XXX/topology.h::
The type of **_id macros is int.
The type of **_cpumask macros is (const) struct cpumask *. The latter
correspond with appropriate **_siblings sysfs attributes (except for
#define topology_physical_package_id(cpu)
#define topology_core_id(cpu)
#define topology_book_id(cpu)
#define topology_drawer_id(cpu)
#define topology_sibling_cpumask(cpu)
#define topology_core_cpumask(cpu)
#define topology_book_cpumask(cpu)
#define topology_drawer_cpumask(cpu)
The type of ``**_id macros`` is int.
The type of ``**_cpumask macros`` is ``(const) struct cpumask *``. The latter
correspond with appropriate ``**_siblings`` sysfs attributes (except for
topology_sibling_cpumask() which corresponds with thread_siblings).
To be consistent on all architectures, include/linux/topology.h
provides default definitions for any of the above macros that are
not defined by include/asm-XXX/topology.h:
1) physical_package_id: -1
2) core_id: 0
3) sibling_cpumask: just the given CPU
@ -107,6 +112,7 @@ Additionally, CPU topology information is provided under
/sys/devices/system/cpu and includes these files. The internal
source for the output is in brackets ("[]").
=========== ==========================================================
kernel_max: the maximum CPU index allowed by the kernel configuration.
[NR_CPUS-1]
@ -122,6 +128,7 @@ source for the output is in brackets ("[]").
present: CPUs that have been identified as being present in the
system. [cpu_present_mask]
=========== ==========================================================
The format for the above output is compatible with cpulist_parse()
[see <linux/cpumask.h>]. Some examples follow.
@ -129,7 +136,7 @@ The format for the above output is compatible with cpulist_parse()
In this example, there are 64 CPUs in the system but cpus 32-63 exceed
the kernel max which is limited to 0..31 by the NR_CPUS config option
being 32. Note also that CPUs 2 and 4-31 are not online but could be
brought online as they are both present and possible.
brought online as they are both present and possible::
kernel_max: 31
offline: 2,4-31,32-63
@ -140,7 +147,7 @@ brought online as they are both present and possible.
In this example, the NR_CPUS config option is 128, but the kernel was
started with possible_cpus=144. There are 4 CPUs in the system and cpu2
was manually taken offline (and is the only CPU that can be brought
online.)
online.)::
kernel_max: 127
offline: 2,4-127,128-143

77
Documentation/crc32.txt
View File

@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
A brief CRC tutorial.
=================================
brief tutorial on CRC computation
=================================
A CRC is a long-division remainder. You add the CRC to the message,
and the whole thing (message+CRC) is a multiple of the given
@ -8,7 +10,8 @@ remainder computed on the message+CRC is 0. This latter approach
is used by a lot of hardware implementations, and is why so many
protocols put the end-of-frame flag after the CRC.
It's actually the same long division you learned in school, except that
It's actually the same long division you learned in school, except that:
- We're working in binary, so the digits are only 0 and 1, and
- When dividing polynomials, there are no carries. Rather than add and
subtract, we just xor. Thus, we tend to get a bit sloppy about
@ -40,11 +43,12 @@ throw the quotient bit away, but subtract the appropriate multiple of
the polynomial from the remainder and we're back to where we started,
ready to process the next bit.
A big-endian CRC written this way would be coded like:
for (i = 0; i < input_bits; i++) {
multiple = remainder & 0x80000000 ? CRCPOLY : 0;
remainder = (remainder << 1 | next_input_bit()) ^ multiple;
}
A big-endian CRC written this way would be coded like::
for (i = 0; i < input_bits; i++) {
multiple = remainder & 0x80000000 ? CRCPOLY : 0;
remainder = (remainder << 1 | next_input_bit()) ^ multiple;
}
Notice how, to get at bit 32 of the shifted remainder, we look
at bit 31 of the remainder *before* shifting it.
@ -54,25 +58,26 @@ the remainder don't actually affect any decision-making until
32 bits later. Thus, the first 32 cycles of this are pretty boring.
Also, to add the CRC to a message, we need a 32-bit-long hole for it at
the end, so we have to add 32 extra cycles shifting in zeros at the
end of every message,
end of every message.
These details lead to a standard trick: rearrange merging in the
next_input_bit() until the moment it's needed. Then the first 32 cycles
can be precomputed, and merging in the final 32 zero bits to make room
for the CRC can be skipped entirely. This changes the code to:
for the CRC can be skipped entirely. This changes the code to::
for (i = 0; i < input_bits; i++) {
remainder ^= next_input_bit() << 31;
multiple = (remainder & 0x80000000) ? CRCPOLY : 0;
remainder = (remainder << 1) ^ multiple;
}
for (i = 0; i < input_bits; i++) {
remainder ^= next_input_bit() << 31;
multiple = (remainder & 0x80000000) ? CRCPOLY : 0;
remainder = (remainder << 1) ^ multiple;
}
With this optimization, the little-endian code is particularly simple:
for (i = 0; i < input_bits; i++) {
remainder ^= next_input_bit();
multiple = (remainder & 1) ? CRCPOLY : 0;
remainder = (remainder >> 1) ^ multiple;
}
With this optimization, the little-endian code is particularly simple::
for (i = 0; i < input_bits; i++) {
remainder ^= next_input_bit();
multiple = (remainder & 1) ? CRCPOLY : 0;
remainder = (remainder >> 1) ^ multiple;
}
The most significant coefficient of the remainder polynomial is stored
in the least significant bit of the binary "remainder" variable.
@ -81,23 +86,25 @@ be bit-reversed) and next_input_bit().
As long as next_input_bit is returning the bits in a sensible order, we don't
*have* to wait until the last possible moment to merge in additional bits.
We can do it 8 bits at a time rather than 1 bit at a time:
for (i = 0; i < input_bytes; i++) {
remainder ^= next_input_byte() << 24;
for (j = 0; j < 8; j++) {
multiple = (remainder & 0x80000000) ? CRCPOLY : 0;
remainder = (remainder << 1) ^ multiple;
}
}
We can do it 8 bits at a time rather than 1 bit at a time::
Or in little-endian:
for (i = 0; i < input_bytes; i++) {
remainder ^= next_input_byte();
for (j = 0; j < 8; j++) {
multiple = (remainder & 1) ? CRCPOLY : 0;
remainder = (remainder >> 1) ^ multiple;
for (i = 0; i < input_bytes; i++) {
remainder ^= next_input_byte() << 24;
for (j = 0; j < 8; j++) {
multiple = (remainder & 0x80000000) ? CRCPOLY : 0;
remainder = (remainder << 1) ^ multiple;
}
}
Or in little-endian::
for (i = 0; i < input_bytes; i++) {
remainder ^= next_input_byte();
for (j = 0; j < 8; j++) {
multiple = (remainder & 1) ? CRCPOLY : 0;
remainder = (remainder >> 1) ^ multiple;
}
}
}
If the input is a multiple of 32 bits, you can even XOR in a 32-bit
word at a time and increase the inner loop count to 32.

38
Documentation/crypto/api-samples.rst
View File

@ -155,9 +155,9 @@ Code Example For Use of Operational State Memory With SHASH
char ctx[];
};
static struct sdesc init_sdesc(struct crypto_shash *alg)
static struct sdesc *init_sdesc(struct crypto_shash *alg)
{
struct sdesc sdesc;
struct sdesc *sdesc;
int size;
size = sizeof(struct shash_desc) + crypto_shash_descsize(alg);
@ -169,15 +169,16 @@ Code Example For Use of Operational State Memory With SHASH
return sdesc;
}
static int calc_hash(struct crypto_shashalg,
const unsigned chardata, unsigned int datalen,
unsigned chardigest) {
struct sdesc sdesc;
static int calc_hash(struct crypto_shash *alg,
const unsigned char *data, unsigned int datalen,
unsigned char *digest)
{
struct sdesc *sdesc;
int ret;
sdesc = init_sdesc(alg);
if (IS_ERR(sdesc)) {
pr_info("trusted_key: can't alloc %s\n", hash_alg);
pr_info("can't alloc sdesc\n");
return PTR_ERR(sdesc);
}
@ -186,6 +187,23 @@ Code Example For Use of Operational State Memory With SHASH
return ret;
}
static int test_hash(const unsigned char *data, unsigned int datalen,
unsigned char *digest)
{
struct crypto_shash *alg;
char *hash_alg_name = "sha1-padlock-nano";
int ret;
alg = crypto_alloc_shash(hash_alg_name, CRYPTO_ALG_TYPE_SHASH, 0);
if (IS_ERR(alg)) {
pr_info("can't alloc alg %s\n", hash_alg_name);
return PTR_ERR(alg);
}
ret = calc_hash(alg, data, datalen, digest);
crypto_free_shash(alg);
return ret;
}
Code Example For Random Number Generator Usage
----------------------------------------------
@ -195,8 +213,8 @@ Code Example For Random Number Generator Usage
static int get_random_numbers(u8 *buf, unsigned int len)
{
struct crypto_rngrng = NULL;
chardrbg = "drbg_nopr_sha256"; /* Hash DRBG with SHA-256, no PR */
struct crypto_rng *rng = NULL;
char *drbg = "drbg_nopr_sha256"; /* Hash DRBG with SHA-256, no PR */
int ret;
if (!buf || !len) {
@ -207,7 +225,7 @@ Code Example For Random Number Generator Usage
rng = crypto_alloc_rng(drbg, 0, 0);
if (IS_ERR(rng)) {
pr_debug("could not allocate RNG handle for %s\n", drbg);
return -PTR_ERR(rng);
return PTR_ERR(rng);
}
ret = crypto_rng_get_bytes(rng, buf, len);

67
Documentation/crypto/asymmetric-keys.txt
View File

@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ Contents:
- Signature verification.
- Asymmetric key subtypes.
- Instantiation data parsers.
- Keyring link restrictions.
========
@ -265,7 +266,7 @@ mandatory:
The caller passes a pointer to the following struct with all of the fields
cleared, except for data, datalen and quotalen [see
Documentation/security/keys.txt].
Documentation/security/keys/core.rst].
struct key_preparsed_payload {
char *description;
@ -318,7 +319,8 @@ KEYRING LINK RESTRICTIONS
=========================
Keyrings created from userspace using add_key can be configured to check the
signature of the key being linked.
signature of the key being linked. Keys without a valid signature are not
allowed to link.
Several restriction methods are available:
@ -327,9 +329,10 @@ Several restriction methods are available:
- Option string used with KEYCTL_RESTRICT_KEYRING:
- "builtin_trusted"
The kernel builtin trusted keyring will be searched for the signing
key. The ca_keys kernel parameter also affects which keys are used for
signature verification.
The kernel builtin trusted keyring will be searched for the signing key.
If the builtin trusted keyring is not configured, all links will be
rejected. The ca_keys kernel parameter also affects which keys are used
for signature verification.
(2) Restrict using the kernel builtin and secondary trusted keyrings
@ -337,8 +340,10 @@ Several restriction methods are available:
- "builtin_and_secondary_trusted"
The kernel builtin and secondary trusted keyrings will be searched for the
signing key. The ca_keys kernel parameter also affects which keys are used
for signature verification.
signing key. If the secondary trusted keyring is not configured, this
restriction will behave like the "builtin_trusted" option. The ca_keys
kernel parameter also affects which keys are used for signature
verification.
(3) Restrict using a separate key or keyring
@ -346,7 +351,7 @@ Several restriction methods are available:
- "key_or_keyring:<key or keyring serial number>[:chain]"
Whenever a key link is requested, the link will only succeed if the key
being linked is signed by one of the designated keys. This key may be
being linked is signed by one of the designated keys. This key may be
specified directly by providing a serial number for one asymmetric key, or
a group of keys may be searched for the signing key by providing the
serial number for a keyring.
@ -354,7 +359,51 @@ Several restriction methods are available:
When the "chain" option is provided at the end of the string, the keys
within the destination keyring will also be searched for signing keys.
This allows for verification of certificate chains by adding each
cert in order (starting closest to the root) to one keyring.
certificate in order (starting closest to the root) to a keyring. For
instance, one keyring can be populated with links to a set of root
certificates, with a separate, restricted keyring set up for each
certificate chain to be validated:
# Create and populate a keyring for root certificates
root_id=`keyctl add keyring root-certs "" @s`
keyctl padd asymmetric "" $root_id < root1.cert
keyctl padd asymmetric "" $root_id < root2.cert
# Create and restrict a keyring for the certificate chain
chain_id=`keyctl add keyring chain "" @s`
keyctl restrict_keyring $chain_id asymmetric key_or_keyring:$root_id:chain
# Attempt to add each certificate in the chain, starting with the
# certificate closest to the root.
keyctl padd asymmetric "" $chain_id < intermediateA.cert
keyctl padd asymmetric "" $chain_id < intermediateB.cert
keyctl padd asymmetric "" $chain_id < end-entity.cert
If the final end-entity certificate is successfully added to the "chain"
keyring, we can be certain that it has a valid signing chain going back to
one of the root certificates.
A single keyring can be used to verify a chain of signatures by
restricting the keyring after linking the root certificate:
# Create a keyring for the certificate chain and add the root
chain2_id=`keyctl add keyring chain2 "" @s`
keyctl padd asymmetric "" $chain2_id < root1.cert
# Restrict the keyring that already has root1.cert linked. The cert
# will remain linked by the keyring.
keyctl restrict_keyring $chain2_id asymmetric key_or_keyring:0:chain
# Attempt to add each certificate in the chain, starting with the
# certificate closest to the root.
keyctl padd asymmetric "" $chain2_id < intermediateA.cert
keyctl padd asymmetric "" $chain2_id < intermediateB.cert
keyctl padd asymmetric "" $chain2_id < end-entity.cert
If the final end-entity certificate is successfully added to the "chain2"
keyring, we can be certain that there is a valid signing chain going back
to the root certificate that was added before the keyring was restricted.
In all of these cases, if the signing key is found the signature of the key to
be linked will be verified using the signing key. The requested key is added

10
Documentation/crypto/conf.py Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
# -*- coding: utf-8; mode: python -*-
project = 'Linux Kernel Crypto API'
tags.add("subproject")
latex_documents = [
('index', 'crypto-api.tex', 'Linux Kernel Crypto API manual',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
]

2
Documentation/crypto/userspace-if.rst
View File

@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ boundary. Non-aligned data can be used as well, but may require more
operations of the kernel which would defeat the speed gains obtained
from the zero-copy interface.
The system-interent limit for the size of one zero-copy operation is 16
The system-inherent limit for the size of one zero-copy operation is 16
pages. If more data is to be sent to AF_ALG, user space must slice the
input into segments with a maximum size of 16 pages.

24
Documentation/dcdbas.txt
View File

@ -1,4 +1,9 @@
===================================
Dell Systems Management Base Driver
===================================
Overview
========
The Dell Systems Management Base Driver provides a sysfs interface for
systems management software such as Dell OpenManage to perform system
@ -17,6 +22,7 @@ more information about the libsmbios project.
System Management Interrupt
===========================
On some Dell systems, systems management software must access certain
management information via a system management interrupt (SMI). The SMI data
@ -24,12 +30,12 @@ buffer must reside in 32-bit address space, and the physical address of the
buffer is required for the SMI. The driver maintains the memory required for
the SMI and provides a way for the application to generate the SMI.
The driver creates the following sysfs entries for systems management
software to perform these system management interrupts:
software to perform these system management interrupts::
/sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/smi_data
/sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/smi_data_buf_phys_addr
/sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/smi_data_buf_size
/sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/smi_request
/sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/smi_data
/sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/smi_data_buf_phys_addr
/sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/smi_data_buf_size
/sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/smi_request
Systems management software must perform the following steps to execute
a SMI using this driver:
@ -43,6 +49,7 @@ a SMI using this driver:
Host Control Action
===================
Dell OpenManage supports a host control feature that allows the administrator
to perform a power cycle or power off of the system after the OS has finished
@ -69,12 +76,14 @@ power off host control action using this driver:
Host Control SMI Type
=====================
The following table shows the value to write to host_control_smi_type to
perform a power cycle or power off host control action:
=================== =====================
PowerEdge System Host Control SMI Type
---------------- ---------------------
=================== =====================
300 HC_SMITYPE_TYPE1
1300 HC_SMITYPE_TYPE1
1400 HC_SMITYPE_TYPE2
@ -87,5 +96,4 @@ PowerEdge System Host Control SMI Type
1655MC HC_SMITYPE_TYPE2
700 HC_SMITYPE_TYPE3
750 HC_SMITYPE_TYPE3
=================== =====================

21
Documentation/debugging-via-ohci1394.txt
View File

@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
Using physical DMA provided by OHCI-1394 FireWire controllers for debugging
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
===========================================================================
Using physical DMA provided by OHCI-1394 FireWire controllers for debugging
===========================================================================
Introduction
------------
@ -91,10 +91,10 @@ Step-by-step instructions for using firescope with early OHCI initialization:
1) Verify that your hardware is supported:
Load the firewire-ohci module and check your kernel logs.
You should see a line similar to
You should see a line similar to::
firewire_ohci 0000:15:00.1: added OHCI v1.0 device as card 2, 4 IR + 4 IT
... contexts, quirks 0x11
firewire_ohci 0000:15:00.1: added OHCI v1.0 device as card 2, 4 IR + 4 IT
... contexts, quirks 0x11
when loading the driver. If you have no supported controller, many PCI,
CardBus and even some Express cards which are fully compliant to OHCI-1394
@ -113,9 +113,9 @@ Step-by-step instructions for using firescope with early OHCI initialization:
stable connection and has matching connectors (there are small 4-pin and
large 6-pin FireWire ports) will do.
If an driver is running on both machines you should see a line like
If an driver is running on both machines you should see a line like::
firewire_core 0000:15:00.1: created device fw1: GUID 00061b0020105917, S400
firewire_core 0000:15:00.1: created device fw1: GUID 00061b0020105917, S400
on both machines in the kernel log when the cable is plugged in
and connects the two machines.
@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Step-by-step instructions for using firescope with early OHCI initialization:
3) Test physical DMA using firescope:
On the debug host, make sure that /dev/fw* is accessible,
then start firescope:
then start firescope::
$ firescope
Port 0 (/dev/fw1) opened, 2 nodes detected
@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Step-by-step instructions for using firescope with early OHCI initialization:
host loaded, reboot the debugged machine, booting the kernel which has
CONFIG_PROVIDE_OHCI1394_DMA_INIT enabled, with the option ohci1394_dma=early.
Then, on the debugging host, run firescope, for example by using -A:
Then, on the debugging host, run firescope, for example by using -A::
firescope -A System.map-of-debug-target-kernel
@ -178,6 +178,7 @@ Step-by-step instructions for using firescope with early OHCI initialization:
Notes
-----
Documentation and specifications: http://halobates.de/firewire/
FireWire is a trademark of Apple Inc. - for more information please refer to:

81
Documentation/dell_rbu.txt
View File

@ -1,18 +1,30 @@
Purpose:
Demonstrate the usage of the new open sourced rbu (Remote BIOS Update) driver
=============================================================
Usage of the new open sourced rbu (Remote BIOS Update) driver
=============================================================
Purpose
=======
Document demonstrating the use of the Dell Remote BIOS Update driver.
for updating BIOS images on Dell servers and desktops.
Scope:
Scope
=====
This document discusses the functionality of the rbu driver only.
It does not cover the support needed from applications to enable the BIOS to
update itself with the image downloaded in to the memory.
Overview:
Overview
========
This driver works with Dell OpenManage or Dell Update Packages for updating
the BIOS on Dell servers (starting from servers sold since 1999), desktops
and notebooks (starting from those sold in 2005).
Please go to http://support.dell.com register and you can find info on
OpenManage and Dell Update packages (DUP).
Libsmbios can also be used to update BIOS on Dell systems go to
http://linux.dell.com/libsmbios/ for details.
@ -22,6 +34,7 @@ of physical pages having the BIOS image. In case of packetized the app
using the driver breaks the image in to packets of fixed sizes and the driver
would place each packet in contiguous physical memory. The driver also
maintains a link list of packets for reading them back.
If the dell_rbu driver is unloaded all the allocated memory is freed.
The rbu driver needs to have an application (as mentioned above)which will
@ -30,28 +43,33 @@ inform the BIOS to enable the update in the next system reboot.
The user should not unload the rbu driver after downloading the BIOS image
or updating.
The driver load creates the following directories under the /sys file system.
/sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/loading
/sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/data
/sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/image_type
/sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/data
/sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/packet_size
The driver load creates the following directories under the /sys file system::
/sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/loading
/sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/data
/sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/image_type
/sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/data
/sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/packet_size
The driver supports two types of update mechanism; monolithic and packetized.
These update mechanism depends upon the BIOS currently running on the system.
Most of the Dell systems support a monolithic update where the BIOS image is
copied to a single contiguous block of physical memory.
In case of packet mechanism the single memory can be broken in smaller chunks
of contiguous memory and the BIOS image is scattered in these packets.
By default the driver uses monolithic memory for the update type. This can be
changed to packets during the driver load time by specifying the load
parameter image_type=packet. This can also be changed later as below
echo packet > /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/image_type
parameter image_type=packet. This can also be changed later as below::
echo packet > /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/image_type
In packet update mode the packet size has to be given before any packets can
be downloaded. It is done as below
echo XXXX > /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/packet_size
be downloaded. It is done as below::
echo XXXX > /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/packet_size
In the packet update mechanism, the user needs to create a new file having
packets of data arranged back to back. It can be done as follows
The user creates packets header, gets the chunk of the BIOS image and
@ -60,41 +78,54 @@ added together should match the specified packet_size. This makes one
packet, the user needs to create more such packets out of the entire BIOS
image file and then arrange all these packets back to back in to one single
file.
This file is then copied to /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/data.
Once this file gets to the driver, the driver extracts packet_size data from
the file and spreads it across the physical memory in contiguous packet_sized
space.
This method makes sure that all the packets get to the driver in a single operation.
In monolithic update the user simply get the BIOS image (.hdr file) and copies
to the data file as is without any change to the BIOS image itself.
Do the steps below to download the BIOS image.
1) echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/loading
2) cp bios_image.hdr /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/data
3) echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/loading
The /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/ entries will remain till the following is
done.
echo -1 > /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/loading
::
echo -1 > /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/loading
Until this step is completed the driver cannot be unloaded.
Also echoing either mono, packet or init in to image_type will free up the
memory allocated by the driver.
If a user by accident executes steps 1 and 3 above without executing step 2;
it will make the /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/ entries disappear.
The entries can be recreated by doing the following
echo init > /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/image_type
NOTE: echoing init in image_type does not change it original value.
The entries can be recreated by doing the following::
echo init > /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/image_type
.. note:: echoing init in image_type does not change it original value.
Also the driver provides /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/data readonly file to
read back the image downloaded.
NOTE:
This driver requires a patch for firmware_class.c which has the modified
request_firmware_nowait function.
Also after updating the BIOS image a user mode application needs to execute
code which sends the BIOS update request to the BIOS. So on the next reboot
the BIOS knows about the new image downloaded and it updates itself.
Also don't unload the rbu driver if the image has to be updated.
.. note::
This driver requires a patch for firmware_class.c which has the modified
request_firmware_nowait function.
Also after updating the BIOS image a user mode application needs to execute
code which sends the BIOS update request to the BIOS. So on the next reboot
the BIOS knows about the new image downloaded and it updates itself.
Also don't unload the rbu driver if the image has to be updated.

2
Documentation/dev-tools/index.rst
View File

@ -23,6 +23,8 @@ whole; patches welcome!
kmemleak
kmemcheck
gdb-kernel-debugging
kgdb
kselftest
.. only:: subproject and html

907
Documentation/dev-tools/kgdb.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,907 @@
=================================================
Using kgdb, kdb and the kernel debugger internals
=================================================
:Author: Jason Wessel
Introduction
============
The kernel has two different debugger front ends (kdb and kgdb) which
interface to the debug core. It is possible to use either of the
debugger front ends and dynamically transition between them if you
configure the kernel properly at compile and runtime.
Kdb is simplistic shell-style interface which you can use on a system
console with a keyboard or serial console. You can use it to inspect
memory, registers, process lists, dmesg, and even set breakpoints to
stop in a certain location. Kdb is not a source level debugger, although
you can set breakpoints and execute some basic kernel run control. Kdb
is mainly aimed at doing some analysis to aid in development or
diagnosing kernel problems. You can access some symbols by name in
kernel built-ins or in kernel modules if the code was built with
``CONFIG_KALLSYMS``.
Kgdb is intended to be used as a source level debugger for the Linux
kernel. It is used along with gdb to debug a Linux kernel. The
expectation is that gdb can be used to "break in" to the kernel to
inspect memory, variables and look through call stack information
similar to the way an application developer would use gdb to debug an
application. It is possible to place breakpoints in kernel code and
perform some limited execution stepping.
Two machines are required for using kgdb. One of these machines is a
development machine and the other is the target machine. The kernel to
be debugged runs on the target machine. The development machine runs an
instance of gdb against the vmlinux file which contains the symbols (not
a boot image such as bzImage, zImage, uImage...). In gdb the developer
specifies the connection parameters and connects to kgdb. The type of
connection a developer makes with gdb depends on the availability of
kgdb I/O modules compiled as built-ins or loadable kernel modules in the
test machine's kernel.
Compiling a kernel
==================
- In order to enable compilation of kdb, you must first enable kgdb.
- The kgdb test compile options are described in the kgdb test suite
chapter.
Kernel config options for kgdb
------------------------------
To enable ``CONFIG_KGDB`` you should look under
:menuselection:`Kernel hacking --> Kernel debugging` and select
:menuselection:`KGDB: kernel debugger`.
While it is not a hard requirement that you have symbols in your vmlinux
file, gdb tends not to be very useful without the symbolic data, so you
will want to turn on ``CONFIG_DEBUG_INFO`` which is called
:menuselection:`Compile the kernel with debug info` in the config menu.
It is advised, but not required, that you turn on the
``CONFIG_FRAME_POINTER`` kernel option which is called :menuselection:`Compile
the kernel with frame pointers` in the config menu. This option inserts code
to into the compiled executable which saves the frame information in
registers or on the stack at different points which allows a debugger
such as gdb to more accurately construct stack back traces while
debugging the kernel.
If the architecture that you are using supports the kernel option
``CONFIG_STRICT_KERNEL_RWX``, you should consider turning it off. This
option will prevent the use of software breakpoints because it marks
certain regions of the kernel's memory space as read-only. If kgdb
supports it for the architecture you are using, you can use hardware
breakpoints if you desire to run with the ``CONFIG_STRICT_KERNEL_RWX``
option turned on, else you need to turn off this option.
Next you should choose one of more I/O drivers to interconnect debugging
host and debugged target. Early boot debugging requires a KGDB I/O
driver that supports early debugging and the driver must be built into
the kernel directly. Kgdb I/O driver configuration takes place via
kernel or module parameters which you can learn more about in the in the
section that describes the parameter kgdboc.
Here is an example set of ``.config`` symbols to enable or disable for kgdb::
# CONFIG_STRICT_KERNEL_RWX is not set
CONFIG_FRAME_POINTER=y
CONFIG_KGDB=y
CONFIG_KGDB_SERIAL_CONSOLE=y
Kernel config options for kdb
-----------------------------
Kdb is quite a bit more complex than the simple gdbstub sitting on top
of the kernel's debug core. Kdb must implement a shell, and also adds
some helper functions in other parts of the kernel, responsible for
printing out interesting data such as what you would see if you ran
``lsmod``, or ``ps``. In order to build kdb into the kernel you follow the
same steps as you would for kgdb.
The main config option for kdb is ``CONFIG_KGDB_KDB`` which is called
:menuselection:`KGDB_KDB: include kdb frontend for kgdb` in the config menu.
In theory you would have already also selected an I/O driver such as the
``CONFIG_KGDB_SERIAL_CONSOLE`` interface if you plan on using kdb on a
serial port, when you were configuring kgdb.
If you want to use a PS/2-style keyboard with kdb, you would select
``CONFIG_KDB_KEYBOARD`` which is called :menuselection:`KGDB_KDB: keyboard as
input device` in the config menu. The ``CONFIG_KDB_KEYBOARD`` option is not
used for anything in the gdb interface to kgdb. The ``CONFIG_KDB_KEYBOARD``
option only works with kdb.
Here is an example set of ``.config`` symbols to enable/disable kdb::
# CONFIG_STRICT_KERNEL_RWX is not set
CONFIG_FRAME_POINTER=y
CONFIG_KGDB=y
CONFIG_KGDB_SERIAL_CONSOLE=y
CONFIG_KGDB_KDB=y
CONFIG_KDB_KEYBOARD=y
Kernel Debugger Boot Arguments
==============================
This section describes the various runtime kernel parameters that affect
the configuration of the kernel debugger. The following chapter covers
using kdb and kgdb as well as providing some examples of the
configuration parameters.
Kernel parameter: kgdboc
------------------------
The kgdboc driver was originally an abbreviation meant to stand for
"kgdb over console". Today it is the primary mechanism to configure how
to communicate from gdb to kgdb as well as the devices you want to use
to interact with the kdb shell.
For kgdb/gdb, kgdboc is designed to work with a single serial port. It
is intended to cover the circumstance where you want to use a serial
console as your primary console as well as using it to perform kernel
debugging. It is also possible to use kgdb on a serial port which is not
designated as a system console. Kgdboc may be configured as a kernel
built-in or a kernel loadable module. You can only make use of
``kgdbwait`` and early debugging if you build kgdboc into the kernel as
a built-in.
Optionally you can elect to activate kms (Kernel Mode Setting)
integration. When you use kms with kgdboc and you have a video driver
that has atomic mode setting hooks, it is possible to enter the debugger
on the graphics console. When the kernel execution is resumed, the
previous graphics mode will be restored. This integration can serve as a
useful tool to aid in diagnosing crashes or doing analysis of memory
with kdb while allowing the full graphics console applications to run.
kgdboc arguments
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Usage::
kgdboc=[kms][[,]kbd][[,]serial_device][,baud]
The order listed above must be observed if you use any of the optional
configurations together.
Abbreviations:
- kms = Kernel Mode Setting
- kbd = Keyboard
You can configure kgdboc to use the keyboard, and/or a serial device
depending on if you are using kdb and/or kgdb, in one of the following
scenarios. The order listed above must be observed if you use any of the
optional configurations together. Using kms + only gdb is generally not
a useful combination.
Using loadable module or built-in
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
1. As a kernel built-in:
Use the kernel boot argument::
kgdboc=<tty-device>,[baud]
2. As a kernel loadable module:
Use the command::
modprobe kgdboc kgdboc=<tty-device>,[baud]
Here are two examples of how you might format the kgdboc string. The
first is for an x86 target using the first serial port. The second
example is for the ARM Versatile AB using the second serial port.
1. ``kgdboc=ttyS0,115200``
2. ``kgdboc=ttyAMA1,115200``
Configure kgdboc at runtime with sysfs
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
At run time you can enable or disable kgdboc by echoing a parameters
into the sysfs. Here are two examples:
1. Enable kgdboc on ttyS0::
echo ttyS0 > /sys/module/kgdboc/parameters/kgdboc
2. Disable kgdboc::
echo "" > /sys/module/kgdboc/parameters/kgdboc
.. note::
You do not need to specify the baud if you are configuring the
console on tty which is already configured or open.
More examples
^^^^^^^^^^^^^
You can configure kgdboc to use the keyboard, and/or a serial device
depending on if you are using kdb and/or kgdb, in one of the following
scenarios.
1. kdb and kgdb over only a serial port::
kgdboc=<serial_device>[,baud]
Example::
kgdboc=ttyS0,115200
2. kdb and kgdb with keyboard and a serial port::
kgdboc=kbd,<serial_device>[,baud]
Example::
kgdboc=kbd,ttyS0,115200
3. kdb with a keyboard::
kgdboc=kbd
4. kdb with kernel mode setting::
kgdboc=kms,kbd
5. kdb with kernel mode setting and kgdb over a serial port::
kgdboc=kms,kbd,ttyS0,115200
.. note::
Kgdboc does not support interrupting the target via the gdb remote
protocol. You must manually send a :kbd:`SysRq-G` unless you have a proxy
that splits console output to a terminal program. A console proxy has a
separate TCP port for the debugger and a separate TCP port for the
"human" console. The proxy can take care of sending the :kbd:`SysRq-G`
for you.
When using kgdboc with no debugger proxy, you can end up connecting the
debugger at one of two entry points. If an exception occurs after you
have loaded kgdboc, a message should print on the console stating it is
waiting for the debugger. In this case you disconnect your terminal
program and then connect the debugger in its place. If you want to
interrupt the target system and forcibly enter a debug session you have
to issue a :kbd:`Sysrq` sequence and then type the letter :kbd:`g`. Then you
disconnect the terminal session and connect gdb. Your options if you
don't like this are to hack gdb to send the :kbd:`SysRq-G` for you as well as
on the initial connect, or to use a debugger proxy that allows an
unmodified gdb to do the debugging.
Kernel parameter: ``kgdbwait``
------------------------------
The Kernel command line option ``kgdbwait`` makes kgdb wait for a
debugger connection during booting of a kernel. You can only use this
option if you compiled a kgdb I/O driver into the kernel and you
specified the I/O driver configuration as a kernel command line option.
The kgdbwait parameter should always follow the configuration parameter
for the kgdb I/O driver in the kernel command line else the I/O driver
will not be configured prior to asking the kernel to use it to wait.
The kernel will stop and wait as early as the I/O driver and
architecture allows when you use this option. If you build the kgdb I/O
driver as a loadable kernel module kgdbwait will not do anything.
Kernel parameter: ``kgdbcon``
-----------------------------
The ``kgdbcon`` feature allows you to see :c:func:`printk` messages inside gdb
while gdb is connected to the kernel. Kdb does not make use of the kgdbcon
feature.
Kgdb supports using the gdb serial protocol to send console messages to
the debugger when the debugger is connected and running. There are two
ways to activate this feature.
1. Activate with the kernel command line option::
kgdbcon
2. Use sysfs before configuring an I/O driver::
echo 1 > /sys/module/kgdb/parameters/kgdb_use_con
.. note::
If you do this after you configure the kgdb I/O driver, the
setting will not take effect until the next point the I/O is
reconfigured.
.. important::
You cannot use kgdboc + kgdbcon on a tty that is an
active system console. An example of incorrect usage is::
console=ttyS0,115200 kgdboc=ttyS0 kgdbcon
It is possible to use this option with kgdboc on a tty that is not a
system console.
Run time parameter: ``kgdbreboot``
----------------------------------
The kgdbreboot feature allows you to change how the debugger deals with
the reboot notification. You have 3 choices for the behavior. The
default behavior is always set to 0.
.. tabularcolumns:: |p{0.4cm}|p{11.5cm}|p{5.6cm}|
.. flat-table::
:widths: 1 10 8
* - 1
- ``echo -1 > /sys/module/debug_core/parameters/kgdbreboot``
- Ignore the reboot notification entirely.
* - 2
- ``echo 0 > /sys/module/debug_core/parameters/kgdbreboot``
- Send the detach message to any attached debugger client.
* - 3
- ``echo 1 > /sys/module/debug_core/parameters/kgdbreboot``
- Enter the debugger on reboot notify.
Using kdb
=========
Quick start for kdb on a serial port
------------------------------------
This is a quick example of how to use kdb.
1. Configure kgdboc at boot using kernel parameters::
console=ttyS0,115200 kgdboc=ttyS0,115200
OR
Configure kgdboc after the kernel has booted; assuming you are using
a serial port console::
echo ttyS0 > /sys/module/kgdboc/parameters/kgdboc
2. Enter the kernel debugger manually or by waiting for an oops or
fault. There are several ways you can enter the kernel debugger
manually; all involve using the :kbd:`SysRq-G`, which means you must have
enabled ``CONFIG_MAGIC_SysRq=y`` in your kernel config.
- When logged in as root or with a super user session you can run::
echo g > /proc/sysrq-trigger
- Example using minicom 2.2
Press: :kbd:`CTRL-A` :kbd:`f` :kbd:`g`
- When you have telneted to a terminal server that supports sending
a remote break
Press: :kbd:`CTRL-]`
Type in: ``send break``
Press: :kbd:`Enter` :kbd:`g`
3. From the kdb prompt you can run the ``help`` command to see a complete
list of the commands that are available.
Some useful commands in kdb include:
=========== =================================================================
``lsmod`` Shows where kernel modules are loaded
``ps`` Displays only the active processes
``ps A`` Shows all the processes
``summary`` Shows kernel version info and memory usage
``bt`` Get a backtrace of the current process using :c:func:`dump_stack`
``dmesg`` View the kernel syslog buffer
``go`` Continue the system
=========== =================================================================
4. When you are done using kdb you need to consider rebooting the system
or using the ``go`` command to resuming normal kernel execution. If you
have paused the kernel for a lengthy period of time, applications
that rely on timely networking or anything to do with real wall clock
time could be adversely affected, so you should take this into
consideration when using the kernel debugger.
Quick start for kdb using a keyboard connected console
------------------------------------------------------
This is a quick example of how to use kdb with a keyboard.
1. Configure kgdboc at boot using kernel parameters::
kgdboc=kbd
OR
Configure kgdboc after the kernel has booted::
echo kbd > /sys/module/kgdboc/parameters/kgdboc
2. Enter the kernel debugger manually or by waiting for an oops or
fault. There are several ways you can enter the kernel debugger
manually; all involve using the :kbd:`SysRq-G`, which means you must have
enabled ``CONFIG_MAGIC_SysRq=y`` in your kernel config.
- When logged in as root or with a super user session you can run::
echo g > /proc/sysrq-trigger
- Example using a laptop keyboard:
Press and hold down: :kbd:`Alt`
Press and hold down: :kbd:`Fn`
Press and release the key with the label: :kbd:`SysRq`
Release: :kbd:`Fn`
Press and release: :kbd:`g`
Release: :kbd:`Alt`
- Example using a PS/2 101-key keyboard
Press and hold down: :kbd:`Alt`
Press and release the key with the label: :kbd:`SysRq`
Press and release: :kbd:`g`
Release: :kbd:`Alt`
3. Now type in a kdb command such as ``help``, ``dmesg``, ``bt`` or ``go`` to
continue kernel execution.
Using kgdb / gdb
================
In order to use kgdb you must activate it by passing configuration
information to one of the kgdb I/O drivers. If you do not pass any
configuration information kgdb will not do anything at all. Kgdb will
only actively hook up to the kernel trap hooks if a kgdb I/O driver is
loaded and configured. If you unconfigure a kgdb I/O driver, kgdb will
unregister all the kernel hook points.
All kgdb I/O drivers can be reconfigured at run time, if
``CONFIG_SYSFS`` and ``CONFIG_MODULES`` are enabled, by echo'ing a new
config string to ``/sys/module/<driver>/parameter/<option>``. The driver
can be unconfigured by passing an empty string. You cannot change the
configuration while the debugger is attached. Make sure to detach the
debugger with the ``detach`` command prior to trying to unconfigure a
kgdb I/O driver.
Connecting with gdb to a serial port
------------------------------------
1. Configure kgdboc
Configure kgdboc at boot using kernel parameters::
kgdboc=ttyS0,115200
OR
Configure kgdboc after the kernel has booted::
echo ttyS0 > /sys/module/kgdboc/parameters/kgdboc
2. Stop kernel execution (break into the debugger)
In order to connect to gdb via kgdboc, the kernel must first be
stopped. There are several ways to stop the kernel which include
using kgdbwait as a boot argument, via a :kbd:`SysRq-G`, or running the
kernel until it takes an exception where it waits for the debugger to
attach.
- When logged in as root or with a super user session you can run::
echo g > /proc/sysrq-trigger
- Example using minicom 2.2
Press: :kbd:`CTRL-A` :kbd:`f` :kbd:`g`
- When you have telneted to a terminal server that supports sending
a remote break
Press: :kbd:`CTRL-]`
Type in: ``send break``
Press: :kbd:`Enter` :kbd:`g`
3. Connect from gdb
Example (using a directly connected port)::
% gdb ./vmlinux
(gdb) set remotebaud 115200
(gdb) target remote /dev/ttyS0
Example (kgdb to a terminal server on TCP port 2012)::
% gdb ./vmlinux
(gdb) target remote 192.168.2.2:2012
Once connected, you can debug a kernel the way you would debug an
application program.
If you are having problems connecting or something is going seriously
wrong while debugging, it will most often be the case that you want
to enable gdb to be verbose about its target communications. You do
this prior to issuing the ``target remote`` command by typing in::
set debug remote 1
Remember if you continue in gdb, and need to "break in" again, you need
to issue an other :kbd:`SysRq-G`. It is easy to create a simple entry point by
putting a breakpoint at ``sys_sync`` and then you can run ``sync`` from a
shell or script to break into the debugger.
kgdb and kdb interoperability
=============================
It is possible to transition between kdb and kgdb dynamically. The debug
core will remember which you used the last time and automatically start
in the same mode.
Switching between kdb and kgdb
------------------------------
Switching from kgdb to kdb
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
There are two ways to switch from kgdb to kdb: you can use gdb to issue
a maintenance packet, or you can blindly type the command ``$3#33``.
Whenever the kernel debugger stops in kgdb mode it will print the
message ``KGDB or $3#33 for KDB``. It is important to note that you have
to type the sequence correctly in one pass. You cannot type a backspace
or delete because kgdb will interpret that as part of the debug stream.
1. Change from kgdb to kdb by blindly typing::
$3#33
2. Change from kgdb to kdb with gdb::
maintenance packet 3
.. note::
Now you must kill gdb. Typically you press :kbd:`CTRL-Z` and issue
the command::
kill -9 %
Change from kdb to kgdb
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
There are two ways you can change from kdb to kgdb. You can manually
enter kgdb mode by issuing the kgdb command from the kdb shell prompt,
or you can connect gdb while the kdb shell prompt is active. The kdb
shell looks for the typical first commands that gdb would issue with the
gdb remote protocol and if it sees one of those commands it
automatically changes into kgdb mode.
1. From kdb issue the command::
kgdb
Now disconnect your terminal program and connect gdb in its place
2. At the kdb prompt, disconnect the terminal program and connect gdb in
its place.
Running kdb commands from gdb
-----------------------------
It is possible to run a limited set of kdb commands from gdb, using the
gdb monitor command. You don't want to execute any of the run control or
breakpoint operations, because it can disrupt the state of the kernel
debugger. You should be using gdb for breakpoints and run control
operations if you have gdb connected. The more useful commands to run
are things like lsmod, dmesg, ps or possibly some of the memory
information commands. To see all the kdb commands you can run
``monitor help``.
Example::
(gdb) monitor ps
1 idle process (state I) and
27 sleeping system daemon (state M) processes suppressed,
use 'ps A' to see all.
Task Addr Pid Parent [*] cpu State Thread Command
0xc78291d0 1 0 0 0 S 0xc7829404 init
0xc7954150 942 1 0 0 S 0xc7954384 dropbear
0xc78789c0 944 1 0 0 S 0xc7878bf4 sh
(gdb)
kgdb Test Suite
===============
When kgdb is enabled in the kernel config you can also elect to enable
the config parameter ``KGDB_TESTS``. Turning this on will enable a special
kgdb I/O module which is designed to test the kgdb internal functions.
The kgdb tests are mainly intended for developers to test the kgdb
internals as well as a tool for developing a new kgdb architecture
specific implementation. These tests are not really for end users of the
Linux kernel. The primary source of documentation would be to look in
the ``drivers/misc/kgdbts.c`` file.
The kgdb test suite can also be configured at compile time to run the
core set of tests by setting the kernel config parameter
``KGDB_TESTS_ON_BOOT``. This particular option is aimed at automated
regression testing and does not require modifying the kernel boot config
arguments. If this is turned on, the kgdb test suite can be disabled by
specifying ``kgdbts=`` as a kernel boot argument.
Kernel Debugger Internals
=========================
Architecture Specifics
----------------------
The kernel debugger is organized into a number of components:
1. The debug core
The debug core is found in ``kernel/debugger/debug_core.c``. It
contains:
- A generic OS exception handler which includes sync'ing the
processors into a stopped state on an multi-CPU system.
- The API to talk to the kgdb I/O drivers
- The API to make calls to the arch-specific kgdb implementation
- The logic to perform safe memory reads and writes to memory while
using the debugger
- A full implementation for software breakpoints unless overridden
by the arch
- The API to invoke either the kdb or kgdb frontend to the debug
core.
- The structures and callback API for atomic kernel mode setting.
.. note:: kgdboc is where the kms callbacks are invoked.
2. kgdb arch-specific implementation
This implementation is generally found in ``arch/*/kernel/kgdb.c``. As
an example, ``arch/x86/kernel/kgdb.c`` contains the specifics to
implement HW breakpoint as well as the initialization to dynamically
register and unregister for the trap handlers on this architecture.
The arch-specific portion implements:
- contains an arch-specific trap catcher which invokes
:c:func:`kgdb_handle_exception` to start kgdb about doing its work
- translation to and from gdb specific packet format to :c:type:`pt_regs`
- Registration and unregistration of architecture specific trap
hooks
- Any special exception handling and cleanup
- NMI exception handling and cleanup
- (optional) HW breakpoints
3. gdbstub frontend (aka kgdb)
The gdbstub is located in ``kernel/debug/gdbstub.c``. It contains:
- All the logic to implement the gdb serial protocol
4. kdb frontend
The kdb debugger shell is broken down into a number of components.
The kdb core is located in kernel/debug/kdb. There are a number of
helper functions in some of the other kernel components to make it
possible for kdb to examine and report information about the kernel
without taking locks that could cause a kernel deadlock. The kdb core
contains implements the following functionality.
- A simple shell
- The kdb core command set
- A registration API to register additional kdb shell commands.
- A good example of a self-contained kdb module is the ``ftdump``
command for dumping the ftrace buffer. See:
``kernel/trace/trace_kdb.c``
- For an example of how to dynamically register a new kdb command
you can build the kdb_hello.ko kernel module from
``samples/kdb/kdb_hello.c``. To build this example you can set
``CONFIG_SAMPLES=y`` and ``CONFIG_SAMPLE_KDB=m`` in your kernel
config. Later run ``modprobe kdb_hello`` and the next time you
enter the kdb shell, you can run the ``hello`` command.
- The implementation for :c:func:`kdb_printf` which emits messages directly
to I/O drivers, bypassing the kernel log.
- SW / HW breakpoint management for the kdb shell
5. kgdb I/O driver
Each kgdb I/O driver has to provide an implementation for the
following:
- configuration via built-in or module
- dynamic configuration and kgdb hook registration calls
- read and write character interface
- A cleanup handler for unconfiguring from the kgdb core
- (optional) Early debug methodology
Any given kgdb I/O driver has to operate very closely with the
hardware and must do it in such a way that does not enable interrupts
or change other parts of the system context without completely
restoring them. The kgdb core will repeatedly "poll" a kgdb I/O
driver for characters when it needs input. The I/O driver is expected
to return immediately if there is no data available. Doing so allows
for the future possibility to touch watchdog hardware in such a way
as to have a target system not reset when these are enabled.
If you are intent on adding kgdb architecture specific support for a new
architecture, the architecture should define ``HAVE_ARCH_KGDB`` in the
architecture specific Kconfig file. This will enable kgdb for the
architecture, and at that point you must create an architecture specific
kgdb implementation.
There are a few flags which must be set on every architecture in their
``asm/kgdb.h`` file. These are:
- ``NUMREGBYTES``:
The size in bytes of all of the registers, so that we
can ensure they will all fit into a packet.
- ``BUFMAX``:
The size in bytes of the buffer GDB will read into. This must
be larger than NUMREGBYTES.
- ``CACHE_FLUSH_IS_SAFE``:
Set to 1 if it is always safe to call
flush_cache_range or flush_icache_range. On some architectures,
these functions may not be safe to call on SMP since we keep other
CPUs in a holding pattern.
There are also the following functions for the common backend, found in
``kernel/kgdb.c``, that must be supplied by the architecture-specific
backend unless marked as (optional), in which case a default function
maybe used if the architecture does not need to provide a specific
implementation.
.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/kgdb.h
:internal:
kgdboc internals
----------------
kgdboc and uarts
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The kgdboc driver is actually a very thin driver that relies on the
underlying low level to the hardware driver having "polling hooks" to
which the tty driver is attached. In the initial implementation of
kgdboc the serial_core was changed to expose a low level UART hook for
doing polled mode reading and writing of a single character while in an
atomic context. When kgdb makes an I/O request to the debugger, kgdboc
invokes a callback in the serial core which in turn uses the callback in
the UART driver.
When using kgdboc with a UART, the UART driver must implement two
callbacks in the :c:type:`struct uart_ops <uart_ops>`.
Example from ``drivers/8250.c``::
#ifdef CONFIG_CONSOLE_POLL
.poll_get_char = serial8250_get_poll_char,
.poll_put_char = serial8250_put_poll_char,
#endif
Any implementation specifics around creating a polling driver use the
``#ifdef CONFIG_CONSOLE_POLL``, as shown above. Keep in mind that
polling hooks have to be implemented in such a way that they can be
called from an atomic context and have to restore the state of the UART
chip on return such that the system can return to normal when the
debugger detaches. You need to be very careful with any kind of lock you
consider, because failing here is most likely going to mean pressing the
reset button.
kgdboc and keyboards
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The kgdboc driver contains logic to configure communications with an
attached keyboard. The keyboard infrastructure is only compiled into the
kernel when ``CONFIG_KDB_KEYBOARD=y`` is set in the kernel configuration.
The core polled keyboard driver driver for PS/2 type keyboards is in
``drivers/char/kdb_keyboard.c``. This driver is hooked into the debug core
when kgdboc populates the callback in the array called
:c:type:`kdb_poll_funcs[]`. The :c:func:`kdb_get_kbd_char` is the top-level
function which polls hardware for single character input.
kgdboc and kms
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The kgdboc driver contains logic to request the graphics display to
switch to a text context when you are using ``kgdboc=kms,kbd``, provided
that you have a video driver which has a frame buffer console and atomic
kernel mode setting support.
Every time the kernel debugger is entered it calls
:c:func:`kgdboc_pre_exp_handler` which in turn calls :c:func:`con_debug_enter`
in the virtual console layer. On resuming kernel execution, the kernel
debugger calls :c:func:`kgdboc_post_exp_handler` which in turn calls
:c:func:`con_debug_leave`.
Any video driver that wants to be compatible with the kernel debugger
and the atomic kms callbacks must implement the ``mode_set_base_atomic``,
``fb_debug_enter`` and ``fb_debug_leave operations``. For the
``fb_debug_enter`` and ``fb_debug_leave`` the option exists to use the
generic drm fb helper functions or implement something custom for the
hardware. The following example shows the initialization of the
.mode_set_base_atomic operation in
drivers/gpu/drm/i915/intel_display.c::
static const struct drm_crtc_helper_funcs intel_helper_funcs = {
[...]
.mode_set_base_atomic = intel_pipe_set_base_atomic,
[...]
};
Here is an example of how the i915 driver initializes the
fb_debug_enter and fb_debug_leave functions to use the generic drm
helpers in ``drivers/gpu/drm/i915/intel_fb.c``::
static struct fb_ops intelfb_ops = {
[...]
.fb_debug_enter = drm_fb_helper_debug_enter,
.fb_debug_leave = drm_fb_helper_debug_leave,
[...]
};
Credits
=======
The following people have contributed to this document:
1. Amit Kale <amitkale@linsyssoft.com>
2. Tom Rini <trini@kernel.crashing.org>
In March 2008 this document was completely rewritten by:
- Jason Wessel <jason.wessel@windriver.com>
In Jan 2010 this document was updated to include kdb.
- Jason Wessel <jason.wessel@windriver.com>

Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show More